BAGUIO GENERAL HOSPITAL MEDICAL CENTER - PROPOSED …bghmc.doh.gov.ph/wp-content/uploads/2020/02/TS... · 2020-02-07 · DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL ACMV Commissioning Requirements

Prepared by: MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES, INC. 25F Chatham House 116 Valero corner V.A. Rufino Street Salcedo Village, Makati City 1227 Philippines 06 April 2018 OSCAR V. RELUCIO Professional Mechanical Engineer Reg. No : 2886 PTR No. : 6619159 Date Issue : 05 January 2018 Issued at : Makati City TIN No : 112-191-886

100% DESIGN DEVELOPMENT

BAGUIO GENERAL HOSPITAL MEDICAL CENTER - PROPOSED TRAUMA CENTER

Baguio City, Philippines

Technical Specifications for

Mechanical Systems

DIVISION 15 –MECHANICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC.

1. Section 01815 - ACMV Commissioning Requirements 2. Section 07841 - Through Penetration Firestopping Systems 3. Section 09910 - Painting-Equipment and Piping 4. Section 15007 - Alternative Equipment and Suppliers 5. Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provisions 6. Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 7. Section 15055 - Motors, Starters, Control Centers & Wiring 8. Section 15071 - Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls 9. Section 15075 - Variable Speed Drives 10. Section 15080 - Mechanical Insulation 11. Section 15183 - Refrigerant Piping 12. Section 15191 - Fuel Oil Storage Tank, Piping and Accessories 13. Section 15781 - DX Split System & Window Type AC 14. Section 15800 - Variable Refrigerant System (VRV) 15. Section 15815 - Metal Ducts and Accessories 16. Section 15836 - Fans & Ventilations

17. Section 15840 - Air Terminal Units 18. Section 15861 - Air Filters 19. Section 15900 - HVAC Instrumentation and Controls 20. Section 15940 - Sequence of Operation 21. Section 15950 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 22. Section 15985 - Carbon Monoxide Detection and Control

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL ACMV Commissioning Requirements SECTION 01815

MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC. S:\admin\mpi\MP1716_Baguio General Hospital and Medical Trauma Center\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2018-04-06_100% DD\01-

MECHANICAL\01815-ACMV Commissioning Requirement.doc

PART 1 - GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 WORK INCLUDED .................................................................................................................................... 1 1.2 COORDINATION ....................................................................................................................................... 1 1.3 RELATED WORK ..................................................................................................................................... 1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................................................. 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................................................ 2

2.1 SCHEDULES AND COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION OF SYSTEMS ............................................................ 2 2.2 RECORD DOCUMENTATION .................................................................................................................... 3 2.3 STARTUP ................................................................................................................................................. 3 2.4 TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................................................................ 4 2.5 OPERATION AND TESTING ...................................................................................................................... 4 2.6 DEMONSTRATION .................................................................................................................................... 4 2.7 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ............................................................................................ 5 2.8 RECORD DRAWINGS ............................................................................................................................... 5 2.9 COMPLETION........................................................................................................................................... 5 2.10 SPARE PARTS ......................................................................................................................................... 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION ....................................................................................................................................... 5

3.1 COMMISSIONING TESTS .......................................................................................................................... 5 3.2 ACMV SYSTEM ...................................................................................................................................... 5 3.3 OTHER SERVICES ................................................................................................................................... 6 3.4 POST SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE VISITS ........................................................................................... 6


MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC. Page 1 of 6 S:\admin\mpi\MP1716_Baguio General Hospital and Medical Trauma Center\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2018-04-06_100% DD\01-MECHANICAL\01815-

ACMV Commissioning Requirement.doc

SECTION 01815

ACMV COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Comply with the Agreement between the Construction Manager and Trade Sub-Contractor and all other documents referred to therein.

B. Provide all services, materials and labour required to fully commission the mechanical

systems in accordance with this Section of the Specification.

1.2 COORDINATION A. Meet the requirements of the General Instructions.

B. Coordinate the work of this Section with all other Divisions to ensure complete and

operational mechanical systems at completion of this work.

C. Appoint a single person as Commissioning Coordinator who shall be responsible for progressing the commissioning activities of each Division 15 trade. The Commissioning Coordinator shall report to the Commissioning Manager.

D. Review the design intent of the project and the intended operation of systems with the

Consultant before proceeding with commissioning.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 15010 – Mechanical General Provisions. B. Section 15950 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with CIBSE CODES (Chartered Institution For Building Services Engineers).

Refer to Section 15950 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for more detailed requirements on testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. The “Employers Representative” may elect to source start-up and handover by a

specialist commissioning company. This commissioning specialists is to be employed by the Contractor. Supply to the Commissioning Manager, the following details regarding the proposed firm:

1. Principle representative and qualifications

2. Proposed personnel and relevant project experience

3. Previous similar assignments and references

4. Scope of work to be undertaken

5. Company resources and equipment

C. Use of a commissioning specialist shall not relieve Division 15 of the obligation to

name one of his own employees as the person responsible for progressing commissioning, i.e. the Commissioning Coordinator. Note: All works to be undertaken by the Contractor.




D. Supply the name, qualifications and experience of the proposed Commissioning Coordinator upon Project Managers request. Selection shall be subject to review and the approval of the Consultant. Supply alternative person(s) when requested by Consultant.

E. The Consultant may, at his discretion, attend and advise in the commissioning

process. Meet Consultant requirements.

F. Hold and attend regular meetings during the commissioning process. Prepare detailed progress reports to coincide with regular commissioning meetings. Coordinate with the Commissioning Manager, the preparation and issue of minutes for each meeting to be circulated to each involved trade, the Consultant and the Construction Manager representative(s). Minutes shall highlight action items.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SCHEDULES AND COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION OF SYSTEMS A. Submit to the Consultant, 60 days prior to the scheduled Substantial Performance, a

detailed and comprehensive installation completion/startup/testing schedule, identifying all trades and suppliers to be involved. Update the schedule and resubmit for review, on a biweekly basis, during the course of commissioning. If found to be unacceptable, revise the schedule and the construction forces to suit the reviewed schedule. This schedule shall include, but is not limited to the following items:

1. Installation and testing of Refrigerant Piping systems. Very strict compliance

to manufacturer’s recommendations is required with regards to quality of workmanship and testing procedures for refrigerant piping works such as pipe covering, flushing, air-tightness of soldered, flared and flanged joints, vacuum drying and nitrogen replacement. This is to ensure that no moisture and dirt is left inside the pipe and guarantee no refrigerant leaks.

2. Installation, leak testing and cleaning of duct systems.

3. Control system wiring

4. Air balancing

5. Electrical service connections

6. Equipment suppliers pre-start checkout of the equipment installations,

including controls.

7. Start up of various pieces of equipment and systems. 8. Operational testing of system components. 9. Performance testing of equipment and systems. 10. Acceptance testing of equipment installations and system, by authorities

having jurisdiction and Contractor's insurance company

11. Troubleshooting

12. Calibration of controls and point checkout

13. Control software set-up and checkout including seasonal and response checkout of operating sequences, PID optimization




14. Emergency system checkout 15. Fire alarm and control system interfacing

16. Submittal of completed equipment and system checkout sheets

17. Demonstration of systems and equipment

18. Maintenance manual preparation and submittal

19. Operator training program

20. Record documentation submittal

2.2 RECORD DOCUMENTATION A. Prepare record documentation for each equipment installation covering:

1. Equipment identification and supplier

2. Shop Drawing submittal, review, production release, and delivery dates

3. Dates for completion of all work required to prepare for equipment installation

4. Dates for equipment installation, supplier pre-start checkout and system

availability for start-up

5. Dates for equipment start-up, performance testing, proposal for temporary use, acceptance testing, demonstration, turnover and warranty start/finish

B. Submit proposed record sheets and procedures to Consultant for review, when

requested by the Contractor.

C. List all specialist personnel and equipment required for the test and ensure that these are available by the test date.

D. Provide documentation of the commissioning process for inclusion into the

maintenance manuals. These are to include checkout sheets, equipment data sheets, start-up certificates from suppliers involved in start-up, documentation concerning demonstration to the Contractor. Include all record and result sheets form commissioning tests.

E. Maintain a log of key operating parameters, problems encountered, solutions

employed and verification of effectiveness of solutions. Include log in maintenance manuals.

F. Refer to example documentation available from Construction manager's

representative. Meet or exceed this level of reporting.

2.3 STARTUP A. Coordinate and supervise the start-up of the various pieces of equipment and

systems. Utilize the start-up services of the manufacturer's representative. Ensure that the equipment is operating in a satisfactory manner. Including, but not necessary limited to the following:

1. Direction of rotation

2. Grease and lubricants




3. Noise, if deemed to be a problem

4. Seals

5. Alignment of fan drives by a millwright

6. Piping connections and safeties

7. Electrical amp draw, starting inrush current and trip/heater settings

B. Refer to Section 15010 – Mechanical General Provision requirements for Temporary Services and Temporary and Trial Use.

2.4 TROUBLESHOOTING A. Resolve inter Division coordination problems.

B. Where problems become apparent during the commissioning process, identify and

resolve these problems. The basic functions in troubleshooting are:

1. What - identification and definition of the problem

2. Why - determination and evaluation of the causes

3. When - determine the time available to resolve the problem

4. Involve the designing authority in the review of the problem and proposed resolution

5. Coordinate remedial action with the appropriate parties

6. Evaluate the effectiveness of the remedial action

7. Record the problem, cause, remedial action and result

2.5 OPERATION AND TESTING A. Refer to Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provision for Inspection, Testing and

Certificates.

B. Test the operation of the individual components and systems. Go through each step of the sequence of operation and verify that each component operates correctly. Direct and ensure that all trades involved make the required changes and adjustments to effect the proper operation of all components and systems. Meet commissioning test requirements.

C. Document operation and testing. D. Carry out operational tests for the current season and simulate operation of summer,

winter and intermediate seasons.

2.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate to the Contractor the proper operation of all equipment and systems

supplied under this Division. Demonstrations shall occur only after the operation and testing has been successfully completed. Ensure that Trade Sub-Contractor and equipment suppliers participate in the demonstration as required.

B. Refer to Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provision for Instruction to Contractors.




2.7 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Refer to Section - 15010 Mechanical General Provision.

B. Coordinate the manual provision with Consultant prepared Operation and

Maintenance Manual, if available.

2.8 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Refer to Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provision.

2.9 COMPLETION A. Refer to Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provision.

2.10 SPARE PARTS A. Provide a list of spare parts, special tools, lubricants, etc. for each item of equipment

which has been purchased as part of the Contract.

B. Provide a listing of recommended spare parts for all equipment installed under Division 15, to cover a period from Substantial Completion to Warranty end.

C. Provide at minimum, the following information for recommended spare parts:

1. Manufacturer's name, address, phone and fax numbers 2. Manufacturer's part name, part number, unit price, lead time, shelf life 3. Quantity recommended for 1 year 4. Alternative suppliers of compatible parts, including local supplier name,

address, phone and fax numbers

D. Submit preliminary list of spare parts and tools to Contractor at least 30 days prior to intended system handover to Contractor. The Contractor reserves the right to add to, reduce or omit entirely, the recommendations contained on these lists.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMISSIONING TESTS 3.1.1 Refer to Section 15950 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.

3.2 ACMV SYSTEM A. Verify readings, calibration and set-up of sensors and equipment, including, but not

necessary limited to checking the following:

1. Temperature sensors 2. Air flow switches 3. Status switches 4. Pressure gauges and gauge connection utilization 5. Control damper positioning, including tightness when closed and full

open/balance position 6. Alarm contacts

B. Verify correct sensors are reporting accurately to the distributed field panels and

operator workstation.




C. Operate each major equipment. Verify and correct the following if required:

1. Start/stop from the terminal 2. Correct open/close and modulation procedures with valves and dampers

3. Stable operation of controls under normal conditions and with changes in

air/refrigerant/on/off conditions

4. Trend logs operation indication

5. Piping, sensor and unit installation

6. Filters for return air.

7. Drain pan operation and trap priming D. Verify duct cleaning, air balancing and air pattern adjustments.

E. Verify access to each fire damper.

F. Verify that all cooling coil drain pans and condensate piping operate.

3.3 OTHER SERVICES

A. Demonstrate access to all valves, equipment and components for servicing. B. Coordinate with Division 16, a power failure test with emergency generator start-up.

1. Miscellaneous equipment on emergency power, with Division 16.

2. Stability of control equipment with start-up power surge

3. Controls system recovery

C. Verify the operation of all other equipment provided by Division 15.

D. Verify that interfacing to the work of other Divisions results in complete and

operational systems.

3.4 POST SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE VISITS A. Visit the site and the Contractor's representative each month after Substantial

Performance for a minimum period of two days until the end of the project warranty period.

B. Review the operation of the system.

C. Correct any operating problems, if problem is related to warranty issues.

D. Prepare a report for the Consultant and Construction Manager for inclusion in the

Operating Manuals of the problems and issues that have arisen and the corrective action(s) recommended and implement.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Through Penetration Firestopping Systems SECTION 07841

MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC. S:\admin\mpi\MP1716_Baguio General Hospital and Medical Trauma Center\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2018-04-06_100% DD\01-MECHANICAL\07841-Through Penetration and Firestopping System.doc

PART 1- GENERAL ............................................................................................................................ 1

1.1 DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................................................... 1 1.2 SUBMITTALS ............................................................................................................................................ 1 1.3 DELIVERY AND STORAGE ....................................................................................................................... 1 1.4 GUARANTEE ............................................................................................................................................ 1 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................................................. 1 1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS ................................................................................................................... 1

PART 2 – PRODUCTS ....................................................................................................................... 2

2.1 FIRESTOP SYSTEMS ............................................................................................................................... 2 2.2 SMOKE STOPPING IN SMOKE PARTITIONS ............................................................................................. 3

PART 3 – EXECUTION ....................................................................................................................... 3

3.1 EXAMINATION .......................................................................................................................................... 3 3.2 PREPARATION ......................................................................................................................................... 3 3.3 INSTALLATION ......................................................................................................................................... 3 3.4 CLEAN-UP AND ACCEPTANCE OF WORK ................................................................................................ 4


MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC. Page 1 of 4 S:\admin\mpi\MP1716_Baguio General Hospital and Medical Trauma Center\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2018-04-06_100% DD\01-MECHANICAL\07841-Through Penetration and Firestopping System.doc

SECTION 07841 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Closures of openings in walls, floors, and roof decks against penetration of flame,

heat, and smoke or gases in fire resistant rated construction. B. Closure of openings in walls against penetration of gases or smoke in smoke

partitions.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. All submittals shall be certified and approved by the manufacturer’s representative

prior to submission to the Consultant.

B. Manufacturer’s literature, data, and installation instructions for types of firestopping and smoke stopping used.

C. List of FM, UL, or WH classification number of systems installed.

D. Certified laboratory test reports for ASTM E 814 tests for systems not listed by FM,

UL, or WH proposed for use.

E. Acceptable Manufacturers: Refer to Section 15007 F. For equipment and material submittals, provide certificate of origin to be included in

the submittal and bill of lading before delivery to site.

1.3 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Deliver materials in their original unopened containers with manufacturer’s name and

product identification. B. Store in a location providing protection from damage and exposure to the elements.

1.4 GUARANTEE

Firestopping work subject to the terms of the Article GUARANTY except extend the guaranty period to five years.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

FM. UL, or WH or other approved laboratory tested products will be acceptable.

1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

The Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

ASTM E84- Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials



ASTM E814- Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops

B. Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Corporation (FM):

Annual Issue Approval Guide Building Materials

C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops Annual Issue Building Materials Directory Annual Issue Fire Resistance Directory

D. Warnock Hersey (WH):

Annual Issue Certification Listings

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRESTOP SYSTEMS

A. Use either factory built (Firestop Devices) or field erected through-Penetration

(Firestop Systems) to form a specific building system maintaining required integrity of the fire barrier and stop the passage of gases of smoke.

B. Through-Penetration firestop systems and firestop devices tested in accordance with

ASTM E814 or UL 1479 using the “F” or “T” rating to maintain the same rating and integrity as the fire barrier being sealed. “T” ratings are not required for penetrations smaller than or equal to 100 mm (4 in) nominal pipe or 0.01 m² (16 sq.in) in overall cross sectional area.

C. Products requiring heat activation to seal an opening by its intumescences shall

exhibit a demonstrated ability to function as designed to maintain the fire barrier.

D. Firestop sealants used for firestopping or smoke sealing shall have following properties:

1. Contain no flammable or toxic solvents.

2. Have no dangerous or flammable outgassing during the drying or curing of

products.

3. Water-resistant after drying or curing and unaffected by high humidity, condensation or transient water exposure.

4. When used in exposed areas, shall be capable of being sanded and finished

with similar surface treatments as used on the surrounding wall or floor surface.

E. Firestopping system or devices used for penetrations by glass pipe, plastic pipe or

conduits, unenclosed cables, or other non-metallic materials shall have following properties:

1. Classified for used with the particular type of penetrating material used.



2. Penetrations containing loose electrical cables, computer data cables and communications cables protected using firestopping systems that allow unrestricted cable changes without damage to the seal.

3. Intumescent products which would expand to seal the opening and act as

fire, smoke, toxic fumes, and, water sealant.

F. Maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke development of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

G. FM, UL, or WH rated or tested by an approved laboratory in accordance with ASTM

E814.

H. Materials to be asbestos free.

2.2 SMOKE STOPPING IN SMOKE PARTITIONS

A. Use silicone sealant in smoke partitions as specified in Section 3 Part 9, Adhesives,

Caulking , Sealants and Fasteners. B. Use mineral fiber filler and bond breaker behind sealant.

C. Sealants shall have a maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke developed of 50 when

tested in accordance with E84.

D. When used in exposed areas capable of being sanded and finished with similar surface treatments as used on the surrounding wall or floor surface.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

Submit product data and installation instructions, as required by article, submittals, after an on site examination of areas to receive firestopping.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove dirt, grease, oil, loose materials, or other substances that prevent adherence

and bonding or application of the firestopping or smoke stopping materials.

B. Remove insulation on insulated pipe for a distance of 150 mm (six inches) on either side of the fire rated assembly prior to applying the firestopping materials unless the firestopping materials are tested and approved for use on insulated pipes.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Do not begin work until the specified material data and installation instructions of the

proposed firestopping systems have been submitted and approved.

B. Install firestopping systems with smoke stopping in accordance with FM, UL, WH, or other approved system details and installation instructions.

C. Install smoke stopping seals in smoke partitions.



3.4 CLEAN-UP AND ACCEPTANCE OF WORK

A. As work on each floor is completed, remove materials, litter, and debris.

B. Do not move materials and equipment to the next-scheduled work area until

completed work is inspected and accepted by the Resident Engineer.

C. Clean up spills of liquid type materials.

D. Contractor’s Installation of all firestopping materials and products shall be closely supervised by manufacturer’s representative.

E. Regular inspection shall be done by the manufacturer’s representative to ascertain

that the works are being done according to the design intent. A copy of the inspection report with all its findings and recommendations including the corrective works implemented shall be forwarded to the Consultant on regular basis.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Painting-Equipment and Piping SECTION 09910

MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC. S:\admin\mpi\MP1716_Baguio General Hospital and Medical Trauma Center\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2018-04-06_100% DD\01-

MECHANICAL\09910-Painting-Equipment and Piping.doc

PART 1 - GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................... 1

1.1. WORK INCLUDED .................................................................................................................................... 1 1.2. RELATED WORK ..................................................................................................................................... 1 1.3. DEFINITIONS ........................................................................................................................................... 1 1.4. SURFACES NOT REQUIRING PAINTING .................................................................................................. 2 1.5. EQUIPMENT SAFETY COLOR CODING .................................................................................................... 2 1.6. PIPING SAFETY COLOR CODING ............................................................................................................ 3 1.7. WARRANTY ............................................................................................................................................. 3 1.8. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................................................. 3 1.9. QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................................................. 3 1.10. QUALIFICATION ....................................................................................................................................... 4 1.11. COORDINATION....................................................................................................................................... 4 1.12. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................................... 4 1.13. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .................................................................................................. 4 1.14. SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................................................................... 4 1.15. EXTRA STOCK ........................................................................................................................................ 5

PART 2 – PRODUCTS ....................................................................................................................................... 5

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ............................................................................................................ 5 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS................................................................................................................................... 5

PART 3 – EXECUTION....................................................................................................................................... 7

3.1 INSPECTION ............................................................................................................................................ 7 3.2 PREPARATION OF METAL SURFACES .................................................................................................... 7 3.3 PROTECTION ........................................................................................................................................... 8 3.4 APPLICATION .......................................................................................................................................... 8 3.5 DAMAGED COATINGS ............................................................................................................................. 9 3.6 CLEANING ............................................................................................................................................... 9 3.7 EQUIPMENT AND PIPING PAINTING SCHEDULE ...................................................................................... 9



Painting-Equipment and Piping.doc

SECTION 09910

PAINTING-EQUIPMENT AND PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. WORK INCLUDED

A. This Section specifies the requirements necessary to furnish and apply equipment and piping painting, including:

1. Surface Preparation: Prime and finish paint for the referenced mechanical equipment, vessels, and piping.

2. Safety color coding of equipment and piping.

3. Repair and touchup of damaged factory applied coatings on mechanical and electrical equipment.

1.2. RELATED WORK

A. This Section shall be used in conjunction with the following other specifications and related Contract Documents to establish the total requirements for painting of the referenced equipment, vessels, and piping:

1. Division 1 sections included in the project specifications.

2. The Subcontract.

4. Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods

B. CAUTION! Use of this Section without including all of the above-listed items will result in omission of basic requirements.

C. In the event of conflict regarding the requirements for painting of the referenced equipment, vessels, and piping between this Section and any other section, the provisions of this Section shall govern.

1.3. DEFINITIONS

A. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council Specifications:

1. SP-1: Solvent Cleaning.

2. SP-2: Hand Tool Cleaning.

3. SP-3: Power Tool Cleaning.

4. SP-5: White Metal Blast Cleaning.

5. SP-6: Commercial Blast Cleaning.

6. SP-7: Brush-Off Blast Cleaning.

7. SP-8: Pickling.

8. SP-10: Near-White Blast Cleaning.

B. Shop Finish: Prime, paint, or prime and paint finishes applied prior to delivering equipment to project site.

C. Field Finish: Finish applied at project site; may be applied before or after equipment installation.




D. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section.

E. Abbreviations:

1. MDFT - Minimum Dry Film Thickness.

2. MDFTPC - Minimum Dry Film Thickness Per Coat.

3. mil - Thousandth of an inch.

4. PSDS - Paint System Data Sheet.

5. SP - Surface Preparation.

1.4. SURFACES NOT REQUIRING PAINTING

A. The following materials, items, or surfaces do not require shop or field surface preparation and coating unless otherwise specified on the equipment drawings

1. Plated surfaces.

2. Insulation jacketing.

3. Interior surfaces of tanks, fans, heaters, and stacks.

4. Nonferrous surfaces.

5. Nonmetallic surfaces.

6. Polished surfaces or machinery.

7. Uninsulated stainless steel surfaces.

1.5. EQUIPMENT SAFETY COLOR CODING

A. Except where local jurisdiction requirements are more restrictive, comply with the latest published federal and state requirements for safety color coding for marking physical hazards and dangerous material identification.

B. Color Marking of Physical Hazards: Comply with ANSI Z35.1 “Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards”.

C. Safety Yellow: Identify physical hazards using solid yellow, yellow and black stripes, or yellow and black checkers; use the combination that will attract the most attention.

D. Safety Orange:

1. Using safety orange, identify dangerous parts of machines or energized equipment which may crush, cut, shock, or otherwise injure.

2. Provide safety orange safety color coding on the following:

a. Inside movable guards.

b. Safety starting buttons.

c. Exposed parts (edges only) of pulleys, gears, rollers, cutting devices, power jaws, etc.

E. Safety Red: Identify the following fire protection equipment using safety red:

1. Fire suppression hose connections.

2. Fire hydrants.

3. All other wet and dry type fire suppression equipment.




1.6. PIPING SAFETY COLOR CODING

A. Provide safety color coding for all above ground piping and valves, excepting electrical conduit.

B. Safety Color Coding - Provide coding colors as follows:

1. Safety Red: Fire suppression sprinkler, CO2 and HALON piping.

2. Safety Yellow: Pipes containing acids, solvents, harmful gases, nonpotable city water, or other hazardous materials.

3. Safety Blue: Potable water services.

4. Safety Green: Chilled Water

1.7. WARRANTY

A. Coating manufacturer and installer jointly and severally warrant to Client the work of this Section against defective workmanship and materials for a period of one year commencing on the date of final acceptance of the Work.

1.8. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform with safety requirements as outlined on manufacturer’s Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for each product specified herewith.

B. Protect personnel from harmful toxic fumes associated with specified paint materials, as indicated on product MSDS and as required by OSHA.

C. Dispose of paint related wastes in conformance with EPA or equivalent local environmental protection agency requirements.

1.9. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Client and Contractor will engage services of an independent testing agency to execute methods of inspection including the following items and indicated instruments:

Inspection Item Inspection Instrument

Surface Profile Keane-Tator Surface Profile Comparator

Surface Cleanliness SSPC-Vis-1

Viscosity Zahn Viscosimeter

Wet Film Thickness Nordson Wet Film Thickness Gauge

Dry Film Thickness Mikrotest Dry Film Thickness Gauge

Temperature and Humidity Gardner Certified Hygrometer and Temperature Indicator

B. Client and Contractor may utilize other inspection instruments deemed equal in performance to those specified herewith.




1.10. QUALIFICATION

A. General Contractor: Company specializing in industrial coating applications with three years documented industrial experience and acceptable to product manufacturer.

1.11. COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the work of this Section with Section 15050, Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods

1.12. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain interior surface and ambient temperatures above 50 degrees F for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes; unless otherwise specified by coating manufacturer.

B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain, snow, or when relative humidity is above 50 percent; unless otherwise specified by coating manufacturer. Do not apply exterior coatings when surfaces are in direct sunlight where surface temperature of substrate exceeds manufacturer’s recommendations.

1.13. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in well ventilated area, unless required by manufacturer’s specifications.

B. Provide storage facilities outside of buildings being constructed; limit quantities in buildings which are part of the Work to daily use.

C. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.

1.14. SUBMITTALS

A. Provide the following in addition to the standard requirements with the Bid:

1. Manufacturer’s data and specifications for each product specified herewith; highlight portions of product literature which show conformance with this Section.

2. Three samples of manufacturer’s standard colors for the A/E’s review and selection; review for acceptance of color, only.

B. Samples for Color Verification: Submit three samples 8-1/2 by 11 inches in size illustrating range of color for each surface finishing product scheduled or specified in indicated colors, for the A/E’s review; review for acceptance of color, only.

C. For equipment and material submittals, provide certificate of origin to be included in the submittal and bill of lading before delivery to site.




1.15. EXTRA STOCK

A. Provide to Contractor one five gallon batch mixed, unopened container of each color of each type of finish paint used.

B. In addition to the manufacturer’s label, label each container with color, and location(s) of application.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

Per Architect’s Preference

2.2 PAINT MATERIALS

A. Provide primers and finish coatings which conform to the performance requirements and generic description specified herewith, and are compatible as a system as indicated in Article 3.7, Equipment and Piping Painting Schedule.

B. Steel Primers:

1. Inorganic Zinc Rich Primer (Type P-1):

a. Minimum Surface Preparation: In shop: SSPC-SP10; in field: SP-2 or SP-3.

b. Flash Point: 70 degrees F (TOC).

c. MDFTPC: 2.5 mils.

d. Number of Coats: one.

e. Minimum Zinc in Dried Film: 10.0 grams/sf.

f. Service Temperature Limit: 600 degrees F.

2. Universal Primer (Type P-2):

a. Minimum Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP2 or 3.




e. Service Temperature Limit: 150 degrees F.

3. Modified Inorganic Zinc Rich Primer (Type P-3):

a. Minimum Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP3.





C. Steel Finishes:

1. Polyurethane Paint (Type F-1):

a. Flash Point: 70 degrees F (SETA).

b. MDFTPC: 5.0 mils.




c. Number of Coats: one.

d. Service Temperature Limit: 200 degrees F.

2. Silicone Acrylic Based Paint (Type F-2):

a. Flash Point: 80 degrees F (SETA).

b. MDFTPC: 2.0 mils.

c. Number of Coats: one.

d. Service Temperature Limit: 400 degrees F.

3. Silicone Aluminum Paint (Type F-3):




d. Number of Coats: two.

e. Service Temperature Limit: 1,000 degrees F.

4. Silicone Paint (Type F-4):

a. Minimum Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP2 or 3.

b. Flash Point: 45 degrees F (PM).




5. Coal Tar Epoxy Coating (Type F-5):






6. Alkyd Enamel Paint (Type F-6):

a. Minimum Surface Preparation: Primer P-1.

b. Minimum Solids by Volume: 45 percent.




D. Factory tint coatings; no field tinting allowed.

E. Formulate color with colorants free of lead and lead compounds.

F. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, industrial quality and in accordance with coating manufacturer’s recommendations.





3.1 INSPECTION

A. Verify that surfaces and substrate conditions are ready to receive work as specified by the product manufacturer.

B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be coated prior to commencement of Work; report any condition that may potentially affect proper application.

C. Verify that all sharp edges are round or chamfered; burrs, jagged edges and surface defects are ground smooth.

D. Inspect welds and adjacent areas and verify that there are:

1. No undercutting or reverse ridges on the weld bead.

2. No weld spatter on or adjacent to the weld or any other area to be painted.

3. No sharp peaks or ridges along the weld bead.

4. All embedded pieces of electrode or wire are ground flush with the adjacent surface of the weld bead.

E. Verify that environmental conditions are in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications.

F. Notify Contractor 24 hours prior to commencement of Work; at Client’s discretion, tests specified in Article 1.9 will be conducted prior to applying coatings.

G. Beginning of installation means acceptance by applicator of existing surfaces and substrate.

3.2 PREPARATION OF METAL SURFACES

A. Prepare surfaces conforming to SSPC specifications as applicable for coating scheduled and in accordance with coating manufacturer’s specification; in the event of conflict between specifications, the more restrictive shall prevail.

B. Preblast Cleaning Requirements:

1. Remove all oil, grease, welding fluxes, and other surface contaminants prior to blast cleaning.

2. Preblast clean using steam, open flame, hot water, or cold water with appropriate detergent additives followed with clean water rinsing.

3. Clean small isolated areas as above or solvent clean with suitable solvents and clean cloths.

4. Prior to abrasive blast cleaning, protect all equipment and adjacent surfaces which may be damaged by blast, dust, or particulate matter; protected items include, but are not limited to rotating shafts, bearings, valves, machined moving parts, motors, and prefinished equipment.

C. Blast Cleaning Requirements:

1. Abrasives for blast cleaning are clean and dry and conform to SSPC specification requirements.




2. Compressed air is free from oil and moisture.

3. Comply with applicable federal, state, and local air pollution control regulations for blast cleaning.

4. Alternatives to standard abrasive blast cleaning methods subject to review by the A/E and approval by coating manufacturer.

D. Post Blast Cleaning Requirements:

1. Clean surfaces free of dust and residual particles by dry (no oil or water vapor) air blast cleaning or other method prior to painting; vacuum clean in enclosed areas and other areas where dust settling is a problem; wipe with tack cloth.

2. Paint surfaces the same day they are abrasive blast cleaned; reblast rusted surfaces prior to painting.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Remove, mask, or otherwise protect hardware, lighting fixtures, coverplates, aluminum surfaces, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, nameplates, prefinished items and other surfaces not scheduled to be painted by this Section.

B. Provide drop cloths to prevent paint materials from falling on or marring adjacent surfaces.

C. Store solvent and thinner, contaminated rags and similar refuse in UL rated containers; remove daily accumulations and empty paint containers from the site at the end of each day’s work.

3.4 APPLICATION

A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and as specified herein.

B. Shop Primed Surfaces:

1. Damaged Surfaces:

a. Hand or power sand areas of chipped, peeled, or abraded coatings feathering the edges.

b. Spot prime the areas with the specified primer.

2. Prior to application of finish coats clean shop primed surfaces of all dirt, oil, and grease.

3. After welding prepare and prime welding hold-back areas as required for specified finish.

4. Shop prime all ferrous metal material prior to delivery to project site.

C. Number of Coats:

1. The number of coats are the minimum required irrespective of the coating thickness.

2. Additional coats may be required to obtain the minimum required paint thickness, depending on method of application, differences in manufacturer’s products, and atmospheric conditions.




3. Do not exceed coating manufacturer’s recommendations regarding maximum film build per coat.

D. Apply paint with brush, roller, or spray equipment as directed by manufacturer’s specifications; equip spray equipment with traps or separators to remove oil and condensate from air supply.

3.5 DAMAGED COATINGS

A. Damaged Coatings, Pinholes, and Holidays: Feather edges and repair in accordance with coating manufacturer’s directions, as reviewed by the A/E.

B. Apply all finish coats, including touchup and damage repair coats in a manner which will present a uniform, color-matched appearance.

C. Factory Finished Equipment:

1. Touchup damaged, factory finished equipment utilizing prime and finish materials identical to the factory applied materials.

2. Items which may require touchup include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Control equipment.

b. Electrical equipment.

c. Motors, drivers, pumps, and compressors of packaged mechanical equipment.

d. Fabricator’s prepainted stock items not identified in the painting schedule.

D. Touch up damaged portions of inorganic zinc-rich primed surfaces with Type P-3 primer prior to applying finish coating.

3.6 CLEANING

A. As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered.

B. During progress of Work, maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris.

C. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and remove daily from site.

3.7 EQUIPMENT AND PIPING PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. General:

1. Temperatures noted in item B below are maximum allowable operating temperatures and not material design temperatures.

2. Refer to Section 15050, Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods

B. Piping – Clean Sub Fab Level:

1. Paint System P-33, as specified in Section 09915, Building Painting.

2. Color: as specified in Piping Schedule.




C. Piping – Interstitial level areas in the clean air stream:

1. Paint system P-36, as specified in Section 09915, Building Painting.

2. Additional Acceptable Product: Sherwin-Williams fast Dry Universal Primer, B50 AW3 with Sherwin-Williams Steel Spec fast Dry Alkyd Gloss, B55 800.

3. Color: as specified in Piping Schedule.

D. Vessels and Exchangers:

1. Uninsulated carbon steel surfaces:

a. 200 degrees F and below:

i. Primer: P-1.

ii. Finish: F-1.

iii. Color: Black.

b. 201 degrees F through 400 degrees F:

i. Primer: P-1.

ii. Finish: F-2.

iii. Color: Black.

c. 401 degrees F through 1,000 degrees F:

i. Primer: None.

ii. Finish: F-3.

iii. Color: Aluminum.

2. Insulated carbon steel surfaces:


i. Primer: P-1

i. Finish: None.

ii. Color: Manufacturer’s standard.

b. 71 degrees F and above:

i. Primer: None.

ii. Finish: None.

iii. Color: _____.

3. Stainless steel surfaces prior to insulation - 800 800 degrees F and below:

a. Primer: None.

b. Finish: F-4.

c. Color: Black.

D. Skirts, cradles, and supports which do not require fireproofing:

1. Exterior locations:

i. Primer: P-2.

ii. Finish: F-6.

iii. Color: Match adjacent wall surface

2. Interior locations:

i. Primer: P-2.

ii. Finish: F-6.

iii. Color: White.

3. Skirts, Cradles, and Supports Which Require Fireproofing: Rust-inhibiting primer approved by fireproofing manufacturer.




E. Piping and Fittings:

1. Uninsulated carbon steel surfaces:


i. Primer: P-1.

ii. Finish: F-1.

iii. Color: Black.


i. Primer: P-1.

ii. Finish: F-2.

iii. Color: Black.


i. Primer: None.

ii. Finish: F-3.


2. Insulated carbon steel surfaces:


i. Primer: P-1.

ii. Finish: None.

iii. Color: Manufacturer’s standard.

b. 71 degrees F and above:

i. Primer: None.

ii. Finish: None.

iii. Color: Black.

3. Stainless steel surfaces prior to insulation - 800 degrees F and below:

a. Primer: None.

b. Finish: F-4.

c. Color: Black.

4. Fire Water Piping - all above grade locations:

a. Primer: P-1.

b. Finish: F-1.

c. Color: Safety Red.

5. Uninsulated carbon steel surfaces continuously exposed to water overspray from cooling towers.

a. Primer: None

b. Finish: F-7

c. Color: White, do not tint.

F. Fired Heaters (Carbon Steel):

1. Radiant and convection sections:


i. Primer: P-1.

ii. Finish: F-1.

iii. Color: _____.





i. Primer: P-1.

ii. Finish: F-2.

iii. Color: _____.


i. Primer: None.

ii. Finish: F-3.


2. Stacks and Ducts:


i. Primer: P-1.

ii. Finish: F-1.

iii. Color: _____.


i. Primer: P-1.

ii. Finish: F-2.

iii. Color: _____.


i. Primer: None.

ii. Finish: F-3.


G. Tanks (Carbon Steel):

1. Uninsulated Surfaces:


i. Primer: P-1.

ii. Finish: F-1.

iii. Color: Gray.


i. Primer: P-1.

ii. Finish: F-2.

iii. Color: Gray.

2. Insulated Surfaces:


i. Primer: P-1.

ii. Finish: None.

iii. Color: Manufacturer’s standard.

c. 71 degrees F and above:

i. Primer: None.

ii. Finish: None.

iii. Color: White.

H. Rotary Equipment (not part of packaged units):

1. Compressors:

a. Primer: P-2.

b. Finish: F-1.

c. Color: Manufacturer’s standard.




2. Drivers:

a. Primer: P-2.

b. Finish: F-1.


3. Motors:

a. Primer: P-2.

b. Finish: F-1.


4. Pumps:

a. Primer: P-2.

b. Finish: F-1.


I. Fire Equipment - Hydrants, hose reel boxes, hose reels, etc. (over manufacturer’s finish):

1. Primer: P-2.

2. Finish: F-1.

3. Color: Safety Red.

J. Mechanical and Electrical Equipment - Exterior, roof mounted, primed steel:

1. Primer: Factory primer.

2. Finish: F-6.

3. Color: Match adjacent surfaces.

K. Process Equipment - Filter Press:

1. Primer: P-2.

2. Finish: F-1.

3. Color: Manufacturer’s standard.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Alternative Equipment and Suppliers SECTION 15007

MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC. Page 1 of 8 S:\admin\mpi\MP1716_Baguio General Hospital and Medical Trauma Center\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2018-04-06_100% DD\01-MECHANICAL\15007-Alternative Equipment and Suppliers.docx

SECTION 15007 ALTERNATIVE EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIERS

PART 1 – GENERAL INFORMATION

1.1 Where a choice of equipment is given, indicate selection by submitting this Section. 1.2 Where modifications to the work of Other Trades are required as a result or part of the

alternative offered, include the cost of said modifications in the alternative price offered. 1.3 Submit the following list of base bid and alternative suppliers in accordance with Bid

requirements.

Spec. Reference

Section

Equipment Reference Bid

Alternative “A” Manufacturer or Supplier

Alternative “B” Mfg. or Supplier

Name

15050 Hangers & Supports

Grinnell Gripple Hilti Myatt Unitstrut

Caddy-Erico Diamond Walraven Eristrutt Hokki Superstrutt

Locally fabricated of equivalent quality

15055 Motors G.E. TECO U.S Westinghouse WEG

N/A

Starters, Contactors & Motor Control Centre

ABB Eton GE Schneider Siemens

N/A

Conductors and Cables

Columbia Phelps Dodge Philflex

N/A

Non-Metallic Conduit and Tubing

Atlanta Emerald Moldex Neltex

N/A

Metallic Conduit and Tubing

Allied Matsushita/Panasonic Mcgill

Smart Tube Sumitomo

N/A

Control Communication Cables

AMP Netconnect/Tyco Electronics/Krone/ Commscope Anixter Belden/Nordx/CDT Clipsal LS Cables Leviton Panduit Schneider/Actassi Siemon

N/A

15071 Vibration & Seismic Controls

Mason Metraflex VCS Vibration Eliminator VMCI

Kinetic Noise Control Vibration Isolated

System (VIS)

N/A



Spec. Reference

Section




Name

15071 Vibration & Seismic Controls

Mason Metraflex VCS Vibration Eliminator VMCI

Kinetic Noise Control Vibration Isolated

System (VIS)

N/A

15075 Variable Speed Drives

Danfoss Siemens Yaskawa

ABB Honeywell Schneider Toshiba

N/A

15080 Duct Insulation

1. Flexible Elastomeric

Aeroflex Class “O” Armaflex Class “O” K-Flex ST Class “O”

Armaflex Class “1” Aeroflex Class “1” K-Flex EC Class “1”

N/A

2. Polyolefin Thermobreak Aerofoam Genshield Thermalink Xcellon

N/A

3. Rockwool (Kitchen & Genset Exhaust)

Roxul N/A

Pipe Insulation

1. Flexible Elastomeric

Armaflex Class “O” Aeroflex Class “O” K-Flex ST Class “O”

Armaflex Class “1” Aeroflex Class “1” K-Flex EC Class “1”

N/A

2. Polyolefin

Thermobreak “Tube” Aerofoam Genshield Thermalink Xcellon

N/A

15181 Valves (Gate, Ball, Globe, Check and Y-Strainers)

Crane ICV (AVK) Nibco Oventrop Victaulic

Gala Honeywell (bronze only) Kitz (Japan) Maple OKI Showa (Japan) Tozen (Japan) Nenutec

Weilong

15181 Butterfly Valves (Manual and Motorized)

ICV (AVK) Keystone Oventrop Tomoe Victaulic

Belimo (Enye) Gala Honeywell Kennedy Maple OKI Tozen (Japan)

N/A

15181 Pressure Gauges Thermometers, Test Kits

Honeywell Weksler, Wika Winters, Trerice

Maple

N/A

15181 Flexible Pipe Connectors, Expansion Joints/Guides

Mason Metraflex VCS Victaulic VMCI

Gala Honeywell Maple

Belman E-Flex Senior Flexonics



Spec. Reference

Section




Name

15181 Air Separator, Expansion Tank

Amtrol Bell & Gossett Oventrop TACO

Jaco (Korea)

N/A

15181 PVC Pipes and Fittings

Atlanta Emerald Neltex

Moldex N/A

15181 B. I. Flanges and Screwed Fittings

Mayer Pacific Pipes RNW Pacific Supreme Superior Southern Pipes

N/A

15181 Groove Fittings Victaulic Firn Lock Green-lock Grinell LEDE MGCH

N/A

15181 B. I. Welded Pipes and Spiral

Supreme (Raw material from Japan & Korea)

Mayer Superior (Raw material

from Taiwan & Thailand)

Mayer RNW Pacific (Raw material from China)

15181 B. I. Seamless Pipes

Sumitomo

15181/ 15183

Copper Tubes/ Refrigerant Piping

Bookwang Daejin

Smartco Guangdong Huahong

Totaline

15181 Combination Isolating, Balancing and Measuring Valve

Frese (Enye) Hattersley ICV (AVK) Oventrop TA

B & G Belimo (Enye) Gala Honeywell

N/A

15181 Suction Diffuser, Triple Duty Valves

Bell & Gossett Gala Victaulic

N/A

15181 HDPE Pipes Geberit George Fisher Hydrauvar REHAU

N/A

15181 Air Purger, Air Vents

Honeywell Oventrop

N/A

15185 Hydronic Pumps

Armstrong Aurora Bell & Gossett PACO Peerless

Ajax Ingersoll-Rand

(Flowserve) Worthington

(Flowserve)

Industrial Pumps: KSB

15189 Chemical Water Treatment Specialist

Advance Newtech Industrial Corp. Balticare Bauer Bestchem Chemperts Eco-System Tech. Firstchem Tech., Inc. Wise and Comp. World Chem.

N/A



Spec. Reference

Section




Name

15191 Fuel Oil Pumps Roper, Tuthill, Viking N/A N/A

15191 Main Fuel Storage Tank (Fiberglass)

Balmoral Fiberglass Tank & Pipe STP Xerxes Corporation ZCL Composites Inc.

N/A

N/A

15191 Main Fuel Storage Tank (Steel)

Follosco Local fabricator with accreditation from major oil companies.

N/A

15191 Fuel Oil System Controls

Scully Seismic Tracetek

N/A

N/A

15625 Centrifugal Chillers

Carrier Trane York

Climaveneta Dunham-Bush Ebara McQuay

N/A

15625 Screw Chillers Carrier Dunham-Bush Trane York

Climaveneta Leading Kuenling Midea Super-Aire

N/A

15630 Magnetic Bearing Oil-free Centrifugal Chiller

Arctic Cool Multistack Smardt

Climaveneta Daikin Dunham-Bush Nouvac York

N/A

15635 Absorption Chillers

Broad Climaveneta Ebara LG Sanyo

N/A

15641 Induced-Draft Cooling Tower

(CTI, FM) BAC Evapco Marley

(CTI, Non-FM) BAC Evapco Jinling King-Sun (selected models only) Liang-chi Marley Nihon Spindle

(KG Series) Truwater

(Non-CTI, Non-FM) BAC Grad-DB Evapco King-Sun Marley Nihon Spindle (JS

Series) Ocean

15650 Helical Rotary Liquid Chillers

Trane Model RTUB / RTCA

N/A N/A

15725 Air Handling Units

Carrier Dunham – Bush Mc-Quay Multistack Saiver (Italy) Sinko (Japan or Taiwan) Trane York

Aeris Frimec Saiver (Malaysia)

Leading Kuenling Midea Super-Aire



Spec. Reference

Section




Name

15725 Primary AHUs Carrier Dunham – Bush Mc-Quay Multistack Saiver (Italy) Sinko (Japan or

Taiwan) Trane York

Aeris Frimec Saiver (Malaysia)

N/A

15725 Primary AHU’s with Heat Recovery Wheel

Carrier Flex-Air (Bry-Air) Trane York

N/A

N/A

15730 Window Type AC

Carrier Hitachi National Panasonic Samsung

Condura Gree Kolin Koppel Midea

Everest LG

15734 Computer Room Air Conditioning Units (CRAC)

Airedale Citec Hiross Liebert Schneider Stulz

Climaveneta DB-Aire Frimec Montair

Airsys Remax

15736 DX Split Type Air Conditioners

Carrier Daikin Hitachi Mitsubishi (IEEI) Mitsubishi (MHI) National Panasonic Samsung Trane

Koppel LG Midea

N/A

15740 Hot Water Reheat Coil

Barcol-Air Indeeco

N/A

N/A

15784 Heat Pipes Bry-Air Heat Pipe Technology

Inviro Tech

N/A

N/A

15785 Heat Recovery Wheel

Flakt-Woods Flex-Air (Bry-Air)

N/A

N/A

15786 Heat Pumps AO Smith Quantum Carrier

N/A

N/A

15800 Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) System

Daikin Mitsubishi (IEEI) Mitsubishi (MHI) Samsung Toshiba

DB-Aire Hitachi Koppel Midea

Everest LG

15815 Galvanized Iron Sheets

Apo “Galfan” Sonic “Ultrabond” Union

N/A



Spec. Reference

Section




Name

15815 Sound Attenuating Units

Aldes ASLI (Malaysia) IAC Mecomb Metalaire (USA) NAP Phoenix Ruskin (Australia) Trox

N/A

N/A

15815 Volume Dampers

Aerotech ASLI (Malaysia) Metalaire (USA) Prudentaire Ruskin (Australia) Trox

N/A

N/A

15815 Grilles and Diffusers

Aerotech ASLI (Malaysia) LGA Metalaire (USA) Prudentaire Smart Air / Price Titus Trox Tuttle and Bailey

Ruskin (Australia) Sam-Kwang Tech-Aire

N/A

15815 Duct Sealant, Aluminum Duct Tape, Flexible Duct Connector, Duct Pins

Aluflex Duro-Dyne Foster Ideal Idenden MEI

N/A

N/A

15815 Fire/Smoke Dampers

Anemostat ASLI Greenheck Metalaire (USA) Prefco Ruskin (USA) Titus Trox

Prudentaire Ruskin (Malaysia)

N/A

15815 Flexible Air Ducts

Aeroduct Aluflex Bradlex Flexiduct Piflex

N/A

N/A

15825 Textile Air Dispersion System

Ductsox (Trox) Prihoda

N/A

N/A

15836 Centrifugal Roof, Wall Fan, SISW/ DIDW Fans

Chicago Greenheck Krueger National Niagara Nicotra NYB

Jin Dun (DB Int’l) ACRE Fil-Chin (Systemair)



Spec. Reference

Section




Name

15836 Vaneaxial Fans with Integral Sound Trap

Greenheck Krueger Niagara Nicotra


15836 Propeller Broan Greenheck Indola KDK Kruger National Niagara Nicotra NYB


15836 Centrifugal Ceiling and In-Line Fans (Domestic)

Aldes Broan Greenheck Indola KDK National Nicotra 3D

ACRE Fil-Chin (Systemair)

N/A

15836 Jet Fans / Induction Fans

Barcol-Air Flakt-Woods Hamma Turbovent Krueger Sewon Eng. Co. Ltd. Vantech Ventopia

N/A

N/A

15836 Shaft Fans Ventopia Krueger Niagara

N/A

15836 Airflow Limiter Aldes Trox

N/A

N/A

15836 Air Curtains KDK Mars National

Fil-Chin (Systemair) N/A

15840 VAV Terminal Units

Anemostat ASLI (Malaysia) Barcol-Air Carnes Connols Air Potorff Trox Tuttle and Bailey

N/A

N/A

15840 Fan Coil Units Carrier Climaveneta Dunham-Bush Frimec Multistack Saiver (Italy) Sinko (Japan or Taiwan) Trane York

Saiver (Malaysia) Sinko (Malaysia)

N/A



Spec. Reference

Section




Name

15861 Air Filters AAF Camfil Purafil Volkes

N/A

N/A

15862 Ultra Violet Germicidal Irradiation (UVGI) Light

Aspiro Fresh Aire UV Sterile Aire Fabri-Technic

N/A

N/A

15865 Oxygen/Ion Cluster

Generator

Bio-Climatic Bio-Oxygen

Ionair H-lon Cluster

15900 Controls and Instrumentation Components

ACI (Enye) Alerton Automated Logic Belimo (Enye) Dwyer (Enye) Dynasonics Honeywell Innotech (Enye) Johnsons Micronet Siemens TAC Vector (Enye)

N/A

N/A

15900 Pressure – Independent Dynamic Control Valve

Dynasonics Flowcon SM Frese Hattersley

Enye-Sontex

N/A

15900 BTU Meters (Ultrasonic) Dynasonics Honeywell Qalcosonic

(Turbine) Enye-Sontex Flowline Oventrop Sontex

N/A

15950 Air Flow Balancing Instruments

Alnor Shortridge

N/A

N/A

15985 Carbon Monoxide Detection & Control

Enmet Garage Guard MSA

N/A

N/A

07841 Firestopping Materials

Metacaulk Rectorseal Specseal Tremco 3M

Hilti

N/A

07842 Fire Cladding (Ductwork)

Promat Winduct

N/A

N/A

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Mechanical General Provisions SECTION 15010

MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC. S:\admin\mpi\MP1716_Baguio General Hospital and Medical Trauma Center\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2018-04-06_100% DD\01-MECHANICAL\15010-

Mechanical General Provisions.doc

PART 1 – GENERAL .......................................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 WORK INCLUDED .............................................................................................................................. 1 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE ....................................................................................................................... 2 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS ................................................................................................... 3 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS ................................................................................................................. 4 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................................... 4 1.6 COORDINATION ................................................................................................................................. 4 1.7 CHANGES TO CONTRACT WORK ...................................................................................................... 4 1.8 PRE-PURCHASED EQUIPMENT .......................................................................................................... 5 1.9 DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD ............................................................................................................. 5 1.10 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS.............................................................................................................. 5 1.11 SEPARATE PRICES ............................................................................................................................ 6 1.12 ALTERNATIVE MANUFACTURER AND SUPPLIERS ............................................................................. 6 1.13 SAMPLES ........................................................................................................................................... 6 1.14 EQUIPMENT SELECTION .................................................................................................................... 7 1.15 PACKING, STORAGE AND PROTECTION ............................................................................................ 8 1.16 DRAWINGS AND APPROVAL .............................................................................................................. 9 1.17 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS .................................................................................... 15 1.19 PROPOSED SEPARATION OF WORK BETWEEN THE TRADES ........................................................ 16

PART 2 - PRODUCTS ...................................................................................................................................... 23

2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS .......................................................................................................... 23

PART 3 – EXECUTION..................................................................................................................................... 24

3.1 PROGRAMME ................................................................................................................................... 24 3.2 PROGRESS REPORT ....................................................................................................................... 24 3.3 INSPECTION, TESTING AND CERTIFICATES .................................................................................... 25 3.4 RESULTS OF TESTS ........................................................................................................................ 28 3.5 TEMPORARY SERVICES .................................................................................................................. 28 3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING ................................................................................................................ 28 3.7 PROTECTION ................................................................................................................................... 28 3.8 PAINTING, LABELLING AND FINISHING ............................................................................................ 29 3.9 TEMPORARY AND TRIAL USE .......................................................................................................... 32 3.10 COMPLETION ................................................................................................................................... 32 3.11 INSTRUCTIONS TO EMPLOYER ........................................................................................................ 33 3.12 PROTECTION OF EMPLOYER’S PREMISES ...................................................................................... 33




SECTION 15010

MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. These Specifications are an integral part of the Contract Documents. Tendering, Contract Requirements and General Requirements apply to all Division 15 Specification Sections.

B. Work in the Specifications is divided into descriptive Sections which are not intended

to delegate functions or work to any specific SubMain Contractor or identify absolute contractual limits between SubMain Contractor, nor between the Main Contractor and his SubMain Contractor. The requirements of any one Section apply to all other Sections, for example: the motor service factor requirement. Refer to other Divisions and Sections to ensure a completed operational product and fully coordinated standard of work.

C. The direction to 'provide' equipment, materials, products, Labor and services shall be

interpreted to 'supply, install and test' the Division 15 work indicated on the Drawings and specified in the Specifications.

D. Provide and include in the Contract Price Division 15 work including mechanical

components and normal system accessories not shown on the Drawings or stipulated in the Specifications, and required to ensure completed operational systems and a fully coordinated standard of Work acceptable to the MEEPF Consultant and all authorities having jurisdiction.

E. The work essentially shall include, but shall not be limited to the following items:

1. Submission of technical specifications and samples of all supply items for

approval by the MEEPF Consultant.

2. Submission of shop drawings of all items for fabrication for approval by the MEEPF Consultant prior to fabrication.

3. Application and securing of required permits and licenses including facilitating

inspection by governing agencies and payment of all fees levied therewith.

4. Provide labor and materials required to install, test and place into operation the MEEPF systems as called for in the Contract Documents, and in accordance with applicable codes and regulations.

5. Provide labor, materials, and accessories required to provide complete,

operating MEEPF systems, including dismantling and/or relocation of existing utilities when required. Labor, materials or accessories not specifically called for in the Contract Documents, but required to provide complete, operating MEEPF systems shall be provided without additional cost to the Employer.

6. Termination of motors/equipment including provision of necessary connectors

and insulators. 7. Roughing-ins and wiring from Motor Control Center to motor controllers. 8. Provision for interfacing with others. 9. Fire stopping of all vertical and/or horizontal pipe penetration to fire rated

areas.




10. Miscellaneous Works:-

a. Hacking of non-structural wall and partitions to provide opening for pipes and sealing of opening around sleeves and pipes including provision of escutcheon plates.

b. Grouting of opening in walls after such pipes are in place and sealing

of all such openings if not used.

c. Flushing of newly installed plumbing system.

d. Restoration/repair of existing structures damaged during installation.

e. Miscellaneous items and other provisions required to maintain cleanliness level of adjacent areas during the entire duration of construction.

f. Full instruction after completing the job to the Maintenance Personnel

regarding operation and maintenance operation of the entire installation. Provide complete printed/type instruction booklets (hardbound) covering maintenance operation and adjustment of each piece of equipment and list of each spare parts.

11. Testing and commissioning. 12. Submission of five (05) sets of operations and maintenance manuals and as-

built plans. 13. Training of Employer’s plant operators on the system’s maintenance and

operation. 14. Coordination with other trades for special requirements for this package. (i.e.

concrete pads, block-outs, relays, etc.) 15. Provision of guarantee as specified in the Specifications.


A. Comply with the current applicable codes, ordinances, and regulations of the authority or authorities having jurisdiction, the rules, regulations and requirements of the utility companies serving the project and the Employer’s insurance underwriter.

B. Drawings, specifications, codes and standards are minimum requirements. Where requirements differ, the more stringent apply.

C. Should any change in drawings or specifications be required to comply with the

governing regulations, notify the Employer’s Representative prior to submitting bid.

D. All equipment and installations shall meet or exceed minimum requirements of the Standards and Codes listed under item 1.3.

E. Execute work in strict accordance with the best practices of the trades in a thorough,

substantial, workmanlike manner by competent workmen. Provide a competent, experienced, full-time MEEPF Project Manager who is authorized to make decisions on behalf of the Main Contractor.




1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS

A. Abbreviations:

1. PS Philippines Standard 2. PEC Philippine Electrical Code (Part 1:1992, Part 2:1988) 3. ANSI American National Standards Institute 4. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 5. ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories 6. IEC International Electro-technical Committee 7. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers 8. IES Illuminating Engineering Society 9. NEC National Electrical Code 10. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association 11. NFPA National Fire Protection Association 12. UL Underwriters Laboratory

13. AMCA Air Moving & Conditioning Association 14. ADC Air Diffusion Council 15. ARI Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute

16. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers 17. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 18. AWWA American Water Works Association 19. PSME Philippine Society of Mechanical Engineering Code 20. NPCP National Plumbing Code of the Philippines 21. NBCP National Building Code of the Philippines 22. FCP Fire Code of the Philippines 23. IPC International Plumbing Code 24. IMC International Mechanical Code 25. FM Factory Mutual 26. NBS National Bureau of Standards 27. ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers (Handbook) 28. ANSI American National Standard Institute 29. ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials 30. AWWA American Water Works Association

B. Definitions

1. Where it is stated in these specifications to submit to Engineer for review,

refer to Architectural General and Special Conditions for proper procedures.

2. FURNISH means to supply all materials, labor, equipment, testing apparatus, controls, tests, accessories, and all other items customarily required for the proper and complete application.

3. INSTALL means to join, fasten, link, attach, set up or otherwise connect

together before testing and turning over to Employer, complete and ready for regular operation.

4. PROVIDE means to FURNISH, INSTALL and TEST.

5. AS DIRECTED means as directed by the Employer’s Representative, or his

representative.

6. CONCEALED means embedded in masonry or other construction, installed behind wall furring or within drywall partitions, furniture wiring management or installed within hung ceilings.

7. SUBMIT means submit to Employer’s Representative for review.




8. “Architect”, “Employer’s Representative”, “MEEPF Consultant”, “Structural Consultant”, “Commissioning Authority”, the Party or Parties responsible for interpreting, accepting and otherwise ruling on the performance under “this Contract”.

9. “General Contractor”, the party responsible of the installation.

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Provide new materials and equipment of proven design and quality. Provide current

models of equipment with published ratings certified by recognized local and international testing and standards agencies.

B. Workmanship and installation methods shall conform to the best modern practice.

Employ skilled tradesmen to perform work under the direct supervision of fully qualified personnel.

C. Install equipment in strict accordance with manufacturers written recommendations. D. Meet ASTM, ANSI, AWWA and other industry standards in the selection and provision

of equipment, materials, pipe and system components.

E. Meet ASTM, ANSI, AWWA Standards for the supply and installation of all equipment.

F. Meet the additional selection, sizing and performance criteria specified in this Specification.

1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Meet the requirements and recommendations of local Municipal Ordinances.

1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate and schedule Division 15 work with all other work in the same area or with

work which is dependent upon Division 15 work so as to facilitate mutual progress.

B. Identify and resolve interference problems prior to prefabrication and installation of equipment. Submit interference drawings for review upon MEEPF Consultant Request.

C. Examine the site and all Contract Documents prior to bid submission. No allowance

will be made for any difficulties encountered due to any features of the building, methods of construction, site or surrounding public and private property which existed up to the bid close.

1.7 CHANGES TO CONTRACT WORK A. Do not proceed with any changes to the Work without written authority from the

Employer.

B. Follow procedures outlined in Tendering and Contract Requirements for administration and execution of Contract revisions.

C. Quotations for changes to Division 15 work shall be based on:

1. Methods either approved or directed by the MEEPF Consultant.




1.8 PRE-PURCHASED EQUIPMENT A. Where equipment has been pre-purchased by the Employer for installation by Division

15, assume complete responsibility for acceptance, delivery schedule, off loading, storage, rigging, installation, protection, start-up and warranty of this equipment, all as if the equipment were provided by Division 15.

B. The responsibilities of the equipment supplier are delineated in the pre-purchase

documents which are available for Main Contractor review during the bid period.

C. The following equipment has been pre-tendered in order to ensure equipment delivery in time to meet the building construction schedule.

D. Include in Contract Price, the cost of the following pre-purchased equipment. E. The Employer’s Representative shall bear the equipment and FOB job site shipping

costs directly.

F. Request from the Employer’s Representative, full details of the equipment and the manufacturer's Shop Drawings. Include related information in the Operating and Maintenance Manual.

G. Assume extensions of warranties to meet specified times.

1.9 DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD A. The Defects Liability Period for the purposes of this General Contract shall be a period

of twelve months from the ‘Date of Practical Completion’, providing that during such period the General Contractor shall have remedied and made good all faults or defects as described below, to the Employer’s Representative satisfaction.

B. During the Defects Liability Period, the General Contract shall at his own cost remedy

and make good with all possible speed any faults or defects in the Plant or Works due, in the opinion of the Employer’s Representative, to faulty materials, workmanship or design and, shall indemnify the Employer and/or the Main Building Contractor against any damage or injury to the Building contents and/or occupants arising as a result of such faults or defects.

C. If the General Contract fails to remedy such faults or defects within a reasonable time

the Employer may proceed to do so at the risk and expense of the General Contract and without prejudice to such other rights as the Employer may have under the General- Contract.

D. Other requirements shall be as described in the relevant section of the Specification.

1.10 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS A. Submit Supplementary Mechanical Bid Form. Failure to comply with the stated

requirements of the Bid Form may nullify the bid.

B. The Bidder is invited to submit additional alternative prices not specifically requested with the Bid.

C. Alternative prices may be used to establish the lowest Contract Price. D. The lowest or any Bid will not necessarily be accepted.




1.11 SEPARATE PRICES A. Submit separate prices on the Bid Form and express as a credit or an extra to the

Stipulated Bid Sum.

B. Calculation of the Contract Price will include separate prices consistent with their acceptance or rejection by the Employer.

1.12 ALTERNATIVE MANUFACTURER AND SUPPLIERS

A. Equipment and materials are specifically described for the purpose of indicating standards of quality and workmanship. Base Bid on the items specified and shown on Drawings.

B. In general, only the specified brands under base bid will be accepted. If only allowed

(during pre-bid or thru RFIs), alternatives for equipment or materials considered equal in quality and performance may be submitted with the Bid Form. Supply with each alternative, following bid submission, upon request by MEPF Consultant, the following information:

1. Details of manufacture/Country of Origin

2. Dimensions including required clearance

3. Performance data

4. The cost saving for piping and electrical changes imposed by the alternative

5. The effect upon and cost to other trades

C. Where alternatives are accepted, there will be no further cost allowances for

subsequent changes in Division 15 work or other Contracts to make the alternative complete and equal to the specified equipment and materials.

D. If alternative equipment, differing from that which is shown on Drawings is accepted,

prepare when requested, equipment layouts at no extra cost. Show clearly in plan, elevations and sections, all equipment details including dimensional changes. Show location changes to pipes and wiring and the effect of these changes on the building. Drawings shall be 1:50 scale.

E. The right is reserved to accept or reject any alternative.

F. After Contract is awarded, alternative equipment and materials will only be allowed on

a limited scale and upon submission of justification letter explaining the benefits to the Client of such equipment or substitution.

1.13 SAMPLES

A. Within one month following the award of the Contract, the General Contractor shall submit for review one set of labeled samples (where applicable) as follows:

1. PVC pipes and fittings 2. Valves, strainers vents and drains 3. Pipes supports 4. Galvanized steel pipes and fittings 5. Black steel pipes and fittings 6. Volume/fine/smoke dampers 7. Grilles, diffusers, registers, plenum box 8. Pressure gages thermometers and other instrumentations




9. Cables and wiring 10. Cable supports 11. Thermal and acoustic insulation materials 12. Vibration isolators 13. Seismic hangers both for horizontal and risers 14. For other samples required, refer to specific Sections and as requested by the

Owner and/or Consultant.

B. The Employers Representative reserves the right to require samples which show the fabrication techniques and workmanship of component parts, and the design of accessories and other auxiliary items, before any installation work process.

C. The General Contractor shall submit to the Employer’s Representative for

endorsement, manufacturer’s specification and installation instructions for trade products.

1.14 EQUIPMENT SELECTION

A. All equipment supplied shall be in accordance with this Specification and the relevant

drawings and to the approval of the Employer’s Representative. B. The capacities of all plant and equipment described in the General- Contract are

minimum capacities and the General Contractor shall check them with the Employers Representative, taking into account any variations which may be made to the systems during the progress of the General- Contract Works.

C. The General Contractor shall be required to demonstrate at site that the duties

required of the equipment are obtainable. D. Physical sizes of all plant and equipment are to be suitable for the space allocated for

the accommodation of such plant and equipment, taking into account the requirement of access for maintenance purposes.

E. In selecting makes and types of equipment, the General Contractor shall ascertain

that facilities for proper maintenance, repair and replacement are provided. F. Where the General Contractor proposes to use an item of equipment other than that

specified or detailed in the drawing, which requires any redesign of the system, drawings showing the layout of the equipment and such redesign as required therefore shall be prepared by the General Contractor at his own expenses. Where such approved deviation necessitates a different quantity and arrangement of materials and equipment’s from that originally specified or indicated in the drawings, the General Contractor shall furnish and install any such additional materials and equipment’s required by the system at no additional cost.

G. Equipment catalogue and manufacturer's specifications must be submitted for

examination and details shall be submitted for the approval of the Employer’s Representative before any equipment is to be ordered.

This shall include all information necessary for the Employer’s Representative to

ascertain the equipment comply with this Specification and drawings. Data and sales catalogue of a general nature will not be accepted.

H. Before ordering equipment, the General Contractor shall provide the Employers

Representative with full details of the weights and characteristics of the equipment for purposes of determining floor loading, power consumption etc.




1.15 PACKING, STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. All materials, equipment, components and accessories shall be delivered to the Site in

a new condition, properly packed and protected against damage or contamination or distortion, breakage or structural weakening due to handling, adverse weather or other circumstances and, as far as practicable, they shall be kept in the packing cases or under approved protective coverings until required for use.

B. Any items suffering from damage during manufacture, or in transit, or on site whilst in

storage or during erection shall be rejected and replaced without extra cost to either the Employer or the General Contractor unless either of them, or their respective representatives, cause such damages.

C. In the case of such materials, equipment, components and accessories which

originate overseas: 1. The said items shall be adequately and securely packed for safe

transportation with due regard to the climatic conditions encountered in transit and on arrival.

2. British Standard 1133 and supplements, or other comparable and acceptable

code, shall be used as a guide for the standard of packing and package required. All bright polished or plated parts shall be treated with suitable corrosion preventative.

3. At the time of shipping, each consignment shall be documented with packing

lists and bills of lading which shall contain full statements of the packages consigned with particulars of the dimensions, weights, contents, shipping marks and approximate value of each package shall be provided in duplicate to the General Contractor.

D. Where it is stipulated in the Specification or elsewhere in the General Contract that

packages, pallets, casks or other packaging or handling materials are returnable, then the General Contractor shall forthwith upon receiving written notice to that effect from the Contractor, remove the same from the site as any other place where the materials, equipment, components and accessories have been unpacked.

E. Neither the Employer’s Representative nor the General Contractor shall be liable for

loss or damage to or return of any packages, pallets, casks or other packaging or handling materials where the General Contractor fails to collect as notified by the General Contractor.

F. After delivery to site and prior to installation the General Contractor shall ensure that

all materials and equipment are properly stored on site to avoid mechanical damage and the adverse affects of heat, humidity etc. The General Contractor shall provide proper shelving and racking to support and protect the equipment and materials. All electrical equipment shall be stored covered in its original packaging or by plastic sheeting.

G. The General Contractor shall apply an approved protective crating or fix some other

protective material to the materials, equipment, components and accessories so as to protect them after installation. In the event that the General Contractor fails to do, the General Contractor shall repair to the satisfaction of the Employers Representative or supply free of all charge any replacement required to substitute for any part of the materials, equipment, components and accessories which may have been damaged in whole or in part as a result of such failure as directed by the Employers Representative and shall without prejudice to such other liabilities under this General- Contract, pay for all expenses and outgoing of the Employer or the Contractor




incurred in respect of the removal and disposal of the damaged parts and the installation of the substitute parts.

H. The General Contractor shall be responsible for the off loading and handling of cables

on site and shall ensure that cables are new and delivered to site on new drums and properly protected against mechanical damage and loss with manufacturer's seals still intact. Partly used drums of cables which have already been used elsewhere shall not be acceptable unless special approval is given by the Employers Representative in writing.

I. Waterproof protection shall be applied to all electrical busbar and switchgears,

thermal insulation, and other materials susceptible to moisture damage during and after installation until handover to the Employer.

J. The General Contractor shall be responsible for unpacking and removal from site all

temporary protective covers prior to the handover of the Installation to the Employer. K. The General Contractor shall accept at job site the sanitary fittings from the Sanitary

Fitting Supplier and store on Site. The sanitary fittings shall be well protected by the Sanitary General Contractor from damage of any kind. After installation, each fixture shall be well protected from damage and spoilage by effects of weather and subsequent construction and the finishing activities of other trades.

L. All fixtures or fittings damaged due to improper installation, storage or handling will be

rejected by the Employers Representative and shall be replaced with new, undamaged items as specified. Any costs shall be borne by the General Contractor.

1.16 DRAWINGS AND APPROVAL

A. Interpretation of Drawings

1. The Specification and any drawings or other documents attached thereto and

issued by the Employers Representative shall be deemed to include, whether or not specifically mentioned or shown, any materials, accessories or work as may be necessary for the satisfactory completion of the Works. The General Contractor shall make due allowance in his Tender for such materials or work.

2. Where a discrepancy exists between the drawings and Specification, or

where the interpretation of either is in doubt, the General Contractor shall obtain written clarification on such matters before submitting his Tender. Any such clarification from the Employer’s Representative to the General Contractor or vice versa dated prior to the submission of the Tender, shall form part of the General-Contract Documents. If no clarification is requested and obtained by the General Contractor the Employer’s Representative reserves the right to select either option irrespective of the allowances the General Contractor has made in his tender.

B. Tender Drawings

1. Tender Drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicative of work to be

installed. Run and arrangement of piping and the positioning of apparatus shall be approximately as indicated.

2. The Tender Drawings are primarily intended to enable the Tender to prepare

his estimate and submit Tender. Where runs of piping, cables, conduits, etc. are shown to small scale these do not necessarily indicate exact positions, and all offsets fittings and accessories that may be required are not necessarily shown. The Tender Drawings are based on agreement with the




Employer taking into account co-ordination with other services and no alteration in principle will be allowed without approval.

3. If directed by the Employer’s Representative, the General Contractor shall,

without extra charge, make reasonable modifications in the layout as needed to execute properly the work and prevent conflicts with the works of other trades.

4. After the award of the General-Contract, the Employer’s Representative will,

without charge, furnish two copies of the drawings and Specifications and will within a reasonable time also furnish such further drawings as are reasonably necessary to enable all the Employers Representative's Instructions to be carried out. The Employer’s Representative will also provide all details which in the opinion of the Employer’s Representative are necessary for the execution of any part of the work.

5. Additional copies of the drawings and the Specification can be provided to the

General Contractor upon written request to the Employer’s Representative, but the Employer’s Representative will charge for such additional copies at current commercial rates.

C. General Contractors Drawings

1. The General Contractor shall prepare, or be responsible for obtaining, the

following drawings: a. Installation Drawings. b. Manufacturer's Shop Drawings. c. Builders Work Drawings. d. Progress Drawings e. Record Drawings and Charts.

2. The symbol notation on all drawings shall be the same as the Tender Drawings. New symbols, not previously used on the Tender Drawings shall be agreed with the Employer’s Representative. All drawings shall have a stenciled title block and stenciled notes.

3. The General Contractor shall be responsible for verifying the accuracy of all

dimensions abstracted from Tender Drawings and used in the preparation of his drawings.

D. Installation Drawings

1. The General Contractor shall, before the relevant work proceeds, prepare and

submit for approval by the Employer’s Representative, all Installation Drawings showing details of his proposals for the execution of the General- Contract Works. The Installation Drawings shall be based on the Tender and / or IFC Drawings, and shall take into account any modifications, either to the building or to the installation which may have taken place, and incorporate details of the actual items of plant and equipment to be installed.

2. They shall be in such detail and with all necessary dimensions as to enable

the General- Contract Works to be installed, and shall indicate all piping and fittings necessary for installation, and also particular installation methods to be applied in certain instances.




3. The General Contractor shall similarly prepare all necessary Schedules of equipment, and necessary schematic diagrams, including internal diagrams for items of electrical equipment and diagrams showing the inter-connections between different items.

4. The General Contractor’s Installation Drawings shall be prepared to a scale of

1:100 for all services in the building and 1:50 or 1:20 for all plant rooms and similar spaces, unless otherwise approved by the Employer’s Representative.

5. The General Contractor shall produce and submit for approval drawings

detailing and dimensioning the following: a. Site distribution, piping and ducting routes.

b. General layout drawings of all plant and equipment included in the Contract.

c. Schematic distribution for main and sub-main distribution.

6. The Consultant exercises best effort to ensure there are no conflicts or inconsistencies in their design. However in cases where such conflicts occur, these can be captured in Contractor’s shop or installation drawing to avoid costly abortive works. Hence, the preparation and submission of Contractor’s

shop drawings becomes the more important. Because of this, failure of the

Contractor to submit shop drawings will make him fully accountable to

any abortive works and all associated costs even if design – related or

not.

E. Manufacturer's Shop Drawings

1. The General Contractor shall submit for review shop drawings of any item of

plant or equipment produced by a manufacturer or equipment supplier indicating principle dimensions, fixings, connections and all other relevant details. These shall include drawings of all control, and instrumentation panels, pumps and other equipment as requested by the Employer’s Representative.

2. The General Contractor shall provide engineering drawings showing the

construction, external and internal layout of panels and wiring diagrams comprising internal wiring, schematics of interlocking and external wiring diagrams, for the complete system in the panels. The drawings shall also show all electrical, pipework and capillary connections from the panels to external equipment.

F. General Contractor’s Approval of Manufacturer's Shop Drawings

1. All drawings, schedules or other information provided by Manufacturers,

Nominated Suppliers, Nominated Sub- Main Contractors or Specialist Main Contractors shall be approved by the General Contractor and such approval shall ensure that all requirements of the General- Contract documentation have been incorporated.

2. When this procedure has been completed, the General Contractor shall

forward paper prints of the approved drawings, or copies of the approved schedules or their information to the Employer’s Representative in a similar manner to that described for the Installation drawings.




3. No order to a Manufacturer, Nominated Supplier, Nominated Main Contractor or Specialist Main Contractor, to commence manufacture/installation shall be given until written approval has been given by the Employer’s Representative.

4. Any costs arising from failure to meet the above conditions shall be borne by

the General Contractor at no cost to the General- Contract.

G. Builders Work Information & Drawings

1. The General Contractor shall provide fully detailed Builders Work drawings to

show requirements for architectural or structural provisions necessary to facilitate the execution of the General- Contract Works, and allow their integration into the project. These drawings shall show dead and live loads of all plant, and fully dimensioned details of all plant bases, wall chases, and penetrations.

2. This information shall be prepared in sufficient time for incorporation in the

Main Building Contractors programme.

3. In cases where preliminary builders' work and structural information has already been given by the Employer’s Representative, such information shall be confirmed by the General Contractor (including confirmation of weights of items of equipment, sizes of access ways, etc.) and incorporated on his drawings.

4. The General Contractor shall provide templates for, and supervise all builders'

work required, including drilling and plugging of walls, floors and ceilings for securing of brackets, and other builders work as is considered normal to the trade.

5. The details required by the Main Building Contractor are to be provided as

directed, which may require advance information to be provided by the General Contractor before the Works defined in this Specification are to commence. The General Contractor shall be responsible for checking any details that may have been given before commencement of the Works to ascertain that the said advance details are correct.

6. The General Contractor shall be liable for all costs associated with the late

submission or omission of builders work information.

H. Progress Drawings

1. The General Contractor shall arrange for a full set of white prints of

Installation Drawings to be kept on the Site showing the progress of all work in connection with the General- Contract. Such prints shall be kept up-to-date before each site progress meeting, and all conduit, cable, pipe and trunking runs, positions of equipment and apparatus shall be recorded on the drawings as they are installed.

2. The Progress Drawings shall be available for inspection at any time by the

Employer’s Representative and Main Building Main Contractor.

3. The General Contractor shall include for his representative to keep a diary recording the progress of the works and details of all instructions received. The diary shall be at the disposal of the Employer’s Representative as and when required.




I. Record Drawings and Charts

1. The General Contractor shall issue draft copies of Record Drawings, showing

the whole of the services as installed, to the Employers Representative one month prior to the start of commissioning.

2. Within one month of the Practical Completion of the installations, the General

Contractor shall provide to the satisfaction of the Employer’s Representative one durable plastic negative and one copy diskette (Autocad) and four complete final sets of white prints showing the whole of the services installed. Prior to this formal issue, the General Contractor shall submit two copies of his proposed finalized Record Drawings to the Employer’s Representative for approval.

3. Two sets of drawings for symbols shall be submitted, one of the same size as

the tender drawings, the other set shall be of A4 size suitable for eventual inclusion in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

4. The complete symbol notation used for all Record Drawings shall be

computer generated.

5. The preparation of the Record Drawings shall proceed during the installation of the Works as each section is completed. The Employer’s Representative shall be allowed to inspect the drawings on request during their preparation.

6. In addition to the foregoing Record Drawings, the following charts and

drawings shall be laminated in plastic and hung in the plant rooms and switchgear rooms:

a. Plant room key Drawings: showing all plant item numbers, locations

and duties. b. Control Schematics c. Electrical system schematic diagrams

J. Submission of Drawings and Equipment for Review

1. Information for review must be submitted in accordance with the agreed

programme of work and in packages relating to complete buildings or previously agreed parts of the building.

The packages must include: a. Installation drawings. b. Builders work drawings. c. Associated Manufacturer's shop drawings. d. Technical information of proposed equipment and materials.

e. Any other relevant information required by the Employer’s

Representative. Each submission must be accompanied by a letter which: a. Identifies the contents of the submission in detail.




b. Refer to previous submissions of the information and any relevant correspondence.

c. Refers to the purpose of the submission and any other requirements

of the General Contractor.

K. Employer’s Representative's Approval

1. The General Contractor shall obtain the Employer’s Representatives review of

his information before it is used for ordering, fabrication or installation. The form of review will be an examination of the drawings and/or samples by the Employer’s Representative to ensure that the design criteria and engineering principles described in the Tender documents have been correctly interpreted and applied by the General Contractor.

2. The review will not entail any checking of working dimensions on the

drawings.

3. The General Contractor must carry out his own checking procedure before submitting information for review, this checking must cover not only his own work, but that of Manufacturers and Specialists for whom he is responsible.

4. The review of information by the Employer’s Representative will in no way

relieve the General Contractor of his responsibility for error in his work or of his other contractual responsibilities and obligations.

5. The General Contractor shall allow a period of 2 weeks in his programme for

the Employers Representative to review and return the General Contractor submission with comment. The General Contractor shall also indicate in his programme time allowed for resubmission of drawings not allowed to be used for installation by the Employer’s Representative.

L. Review Procedure for General Contractor Submission

1. Five (5) copies of all information and drawings shall be submitted to the

Employer’s Representative. One copy will be retained by the Employer’s Representative and the other copy will be returned to the General Contractor.

The information will be returned and marked either:

Stamp Interpretation

Approved/Unaltered Fabrication, manufacture, or construction may proceed providing submittal complies with the Contract Documents.

Approved with corrections /comments as noted prior to general issue

Fabrication, manufacture, or construction may proceed providing submittal complies with the Contract Documents and the Engineer’s notation are complied with.

For Re-submission The submittal does not comply with the Contract Documents; do not proceed with fabrication, manufacture, or construction .The work and shop drawings are not permitted at the job site. Re-submit appropriate shop drawings.

2. Modifications and variations found to be necessary after the initial review has

been given must be re-submitted for further approval in the above manner.




3. Revision marks must be included on all revised drawings, and the revisions must be fully and clearly described.

4. Six copies of all reviewed drawings and noted as “Approved/Unaltered” shall

be submitted to the Employers Representative for general distribution to the Main Building Main Contractor and other interested parties.

M. Coordination

1. The Installation Drawings shall illustrate that the General Contractor design

has been coordinated and integrated with that of other General Contractors, the structure, and building elements, before work commences. In addition to the Works for which he is responsible, the drawings must show the structure, adjacent building elements and the zone required by other General Contractor to install, operate and maintain their equipment.

2. If the General Contractor deviates from the design intent of the Tender

drawings, he shall ensure that this deviation either does not involve a change in any of the other General Contractor installations or that any change necessary in the other General Contractor installations does not incur an additional cost to their General- Contract.

3. The General Contractor shall be fully liable for any cost incurred through his

lack of co-ordination.

1.17 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Before the handover of the installation, the General Contractor shall prepare complete

Operation and Maintenance Manuals which are to be printed in English for all the installations. When these manuals have been agreed in details, the General Contractor shall submit to the Employers Representative three copies thereof suitable bound. The Operating and Maintenance Manuals must be handed over before the Date of Completion.

B. Operating and Maintenance Manuals should comprise the following:

1. A hard cover giving:

the name of the development the title of the document the name and address of the installation Main Contractor

2. Inside page giving similar information to the cover but including contact

telephone numbers for normal and emergency use. 3. Contents page.

4. Description of the installation.

5. Scheduled details of all equipment and plant.

6. Operating instructions including details of any automatic control system.

7. Maintenance and fault finding instructions including composite schedule of

routine maintenance.

8. Test reports and commissioning records.

9. Recommended spare parts and lubricants.




10. List of equipment and plant with manufacturer’s name and address and local agent, if applicable.

11. Manufacturer’s literature suitably indexed to include shop drawings, wiring

diagrams, performance curves, etc.

12. List of as-installed drawings.

13. A complete valve schedule.

C. The manual should be produced on A4 size paper, all sections should be suitably separated and readily identifiable or pages should be numbered consecutively and page numbers included in the contents page.

D. The General Contractor shall provide a copy diskette of the complete text of the

operation and maintenance manuals.

1.19 PROPOSED SEPARATION OF WORK BETWEEN THE TRADES

A. The specifications describe in detail the proposed work included for each trade when the General Contractor divides the work among their Sub-Contractors. The following summary is an outline of the work to be “Provided”, “Furnished” or “Installed” by each of the trades included in the contract, i.e., Plumbing & Sprinkler, (Div. 15) ACMV (Div. 15), Electrical & Electronics (Div. 16) and other Divisions 1-14.

B. In the absence of more detailed information, consider the list as specific instructions

to include such work in the named contract.

C. Abbreviations are as follows:

1. “OD” - Other Division of the Contract (not Electrical or Mechanical)

2. “Plb” - Plumbing – Division 15 3. “Spr” - Sprinkler – Division 15 4. “Mech” - Mechanical – Division 15 5. “Elec” - Electrical – Division 16 6. “F” - Furnished 7. “I” - Installed 8. “P” - Provided (Furnished and Installed)




ITEM OD Plb. Spr. Mech. Elec. Remarks

Motors for Mechl., Plumbing, Fire Protection Equip’t

_

P

P

P

_

Feeder Cables from Electrical Panels to Motor Controls

_

_

_

_

P

Cables to be terminated in the Motor Controls by each trade.

Motors for Mechl., Plumbing, Fire Protection Equipment

_

P

P

P

_

Specification and drawings delineate detailed exceptions.

Wiring for Mechl., Plumbing, Fire Protection Equip’t Motors including the feeder cables from motor controller

_

P

P

P

_

Wiring for Mech’l Equipment Motor Controls and Alarms

_

P

P

P

_

Specifications and drawings delineate in detail the work to be performed by each trade.

Temporary Light and Power

_

_

_

_

_

As per Contract Documents.

Temporary Water _ _ _ _ _ As per Contract Documents.

Toilets _ _ _ _ _ As per Contract Documents.

Temporary Fire Protection

_

_

_

_

_

As per Contract Documents.

Hoisting P P P P P

Rigging P P P P P

Bracing of Building for Safe Rigging

P

_

_

_

_




ITEM OD Plb Spr. Mech. Elec. Remarks Cutting, Chasing & Patching

P

_

_

_

_

Cost where due to late installation or improper coordination of work is the responsibility of the delinquent trade.

Framed Slots and Openings in Walls, Decks and Slabs

P

_

_

_

_

Includes drilling of holes when required. Cost where due to late installation or improper coordination of work is the responsibility of the delinquent trade.

Sleeves P _ _ _ _ Waterproof Sealing of Sleeves through Waterproof

Slabs, Decks and Walls

_

P

P

P

P

Fireproof Sealing of Excess Openings in Slabs, Decks and Fire Rated Walls

_

P

P

P

P

Excavation and Backfill Inside Buildings

_

P

P

P

P

Excavation and Backfill Outside Buildings

P

_

_

_

_

Coordination with the trades. Cost where due to late installation or improper coordination of work is the responsibility of the delinquent trade.




ITEM OD Plb Spr. Mech. Elec. Remarks Keep Site and Excavation Free From Surface Water During Construction

P

_

_

_

_

Fastenings _ P P P P Supports P P P P P Concrete Encasement of Conduits

_

_

_

_

P

Below Grade Drainage Inside Building

_

P

_

_

_

Base Flashing of Electric Conduits Through Roof (Pitch Pockets)

P

_

_

_

_

Cap flashing by Trade.

Electrical Handholes, and Covers

_

_

_

_

P

Finish Painting (does not include I.D. marks or color coding specified and provided by each trade)

P

P P P P

Finished Walls and Ceiling Access Doors, Panels and Supporting Frames

P

_

_

_

_

Supplying list of location of all items requiring access doors included in the Division requiring same.




ITEM OD Plb Spr. Mech. Elec. Remarks Plaster Rings and Frames

I

_

_

_

F

Plaster rings and frame furnished in electric only for lighting fittings which are so equipped.

Rubbish Removal P P P P P Where one trade furnishes

and another installs, the installing trade removes the shipping and packing materials which accumulate.

Special Tools for Equipment Maintenance

F

F

F

F

F

Electric Power Consuming Items and Controls for Other than Mechanical Equipment, e.g. Motorized Doors

P

_

_

_

_

Concrete Foundations, Pads, Pits, Curbs, and Bases Inside Buildings

P

_

_

_

_

Furnishing exact dimensions of anchors, vibration mounts and templates included in each trade providing the associated equipment.

Concrete Foundations Pads and Bases Outside Buildings

P

_

_

_

_

Furnishing exact dimensions of anchors, vibration mounts and templates included in each trade providing the associated equipment.

Masonry Pits P _ _ _ _ Furnishings of covers and

associated frames included in each trade.




ITEMS OD Plb Spr Mech. Elec. Remarks Sump Pits P _ _ _ _ Furnishing of covers and

associated frames included in each trade.

Concrete Lined Trenches inside Building Foundations

P

_

_

_

_

Prime Coat Painting

_

P

P

P

P

Fiel Touch-up Painting of Damaged Shop Coats

_

P

P

P

P

Rustproofing Field Cut and Assembled Iron Supporting Frames and Racks

_

P

P

P

P

Grating and Exterior Wall Louvers

P

_

_

_

_

Duct Connections to Louvers

_

_

_

P

_

Equipment Delivered and Set in Place

P

_

_

_

_

Except Mechanical and Electrical Equipment by Divisions 15, & 16.

Vinyl Tape or Painted Color-

Coding, Banding Arrows and Similar Identification for Mechanical and Electrical Work

P

P

P

P

P

Underfloor and Header Duct

_

_

_

_

P

Responsibility for coordination is included in this Section.




ITEM OD Plb Spr. Mech. Elec. Remarks Lighting Fixtures _ _ _ _ P See Drawings. Elevators, Escalators and Dumbwaiters

P

_

_

_

_

Power connections to disconnect switch included in Electrical Section.

Catwalks and Ladders to Electrical Equipment

P

_

_

_

_

Food Service Equipment

P

_

_

_

_

Line connections included in each trade.

Services to Food Service Equipment

_

P

P

P

P

Laundry Line connections Equipment P _ _ _ _ Included in each trade. Services to Laundry Equipment

_

P

P

P

P

Roughing to Equipment Furnished by Others

_

P

P

P

P

D. Each Division is required to supply all necessary supervision and coordination

information to any other Division supplying work to accommodate that Division.

E. For items which are to be installed but not furnished as part of this Division, the electrical work includes:

1. Coordination of their delivery. 2. Unloading from delivery trucks driven into any point on the property line at grade

level.

3. Safe handling and field storage up to the time of permanent placement in the project.

4. Correction of any damage, defacement or corrosion to which they may have

been subjected.

5. Field make-up and internal wiring as indicated for their proper operation.

6. Mounting in place.

7. Connection to building wiring, including the purchase and installation of all termination junction boxes necessary to adapt and connect them to this wiring.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A. Provide products and materials that are new, clean, free of defects, and free of

damage and corrosion.

B. Products and materials shall not contain asbestos, PCB, CFCs, Halons, or any other material which is installed considered hazardous by the authority having jurisdiction.

C. Replace materials of less than specified quality and relocate work incorrectly installed

as directed by the Engineer or its authorized representative.

D. Provide name/data plates on major components of equipment with manufacturer's name. Model number, capacity data and electrical characteristics attached in a conspicuous place.

E. Install materials and equipment with qualified trade’s people.

F. Maintain uniformity of manufacturer for equipment used in similar application and

sizes.

G. Fully lubricate equipment where required.

H. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for installing, connecting, and adjusting equipment. Provide a copy of such instructions at the equipment during installation.

I. Where factory testing of equipment is required to ascertain performance, and

attendance by the Employer’s representative is required to witness such tests, associated travel costs and subsistence shall be paid for by the Main Contractor.

J. Equipment capacities, ratings, etc., are scheduled or specified for job site opening

conditions. Equipment sensitive to altitude shall be derated with the method of derating identified on the submittals.

K. Enclosures for electrical equipment installed in mechanical equipment rooms shall be

NEMA type 1 gasketed. Enclosures for electrical equipment installed outdoors shall be NEMA type 3R.

L. Energy consuming equipment shall meet local energy ordinances.

M. For equipment and material submittals, provide certificate of origin to be included in






3.1 PROGRAMME

A. Within 2 weeks of the letter of intent or award, the General Contractor shall submit a programme showing the details of delivery and required installation period for each system.

These details shall also be forwarded to the General Contractor, and the Sub Contractor shall work with the Main Contractor to produce an overall coordinated programme for the works.

B. The General Contractor shall make such labor available at all stages of the works to

permit the programme to be achieved and to carry out his work in accordance with the requirements of the Main Contractor and Main Construction programme.

C. The General Contractor shall include all key dates into his programmes including the

dates required of all Utility submissions and also the dates that permanent power, permanent water etc. will be made available for the project.

D. The General Contractor shall be responsible for informing the General Contractor of

his detailed requirements in respect of fuel, water, drainage and electrical supplies, for the testing and commissioning of the plant and equipment.

The General Contractor shall immediately inform the Employer’s Representative of any delays caused by labor shortages, later delivery of materials and equipment, or the failure to meet programme by any other Contractor on site, which may affect his own programme.

E. The programme shall be updated monthly.

3.2 PROGRESS REPORT

A. The General Contractor shall submit two copies of the monthly report to the Employer’s Representative containing:

1. Percentage of work completed including a BOQ comparison between and

actual and contracted work. 2. Description of executed work.

3. Problems or delay (if any) and how to solve these.

4. Special occurrences, accidents, etc.

5. List of drawings, also indicating revisions.

6. List of memos and instructions ordered by the MEEPF Consultant.

7. List of equipment and workers at the site.

8. Color photographs of the site showing necessary views of the work at not less

than 10 locations.




3.3 INSPECTION, TESTING AND CERTIFICATES

A. Periodic inspections of the work in progress will be made to check general conformity of the work to the Contract Documents. Observed deficiencies will be reported. Correct deficiencies immediately.

B. Meet the requirements of all laws, bylaws, codes, regulations and authorities having

jurisdiction.

C. Where the Contract Documents, instructions or the governing authorities require Division 15 work to be tested, inspected or approved, give sufficient notice of its readiness for inspection and schedule the date and time for such inspection.

D. Uncover Division 15 work that is covered up without consent, upon MEEPF

Consultant request, for examination and restore at no extra cost to the Employer.

E. Furnish certificates and evidence that Division 15 work meets the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Correct deficiencies immediately upon notification.

G. Cleaning and Flushing

1. The General Contractor shall clean the entire installation including all sanitary fittings and pipework, etc. after installation and keep them in a new condition.

2. All pipes, etc. shall be flushed through with water, rodded when necessary to

ensure clearance of debris.

3. Cleaning and flushing shall be carried out in sections as the installation becomes completed.

H. Hydraulic Testing of Pipework

1. The General Contractor shall carry out hydraulic test on the complete plumbing systems and the drainage system to show that it is functioning satisfactorily within the requirements of this Specification and local regulations.

2. The General Contractor shall provide suitable test pumps and arrange for a

supply of water required in connection with testing of pipework. The test pump shall be fitted with pressure gauges which shall be of suitable range for the pressure being applied.

3. Hydraulic tests shall be carried out as the pipework is installed and shall be

completed before chases in walls and ducts are closed. Also test shall be carried out prior to false ceilings and other finishes are installed.

4. All cold water and fire fighting pipework shall be hydraulically tested for a

period of not less than 6 hours to a pressure of not less than one and half times the working pressure, but in any case the testing pressure shall not be less than 150 PSI for cold water and 250 PSI for fire fighting. The General Contractor must record all test figures together with schedules of pipe lengths and should note that testing shall be witnessed by the Employers Representative. No pressure drop shall be allowed during the tests.

5. Testing apparatus shall be provided by the General Contractor. Where any

section of pipework or equipment is unable to withstand the maximum pipework test pressure, it shall be isolated during the pipework test then that




section of pipework or equipment shall be re-tested at the appropriate test pressure.

6. The Sanitary General Contractor must carry out any additional tests required

by the local authorities.

7. Drainage pipe shall be test by filling the water higher than testing point 3 m. waiting 15 min, then checking leakage at every joints.

8. Testing of drainage systems shall be carried out in sections by dividing the

system horizontally. Each section shall comprise pipework and fitting for three floors/storeys required for testing.

9. Drainage pressure pipe shall be hydraulic test at minimum pressure 50 PSI.

10. On completion of the section of drainage pipework to be tested blank off all open ends of pipes and ensure that all access covers are securely tightened so that they are airtight.

a. At the base of each stack, a drain bag or drain plug is inserted and a

small quantity of water allowed to settle above it so as to form a seal that can easily be inspected if it leaks.

b. A drain plug should be inserted at the top of the stack and in the case

of rainwater pipes at every intermittent outlet with a small quantity of water above it.

c. Remove the blank cap from one of the drain plugs (at the top of the

stack if possible) and connect the tube from a manometer gauge to it or by passing the tube through one of the trap seals.

d. Blow air through the tube and reconnect at the manometer gauge to

obtain a reading of 38mm w.g. the level should remain for a period of not less than five minutes without falling and without further air being added.

I. Operation Tests

1. The General Contractor shall ensure to the approval of the Employers Representative that the installation or portion thereof has been set to work and complies with all requirements including the following: a. That the plant and apparatus is of robust construction and of capacity for

the duty specified.

b. That all valves, switches, controls, etc, are properly regulated and capable of proper operation and in the case of valves that are capable of tight shut-off.

c. That all apparatus is silent. d. That all instruments are correctly calibrated and read accurately.

e. That all services are tested in accordance with the details of the relevant clauses of this Specification.

f. That the alignments for all pumps are proper.




2. Should the results of these tests show that the pumps, etc. or any other items of equipment fail to perform to the efficiencies or other performance figures as given in this Specification, and as accepted in the General Contractor tender, then the General Contractor shall adjust, modify and if necessary replace the equipment without additional cost to the General- Contract in order that the required performance is obtained. Should it be necessary for the General Contractor to attend to items of plant as described he will be responsible for cost for any damage or deterioration to the building or any other services consequent on such attendance.

3. The General Contractor shall perform all tests and demonstrations as called

for by the local authorities.

4. Testing procedures shall be submitted two months after the approval of major equipment to the Employers Representative for approval.

J. Supply of Testing Equipment

1. The General Contractor shall provide all tools, pressure pumps, instruments and recorders required to carry out the tests given in this Section.

2. All water and electricity required for testing purposes will be supplied by the

General Contractor.

K. Pretreatment

1. Prior to start-up and after satisfactory hydraulic testing, all piping systems shall be flushed and drained at least once through to rid off contaminating materials.

2. All strainers shall be inspected and cleaned out or replaced. L. Disinfection

1. For Pipe Installation

a. The pipe system shall be flushed with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at the points of outlet.

b. The system or part thereof shall be filled with a water/chlorine solution

containing or least 50 parts per million (50 mg/L) of chlorine, and the system or part thereof shall be valved off and allowed to stand for 24 hours; or the system or part thereof shall be filled with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million (200 mg/L) of chlorine and allowed to stand for 3 hours.

c. Following the required standing time, the system shall be flushed with

clean potable water until the chlorine is purged from the system.

d. The procedure shall be repeated where shown by a bacteriological examination that contamination remains present in the system.

2. For Water Tank:

The entire interior of the tank shall be swabbed or sprayed with solution containing 200 ppm of available chlorine and the solution allowed to stand for 3 hours before flushing and returning to service.




3.4 RESULTS OF TESTS

A. If the test results show that the plant and equipment is not functioning in a satisfactory manner nor providing the requirements of this Specification, the Employer’s Representative shall decide whether this is due to incorrectness of faulty work by the General Contractor and if this be the case, the General Contractor shall, when called upon, carry out at his own expense such alterations, replacements and adjustments as may be required to the Employer’s Representative’s complete satisfaction. The Employer’s Representative decision as to what constitutes a satisfactory test shall be final.

3.5 TEMPORARY SERVICES A. Provide temporary mechanical services in accordance with the requirements of

Section 01500.

B. Make connections to temporary power source provided and provide extensions for use by Division 15.

C. Install and maintain temporary fire protection services as required by the authorities

having jurisdiction.

E. When the permanent water service is installed, it shall be used to supply water for the use of Other Main Contractors.

E. Perform operations necessary for checking, testing and balancing after written approval is given to start up systems. Ensure that care is taken to protect equipment from damage and to prevent distribution of dust through duct systems.

F. Do not use permanent plumbing, heating or air conditioning systems for temporary

services during construction, except with written permission from MEEPF Consultant.

3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Give notification in time to Other Main Contractors of openings required for Division 15

Work. Supply accurate details of location and size. When this requirement is not met, bear the cost of cutting and patching.

B. In existing work, cutting, patching and restoration of finished work to original condition

will be carried out by Other Main Contractors at the expense of Division 15.

C. Obtain written MEEPF Consultant approval before cutting openings through structure.

D. Where new work connects with existing and where existing work is altered, cut, patch and restore to match existing work.

3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect all Division 15 work from damage. Keep all equipment dry and clean at all

times.

B. Cover openings in equipment, pipes with caps or heavy gauge plastic sheeting until final connections are made.

C. Repair any damage caused by improper storage, handling or installation of equipment

and materials.

D. Protect equipment, pipes and temporary services installed by Division 15 from weather damage.




3.8 PAINTING, LABELLING AND FINISHING

A. Materials

1. All parts of the work installed under this Specification shall be painted with approved high quality enamel paints, except those items specified as being painted by others or otherwise exempted from painting in this section of the Specification.

2. Paint shall be selected to withstand the temperature on the surface which it is

applied, and shall be suitable in all respects for the environmental conditions in which it shall be located.

3. All paint used shall be of one approved manufacture, and finishes shall be full

gloss unless otherwise specified.

4. Before ordering any primer, undercoat and finishing paint, the General Contractor shall submit the color scheme to the Employers Representative for approval.

5. Before ordering any painting materials, the General Contractor shall submit

the type and manufacturer of all materials for approval.

6. The General Contractor shall select all finishing and painting materials from types suitable for the surfaces to which they are applied and for the environmental conditions in each area.

7. The fire services equipment shall be painted in red color with two coatings of

red lead primer.

B. Plant, Machinery & Equipment

1. All items of plant, machinery and equipment supplied painted ex-factory shall be given one finishing coat of full gloss enamel, except where the manufacturer's standard finish is approved.

C. Exposed Metalwork

1. All exposed metalwork shall be wire-brushed and cleaned from rust, scale, dirt and grease, and shall then be given one priming coat, one undercoat and one approved color finishing coat of full gloss enamel.

2. The priming coat for exposed galvanized iron shall be an approved galvanized

iron primer.

3. The priming coat for exposed non-ferrous metalwork shall be approved as suitable for the metal to which it will be applied.

D. Concealed Metalwork

1. All galvanized iron surface concealed in roof spaces, false ceilings, building

ducts etc. shall not be painted. All black iron and steel surfaces shall be wire bushed and given one coat of zinc chromate or red lead.

G. Pipework & Metal Sheathing

1. Pipework and metal sheathing shall be painted as for exposed or concealed metalwork as applicable.




2. Turned parts of valves, controls etc., shall be cleaned and polished to approval.

H. Pipework Identification

1. All pipes etc. shall be identified in accordance with British Standards 1710:1984 or other comparable and acceptable code.

2. Circumferential bands of standard colors shall be not less than 100mm wide

on pipes up to 50mm nominal diameter, and not less than 150mm wide on pipes greater than 50mm nominal diameter.

3. Supplementary colors shall be displayed as bands not less than 25mm wide

in the center of the ground color bands.

4. Where lettering is required it shall be painted in contrasting colors in accordance with the standard, in block letters not less than 15mm high for pipes up to 50mm nominal diameter, and in block letter not less than 40mm high for larger pipes.

5. Identification bands shall be located where they are clearly visible in each

room or compartment through which the pipe runs, and shall be placed at centers not exceeding 6m.

6. Direction of flow shall be indicated by an arrow painted on the pipe adjacent to

each color band. Arrows shall be 75mm long on pipes up to 50mm nominal diameter, and 150mm long on larger pipes.

I. Colour Schemes

1. The whole of the piping installation shall be painted in accordance with the existing piping colors schemes wherever applicable and color coded as follows:

Condensate water pipe - Orange Chilled water pipe - White Potable water pipe - Blue

Non-Potable water pipe - Green Waste pipe - Brown Soil pipe - Black Vent pipe - Gray Fire pipe - Red

Equipment shall be paint and color coded to BS 381C:1980 or the PSME Code as follows:

Equipment Color No.

Switchboard and Control Panel

Electric Orange-White Interior

Electric Motors

Primrose

310

Electric Conduits

Light Orange

557

Pumps and tanks

As for respective piping service

-

All other equipment

As directed

-




J. Labelling

1. All plant and equipment provided under this Specification is to be labeled in English as to duty or services, all such Labelling to correspond to schedules, diagrams, etc. to be provided as part of the Record Drawings. Labels are of white Traffolyte with black engraved lettering not less than 20mm high or as otherwise required and approved.

2. Manufacturers' name plate shall generally be provided for all plant and

equipment and shall show serial and model numbers and date of manufacture.

3. All valves, motor starters, fans, distribution boards, gauges, contactors, cable

terminals in switchboards, circuit breakers shall have labels.

4. Labels should be attached to valves (or pipe adjacent thereto) with a light gauge metal band or alternatively to be screwed to the insulated valve box where provided. These labels shall state the valve number.

5. Distribution boards, starters etc. shall be labeled to indicate the circuit

number, phase and item controlled.

6. Labels shall be screwed or riveted to sheet metal. Adhesive fixing is not acceptable.

7. Details of exact lettering shall be agreed with the Employers Representative

prior to manufacture.

8. A complete valve schedule shall be incorporated in the as-built drawings and this schedule shall clearly indicate the valve numbers, duty, function, size, flow rate and any other relevant information necessary to allow the Employer's plant operators to safely operate each valve and to subsequently maintain or replace the valve as required.

9. The valve schedule shall clearly relate to the various system schematics to

enable the entire operating sequence and circuitry to be followed.

K. Application of Painting

1. All paints shall be prepared and applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

2. All galvanized metal surfaces shall be properly etch-primed to ensure correct

adhesion of the paint to the surface. Materials for etch-priming shall be as recommended by the paint manufacturers. Subsequent painting of galvanized surfaces shall comply with this Specification.

3. Prior to painting, all metallic surfaces except galvanized surfaces shall be

thoroughly scraped and wire brushed as necessary to remove scale, rust and swarf. Surfaces shall then be solvent cleaned to remove all oil, grease and dirt.

4. When the surfaces to be painted are clean and dry, one coat of an approved

primer shall be evenly applied over the entire area. After surfaces have been primed, the Sanitary General Contractor shall notify the engineers so that an inspection of the primed surfaces can be made prior to the application of the undercoat and the finishing coats.




5. When the priming coat has been approved, one coat of an approved paint flat undercoat shall be applied. Before applying the finishing coats, the General Contractor shall ensure that the undercoated surface is rubbed flat and smooth. Finally, two coats of an approved high gloss finishing paint shall be applied when all dust has been removed.

6. Each successive coating shall be completely dry prior to the application of the

next coat. The minimum thickness of each layer to be 50u.

3.9 TEMPORARY AND TRIAL USE

A. Obtain written permission from MEEPF Consultant to use and test permanent

equipment and systems prior to Substantial Performance acceptance by MEEPF Consultant.

B. MEEPF Consultant may use equipment and systems for test purposes prior to

acceptance. Provide labor, fuel, material and instruments required for testing. Rectify incomplete work immediately to the satisfaction of MEEPF Consultant.

C. Protect equipment and system openings from dirt, dust and other foreign materials

during temporary usage.

D. Clean and renew equipment and systems used prior to acceptance.

E. Warranty, including duration and commencement date, shall not to be affected by start-up date of equipment.

3.10 COMPLETION A. Remove all debris from inside Division 15 systems and equipment.

B. Rectify deficiencies and complete work before submitting request for Substantial

Performance inspection.

C. Follow manufacturer's written instructions regarding bearing lubrication. Remove grease from pillowblock type bearings and install new grease before equipment is put into operation.

D. Check and align all drives to manufacturer's acceptable tolerances.

E. Check and align all pumps to manufacturer's acceptable tolerances.

F. Remove all temporary protection and covers.

G. Remove oil and grease from equipment and bases.

H. Clean all fixtures and equipment. Polish all plated surfaces.

I. Change air and water filters.

J. Remove, clean and reinstall pipeline strainer screens.

K. Leave Division 15 work in as new working order.




3.11 INSTRUCTIONS TO EMPLOYER A. Submit to Employer, check lists for each system or piece of equipment, indicating that

all components have been checked and are complete prior to instruction period.

B. Thoroughly instruct the Employer in the safe and efficient operation of the systems and equipment.

C. Arrange and pay for the services of qualified manufacturer's representatives to

instruct Employer on specialized portions of the installation, such as refrigeration machines, boilers, automatic and water treatment.

D. Submit a complete record of instructions given to the Employer. For each instruction

period, supply the following data:

1. Date 2. Duration 3. System or equipment involved 4. Names of persons giving instructions 5. Names of persons being instructed 6. Other persons present

E. Submit receipted verification of completed training to MEEPF Consultant prior to final

release of retentions.

F. Carry out instructional period during a period of 5 days scheduled at Employer's convenience.

G. Video tape all instructional sessions and turn over copy of tape to Employer upon

completion of training period.

3.12 PROTECTION OF EMPLOYER’S PREMISES A. Adhere strictly to the Employer's requirements.

B. Confer with the Employer concerning schedule, dust and noise control prior to

commencing work in or adjacent to existing facilities where such work might affect either those facilities or their occupants.

C. Execute work with least possible interference or disturbance to occupants, public and

normal use of premises.

D. Provide temporary means to maintain security when security has been reduced by Division 15.

E. Only elevators, dumbwaiters, conveyors or escalators assigned for Main Contractor's

use may be used for moving men and material within building. Protect walls of passenger elevators, to approval of Employer prior to use. Accept liability for damage, safety of equipment and overloading of existing equipment.

F. Provide temporary dust screens, barriers, warning signs in locations where renovations and alteration work is adjacent to areas which will be operative during work.

G. Drawings indicate approximate locations of known existing underground and above

ground facilities. Avoid damage to existing services. Bear cost of repairs and replacements.




H. Immediately advise MEEPF Consultant when unknown services are encountered and await instructions.

I. Accept liability for costs incurred by the Employer in repairing and cleaning equipment,

etc., resulting from failure to comply with the above requirements.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods SECTION 15050


Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.DOC

PART 1 - GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 WORK INCLUDED .................................................................................................................................... 1 1.2 RELATED WORK ..................................................................................................................................... 1 1.3 IDENTIFICATION OF MECHANICAL SERVICES .......................................................................................... 1 1.4 PIPE AND DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION................................................................................................... 1 1.5 VALVE TAGS ........................................................................................................................................... 2 1.6 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES ...................................................................................................................... 2 1.7 CONTROLS IDENTIFICATION .................................................................................................................... 2 1.8 FLOW DIAGRAMS .................................................................................................................................... 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................................................ 3

2.1 INSERTS .................................................................................................................................................. 3 2.2 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND RESTRAINTS ............................................................................. 3 2.3 PIPING ISOLATION ................................................................................................................................. 11 2.4 EQUIPMENT RIGGING SUPPORTS ......................................................................................................... 11 2.5 SLEEVES, WALL AND FLOOR PLATES .................................................................................................. 11 2.6 PROVISION FOR PIPE EXPANSION, CONTRACTION AND BUILDING SHRINKAGE ................................... 12 2.7 DRAINS ................................................................................................................................................. 13 2.8 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS .............................................................................................................. 13 2.9 FLASHING ............................................................................................................................................. 13 2.10 CURBS .................................................................................................................................................. 13 2.11 CONCRETE ............................................................................................................................................ 14 2.12 COVERS (BY OTHER DIVISIONS) ............................................................................................................ 14 2.13 STEEL ................................................................................................................................................... 14 2.14 BELT DRIVES ........................................................................................................................................ 14 2.15 DRIVE GUARDS ..................................................................................................................................... 16 2. 16 FIRESTOPPING ...................................................................................................................................... 16 2.17 TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS ...................................................................................................................... 16

PART 3 - EXECUTION ..................................................................................................................................... 16

3.1 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL ................................................................................................................. 16 3.2 PIPE, DUCT AND EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION ........................................................................................ 17 3.3 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................. 18 3.4 INSERTS ................................................................................................................................................ 18 3.5 HANGERS .............................................................................................................................................. 19 3.6 SLEEVES, WALL PLATES, FLOOR PLATES ........................................................................................... 21 3.7 PROVISION FOR PIPE EXPANSION, CONTRACTION AND BUILDING SHRINKAGE ................................... 22 3.8 PIPE GUIDES AND ANCHORS ................................................................................................................ 22 3.9 PAINTING............................................................................................................................................... 23 3.10 MOTOR AND DRIVE ALIGNMENT ........................................................................................................... 23 3.11 LUBRICATION ........................................................................................................................................ 23 3.12 START-UP AND TEMPORARY OPERATION ............................................................................................. 23 3.13 OPERATING AND PERFORMANCE TESTS .............................................................................................. 23




SECTION 15050

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Comply with Division 1, General Requirements and all documents referred to therein.

B. Provide all labour, materials, products, equipment and services to supply and install the basic mechanical materials indicated on the Drawings and specified in Division 15 of these Specifications.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 15010 – Mechanical General Provisions.

B. Section 07841 – Through Penetration Firestopping Systems.

C. Section 15071 – Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls.

D. Section 15080 – Mechanical Insulation.

E. Section 15900 – HVAC Instrumentation and Controls.

1.3 IDENTIFICATION OF MECHANICAL SERVICES

A. Identify all mechanical services after finish painting is complete.

B. Use terminology consistent - with the Drawings and Specifications

C. Identify lay-in type acoustic ceilings used for access to equipment and components by a method acceptable to Consultant.

D. Mark valve and equipment identification on Record Drawings.

E. Provide typewritten master lists for each Equipment Room. Frame under glass.

Insert copies in Operating and Maintenance Instruction Manuals.

1.4 PIPE AND DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION

A. Provide SMS Wrap-Mark on all pipe coverings, using Wrap-Mark pipe markers with flow arrow and alternating wording. For outside diameters up to 150 mm, allow marker to completely wrap pipe. For larger outside diameters, secure markers with stainless steel springs. Secure markers on vertical piping and elsewhere where markers could be inadvertently moved.

B. Use stencils and stencil paint on ductwork or ductwork insulation. Apply solid black

capitalized lettering 50 mm high and solid black flow arrows 150 mm long x 50 mm wide.

C. Locate identification and flow arrows so they can be seen clearly from floor and

service platforms:

1. at least once in each room

2. at each piece of equipment




3. at each branch close to connection point to main piping and ductwork

4. at not greater than intervals of 15 metres on straight runs of exposed piping and ductwork

5. at entry and leaving point to pipe and duct chases, or other concealed spaces

6. both sides where piping and ductwork passes through walls, partitions and

floors

7. on vertical pipes and ducts approximately 1800 mm above floor

8. behind each access door and panel 9. at valves, identify piping upstream of valves and identify branch, equipment,

building part or building serviced downstream of valve

D. Colour code pipes meeting code International Standards and Owner’s requirements. At minimum, colour code pipes with 50 mm wide bands in accordance with the detail shown on the drawings. The Contractor is to submit the proposed colour coding of pipes for approval.

1.5 VALVE TAGS

A. Provide 40 mm dia., 1 mm thick brass tags with 10mm high die-stamped black letters.

B. Attach to valves with 100 mm long brass chains.

C. Tag all valves except for small valves isolating a single piece of equipment such as a air handling units, fan coil unit, primary air units and VRV/split ac units.

1.6 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES

A. Identify equipment, starters, and, remote control devices in a manner consistent with the Drawings.

B. Use solid black capitalized lettering 100 mm high.

C. Where equipment size does not permit stencil identification, use lamacoid labels,

engraved white on black, mechanically fastened to the equipment. Minimum lettering size 10 mm.

1.7 CONTROLS IDENTIFICATION

A. Meet Section 15900 requirements.

1.8 FLOW DIAGRAMS

A. Prepare neat diagrams 1200 mm x 900 mm of piping systems to identify equipment and valves.

B. Insert legible page size copies into each Operating and Maintenance Manual.

C. Install diagrams, framed under glass, on Equipment Room walls where directed by

Owner.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSERTS

A. Submit proposed materials and methods for cast-in-place inserts.

B. Where inserts must be placed after concrete is poured, use Phillips Red Head Multiset II Anchor system or equivalent Hilti System.

2.2 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND RESTRAINTS

A. Vibration Isolators: Refer to Section 15071.

B. In lieu of the paragraph which follow, suspended equipment support and restraints may be designed and installed in accordance with the National Uniform Seismic Installation Guidelines (NUSIG), most current edition. Submittals based on either the NUSIG guidelines or the following paragraphs of this Section shall be stamped and signed by a professional. Support of suspended equipment over 227kg (500 pounds) shall be submitted for approval of the Consultant in all cases. See paragraph 2.2.M for lateral force design requirements.

C. Supports for Roof Mounted Items:

1. Equipment: Equipment rails shall be hot dipped galvanized steel, minimum 1.3 mm (18 gauge), with integral baseplate, continuous welded corner seams, factory installed 50 mm by 100 mm (2 by 4) treated wood nailer, 1.3 mm (18 gauge) galvanized steel counter flashing cap with screws, built-in cant strip, (except for gypsum or tectum deck), minimum height 280 mm (11 inches). For surface insulated roof deck, provide raised cant strip to start at the upper surface of the insulation.

2. Pipe/duct pedestals: Provide a hot dipped galvanized unistrut channel welded to U-shaped mounting brackets which are secured to side of rail with galvanized lag bolts.

D. Type Numbers Specified: MSS SP-58. For selection and application refer to MSS SP-69. Refer to Section 19 Part 4, for miscellaneous metal support materials and prime coat painting.

E. For Attachment to Concrete Construction:

1. Concrete insert: Type 18, MSS SP-58.

2. Self-drilling expansion shields and machine bolt expansion anchors: Fed. Spec. FF-S-325, permitted in concrete not less than 102 mm (four inches) thick. Applied load shall not exceed one-fourth the proof test load listed in Fed. Spec. FF-S-325.

3. Power-driven fasteners: Permitted in existing concrete or masonry not less than 102 mm (four inches) thick when approved by the Consultant for each job condition. Applied load shall not exceed one-fourth the proof test load listed in Fed. Spec. FF-S-325.

F. For Attachment to Steel Construction: MSS SP-58.

1. Welded attachment: Type 22.

2. Beam clamps: Types 20, 21, 28 or 29. Type 23 C-clamp may be used for individual copper tubing up to 23mm (7/8-inch) outside diameter.




G. Attachment to Metal Pan or Deck: As required for materials specified in Section 19 Part 2 and Section 19 Part 3.

H. For Attachment to Wood Construction: Wood screws or lag bolts.

I. Hanger Rods: Hot-rolled steel, ASTM A36 or A575 for allowable load listed in MSS SP-58. For piping, provide adjustment means for controlling level or slope. Types 13 or 15 turn-buckles shall provide 38 mm (1-1/2 inches) minimum of adjustment and incorporate locknuts. All-thread rods are acceptable.

J. Multiple (Trapeze) Hangers: Galvanized, cold formed, lipped steel channel horizontal

member, not less than 41mm by 41mm (1-5/8 inches by 1-5/8 inches), 2.7 mm (No. 12 gage), designed to accept special spring held, hardened steel nuts. Not permitted for steam supply and condensate piping.

1. Allowable hanger load: Manufacturers rating less 91kg (200 pounds).

2. Guide individual pipes on the horizontal member of every other trapeze hanger with 6 mm (1/4-inch) U-bolt fabricated from steel rod. Provide Type 40 insulation shield, secured by two 13mm (1/2-inch) galvanized steel bands, or pre-insulated calcium silicate shield for insulated piping at each hanger.

K. Pipe Hangers and Supports: (MSS SP-58), use hangers sized to encircle insulation on insulated piping. Refer to Section 15080, for insulation thickness. To protect insulation, provide Type 39 saddles for roller type supports or pre-insulated elastomeric rubber shields similar to “Armafix-T” insulated pipe support or approved equal. Provide Type 40 insulation shield or pre-insulated elastomeric rubber shield at all other types of supports and hangers including those for pre-insulated piping.

1. General Types (MSS SP-58):

a. Standard clevis hanger: Type 1; provide locknut.

b. Riser clamps: Type 8.

c. Wall brackets: Types 31, 32 or 33.

d. Roller supports: Type 41, 43, 44 and 46.

e. Saddle support: Type 36, 37 or 38.

f. Turnbuckle: Types 13 or 15. Pre-insulate

g. U-bolt clamp: Type 24.

h. Copper Tube:

1) Hangers, clamps and other support material in contact with tubing shall be painted with copper colored epoxy paint, plastic coated or taped with non-adhesive isolation tape to prevent electrolysis.

2) For vertical runs use epoxy painted or plastic coated riser clamps.

3) For supporting tube to strut: Provide epoxy painted pipe straps for copper tube or plastic inserted vibration isolation clamps.

4) Insulated Lines: Provide pre-insulated calcium silicate shields sized for copper tube.




i. Supports for plastic or glass piping: As recommended by the pipe manufacturer with black rubber tape extending (25 mm) one inch beyond steel support or clamp.

2. HVAC Piping (Other Than General Types):

a. Medium and high pressure steam: (Not Applicable)

Spring Supports (Expansion and contraction of vertical piping):

1) Movement up to 20 mm (3/4-inch): Type 51 or 52 variable spring unit with integral turn buckle and load indicator.

2) Movement more than 20 mm (3/4-inch): Type 54 or 55 constant support unit with integral adjusting nut, turn buckle and travel position indicator.

3. Convertor and Expansion Tank Hangers (Where required): May be Type 1 sized for the shell diameter. Insulation where required will cover the hangers.

4. Plumbing Piping (Other Than General Types):

a. Horizontal piping: Type 1, 5, 7, 9, and 10.

b. Chrome plated piping: Chrome plated supports.

c. Hangers and supports in pipe chase: Prefabricated system ABS self-extinguishing material, not subject to electrolytic action, to hold piping, prevent vibration and compensate for all static and operational conditions.

d. Blocking, stays and bracing: Angle iron or preformed metal channel shapes, 1.3 mm (18 gage) minimum.

L. Alternative Pipe and Equipment Hanger and Supports

1. General

a. This specification sets out the general standards, materials methods

and processes to be adopted for the supply and installation of building services using wire suspensions as a means of support.

b. Reference has been made to “Wire Rope Suspension Systems – A

Code of Practice for Installers” published by BSRIA, DW/144 published by B&ES (HVCA) and to the Best Practice Guide published by Gripple Ltd.

c. The following describes the preferred method for installation of

Mechanical, Electrical and HVAC services to reduce the environment impact of the installation, improve Health & Safety on site and to reduce costs.

d. Wire hangers shall be used where possible to suspend all static

mechanical, electrical and HVAC services.




2. Definitions a. Hanger – Wire rope suspension.

b. Wire rope – formed from strands of wire twisted together.

c. End fixing – Manufacturer applied ferruled termination to enable

connection of the hanger to the soffit, or other structural member.

d. Housing – Main component or body of the locking device. e. Locking device – single channel or twin channel assembly which acts

as a non-return mechanism for wire rope. f. Securing components – Critical parts of the locking device which form

the non-return mechanism. g. Catenary system – A system of horizontal or slightly inclined wires

from which services are suspended via vertical attachment wires.

3. Minimum Requirements for Materials and Suspension System Manufacturer a. In order to ensure that products are produced to the highest

standards the manufacturer must hold the following – BS EN ISO 9001:2008 Quality Management Standard and BS EN ISO 14001 Environmental Standard.

b. All parts (including the wire) shall be supplied, warranted and proof

tested by the same manufacturer.

3.1 Standard Covering Component Parts of the Suspension System

a. Wire rope shall be manufactured to BS EN 12385: 2002 and the galvanized coating on the wire rope should be in accordance with BS EN 10244: 2001.

b. Ferruled terminations shall be in accordance with BS EN 13411-

3:2004.

c. Where stainless steel wire rope is called for then the wire rope shall be manufactured in accordance with BS MA 29:1982 and will be grade AISI 316.

d. Zinc alloy housings must comply with BS EN 12844:1998.

e. Securing components must comply with (ISO 5755:2001, ISO

2738:1999, ISO 3923-1, ISO 4490).

f. End fixings

1. Mild steel parts – forming BS EN 10263:2001 2. Mild steel parts – finish BS EN 12329:2000 3. Stainless Steel parts – AISI 316

g. Ceramic components shall be manufactured from Sintox FA or

equivalent 95% A12,O3 content material.




3.2 Design

a. The wire rope system shall have a ferruled loop, stud, hook of other manufacturer applied and fitting at one end and be fuse cut at the other end to prevent wire fraying and potential injury.

b. All hangers must be supplied in kit form to prevent the possibility of

cross-contamination of wire and locking devices. The use of spooled wire and separate locks if not permitted.

c. All wire hangers and locking devices must carry a certified minimum

5:1 safety factor or approval and shall each be proof tested by the manufacturer to two times its published safe working load.

d. To eliminate the risk of accidental release, the locking device must be

tamperproof, i.e. be operated by means of a release key that is separate to the locking mechanism, by a release key that can be removed once the installation is complete or by a releasing device that can be locked in position.

e. Locking devices with release pins that cannot be removed or locked

in position are not acceptable. f. All locking mechanisms with two channels shall incorporate a locking

mechanism in each channel. Locking mechanisms with one “free channel” and one locking channel are not permitted.

3.3 Testing

a. All hangers must have been independently proof tested and passed

by Lloyds Register, comply with the requirements of DW/144 and where markets demand, approved by APAVE, TUV, UL, CSA and SMACNA.

b. Each hanger must undergo a non-destructive test to twice their rated

safe working load in order to ensure their suitability for use.

4. Minimum Requirements for Installation

a. The correct specification of wire hanger required is determined using the following formula:

Mass per metre of

suspended service (kg/m) x

Distance between suspension points

(m)

=

Mass per hanger suspension point

(kg)

b. The distance between suspension brackets shall be determined by

the regulations governing the type of service being suspended e.g. DW/144 or by the equipment manufacturer’s recommendations.

c. The Contractor shall select the correct specification of wire hanger to

use for supporting each service from Table 1 below.




Table 1 Wire Hanger Safe Working Loads (as supplied by Gripple Ltd.)

Size Working Load Limit

No. 1 10 kg

No. 2 45 kg

No. 3 90 kg

No. 4 225 kg

No. 5 325 kg

d. Where the installed wire rope is not vertical then the working load

limit shall be reduced in accordance with the following guidelines.

Size Maximum Load (kg) at Angle from Vertical

0o 15o 30o 45o 60o

No. 1 10 9.6 8.6 7 5

No. 2 45 43 39 32 22

No. 3 90 87 78 64 45

No. 4 225 217 195 159 113

No. 5 325 314 281 230 136

Load % 100 96 86 70 50

e. Using locking devices to join two lengths of wire together (in-line joint) is not permitted.

f. In order to improve the aesthetic look of the finished installation and

to reduce the risk of eye injury, all tail wires must be terminated with a purpose made splice or end cap. The tapping of tail wires is not permitted.

g. The wire rope must not be damaged, twisted or deformed in any way prior to, or during, installation. Any such ropes must be discarded and replaced.

h. Lubricants, paint or any other coating should not be applied to the

wire hanger and/or locking device prior to installation as it may impair performance.




5. Fixing to the Building Structure

a. Anchors must have an adequate load rating for the service to be suspended.

b. Wires may be wrapped around purlins or other structural members

which provide sufficient holding strength. c. Suitable concrete anchors and composite metal decking fixings may

also be used. d. Services should not be suspended from other services, without the

express authorisation of the responsible Engineer.

6. Use of Catenary Systems

a. Where it is particularly possible and subject to the necessary approval of the structural engineer, the use of steel channel to span purlins should be avoided and wire catenary systems should be used as an alternative in order to minimise embodied carbon, reduce Health & Safety risks and improve the aesthetics of the installation.

b. When attracting suspension wires to catenary wires, purpose made

quarter turn, cam operated fixings should be used. Bolt or screw actuated attachments are not permitted as these can affect the integrity of the catenary wire and/or the safety of the system.

c. Catenary wires must be secured to elements of the building structure

which possess sufficient strength to withstand potentially high cable tensions. These tensions are usually significantly higher than the vertical loads imposed. Calculations of catenary cable tensions should be submitted by the catenary manufacturer to the installer who should gain approval from a structural engineer prior to installation.

7. Special Circumstances

a. Certain situations demand higher levels of material performance.

7.1 Swimming Pool Environments

a. Special consideration should be given to wire suspensions in

swimming pool and other corrosive environments.

b. 316 Stainless steel wire is only suitable for use in swimming pool environments where the concentrations of hazardous chemicals and humidity are such that accelerated corrosion cannot occur. Often the distinction is made between ‘wet’ and ‘dry’ areas of the pool facility and it is for the latter that the 316 family of stainless steels may be considered. For example, adequately ventilated plant rooms, gymnasiums, canteen areas, offices and changing areas alongside but environmentally separated from the pool hall.

c. 316 Grade stainless steel rope is not suitable for use in highly

stressed situations where high concentrations of corrosive chemicals could promote stress corrosion cracking, such as directly above the pool water.




d. In all cases, regardless of suspension type or location, regular inspections should be part of the building maintenance schedule to guard against the onset of corrosion.

e. If in doubt over the suitability of any product to meet the requirements

of a given situation it is recommend that the installer seeks advice from a suitability qualified corrosion consultant.

All installations shall be completed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

M. Pre-insulated Elastomeric Rubber Shields (Insulated Piping Pipe Support):

1. Saddles shall be insulated on all insulated lines at clamps, hangers or locations where insulation may be compressed.

2. All hanging and clipping of pipes shall be made with Armafix pipe hangers and pipe supports or with pipe supports made from the same materials as the pipe insulation with the inclusion of a PUR/PIR bearing segments to support the pipe weight. The hangers and supports will be constructed from a suitanle material to prevent compression. The pipe supports and hangers must be glued to the adjacent insulation to provide a vapour seal and the completed assembly of suitable construction to prevent thermal bridging. The seams shall be sealed with Armaflex 520 or 820 contact adhesive.

3. Hangers clamped directly to the pipe shall be insulated over the hanger; insulation shall be fully adhered to the hanger. In addition, hangers with double rods shall be insulated between the rods. All seams of the insulation shall be sealed with adhesive.

N. Seismic Restraint of Piping:

1. Design criteria is as follows:

a. Piping resiliently supported: 120 percent of the weight of the systems and components and contents.

b. Piping not resiliently supported: 60 percent of the weight of the system components and contents.

c. Except as noted above, meet the more severe requirements of the Local Code and the latest Uniform Building Code for determining seismic force Fp.

2. Provide one of the following options:

a. Design and installation to meet the criteria listed above, and meet requirements of the latest Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA), Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems for the prescribed Seismic Hazard Level (SHL).

b. Design and installation to meet the criteria listed above, and meet the most current requirements of the National Uniform Seismic Installation Guidelines (NUSIG). Contractor shall submit all design tables and information for the design force levels, stamped and signed by a professional engineer registered in the place where project is located.




c. Where SMACNA or NUSIG requirements are not met completely, submit proposed alternate details and calculations to completely address seismic bracing requirements. Such designs shall use more severe of the Local Code and the Uniform Building Code requirements for determining seismic forces, and be performed, stamped and signed by a professional engineer. Revise if necessary any details shown on the contract drawings for vertical support and lateral bracing, and submit for the approval of the Consultant to meet the design criteria listed above.

2.3 PIPING ISOLATION

A. General:

1. All chilled water, condenser water, flue gas, and other piping within mechanical rooms or within 50 feet total pipe length (whichever is longer) of connected vibration-isolated equipment (chillers, pumps, air handling units, etc.) and all of the above piping that is 12 inches or larger shall be isolated from the building structure by means of vibration-isolation mounts, resilient pipe guides, and resilient penetration sleeve/seals.

2. Spring isolators shall be selected for a static deflection, under load of not less

than I inch Unit SLRS or 30N isolators (whichever is applicable to the mounting condition) shall be used.

3. Where lateral support of pipe risers is required within the specified limits, this shall be accomplished by use of resilient lateral supports.

4. Pipes within the specified limits that penetrate the building construction shall

be isolated from the building structure by use of resilient penetrating sleeve/seals.

5. Drain piping connected to vibration-isolated equipment shall not contact the building structure or other non-isolated system unless it is resiliently mounted as described above.

2.4 EQUIPMENT RIGGING SUPPORTS

A. Provide eyebolts suitable for block and tackle connection, adequately supported by the structure above for:

1. Pumps 2. Large Fans 3. Motors 4. Fan Coil Units 5. Air Handlers 6. Cooling Towers 6. Other equipment which will require block and tackle handling

2.5 SLEEVES, WALL AND FLOOR PLATES

A. Use machine cut and reamed standard weight steel piping. Pipe sleeves 200 mm and larger shall have minimum 6 mm wall thickness.

B. Concealed perimeter risers and runouts may have sleeves of 1.31 mm galvanized

steel set around section of insulation to provide freedom of movement of piping. Extend 50 mm above finished floor level.




C. For piping through exterior walls, cooperate with the waterproofing trade at all times, and do not break any waterproofing seal without consent of the waterproofing trade. Provide waterproof link seals as detailed on Drawings.

D. Provide leak plates where pipe sleeves pass through exterior building walls. Each

leak plate shall be a 3.42 mm steel plate, welded to the sleeve, 100 mm diameter greater than sleeve outside diameter.

E. Provide 1.31 mm galvanized steel duct sleeves. Provide adequate bracing for support

of sleeves during concrete and masonry work. For fire rated floors and walls, build fire damper assemblies into structure to attain fire rated construction, in a manner acceptable to the governing authorities.

F. Cover pipe sleeves in walls and ceilings of finished areas, other than Equipment

Rooms, with satin finish stainless steel, or satin finish chrome or nickel plated brass escutcheons, with non-ferrous set screws. Do not use stamped steel split plates. Split cast plates with screw locks, however, may be used.

G. Cover exposed duct sleeves in finished areas with 1.31 mm galvanized steel plates in

the form of duct collars. Fix in position with non-ferrous metal screws.

2.6 PROVISION FOR PIPE EXPANSION, CONTRACTION AND BUILDING SHRINKAGE

A. Where space limitations do not permit the use of expansion loops or offsets, provide expansion joint equal Mason or Honeywell Expansion Joints properly selected for system operating pressures according to the following:

1. For piping up to and including 65 mm, select ends to suit specified pipe

fittings. Pressure shall be external to the bellows. Pressure ratings for Model H and HB expansion compensated as 1400 kPa and 1050 kPa.

2. Steel Piping – Honeywell expansion compensator with two ply stainless steel

bellows. 3. Copper Piping – Honeywell expansion compensator with two ply below, all

bronze construction.

4. For piping 75 mm and above, use flanged ends. 5. Steel Piping - Honeywell controlled, flexing expansion joint with stainless steel

pressure carrier, flanged ends. 6. Copper Piping - Honeywell controlled, flexing expansion joint with monel

pressure carrier, and brass flanged ends.

B. Submit for Consultant review prior to installation, drawings showing the location of expansion joints, anchors and guides. Show details of proposed connection to structure and loads to be imposed.

C. Recognize that the concrete structure will shrink. Design risers with sufficient

flexibility. Consult with structural engineer to determine the degree of flexibility.




2.7 DRAINS

A. Provide minimum 20 mm ball valve with hose end adapter, metal cap and chain at all low points of all systems. Locate to allow easy connection of hose.

B. Provide 40 mm minimum size drains from ductwork connected to intake hoods and

wall louvers. Equip drains with deep seal traps. Locate traps in heated areas.

C. Provide 20 mm valves with metal caps and chains at the base of all pipe risers. Install hose end ball valve in conjunction with 450 mm minimum length full line size dirt leg.

2.8 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

A. Provide access to concealed mechanical equipment and components which require inspection, adjustment, repair and preventive maintenance. Install systems and components to result in a minimum number of access doors and panels. Install equipment and components in locations readily accessible through doors and panels.

B. Supply for installation by other Contractors, doors, panels and frames. Ensure that

access doors and panels are properly located. C. Coordinate requirements for all access doors and panels to suit Architectural finishes

and large enough to provide adequate access to equipment and components.

D. Check and coordinate Architect’s provision of access doors and panels with a fire rating required by the code governing the fire rating of the structure.

E. In tile walls, and washroom walls, supply minimum 2.78 mm Type 304 stainless steel

with #4 finish, with recessed frame secured with stainless steel countersunk flush head screws.

F. For all other surfaces, supply minimum 2.66 mm welded steel, flush type with

concealed hinges, lock and anchor strap, and factory prime coat finish.

2.9 FLASHING

A. Flashing will be carried out under each trade for roof curbs shown on their drawings.

B. Provide flashing for pipe openings or pre-manufactured roof curbs.

C. Carry out all counterflashing for roof mounted mechanical equipment and for pipes and ducts passing through roof. Fit counterflashing over flashing or curb. Pitch pockets are not acceptable.

2.10 CURBS

A. Curbs required for Division 15 work will be carried out under each trade. B. Arrange and pay for Division 3 or Division 5 to provide other curbs and reinforcing

steel required for Division 15.

C. Pre-manufactured curbs for mechanical equipment mounted on roof will be supplied by equipment manufacturer and they are specified under other Sections of this Division.

D. Curbs are required for roof mounted equipment, around ducts passing through roof

and surrounding holes where groups of pipes and/or ducts pass through Equipment Room floors, Kitchens and similar areas where water dams are required.




E. Provide roof curbs at least 300 mm above finished roof, unless exceeded by Architectural considerations.

F. Provide concrete curbs around holes in Equipment Room floors, extending at least

150 mm above finished floor. Make watertight connection between curb and floor. G. Fill spaces between curbs and pipes and ducts with firestopping material similar to

“Rectorseal” or equal. Caulk watertight with manufacturer’s recommended fire resistant waterproof compound.

2.11 CONCRETE

A. Coordinate with Division 3 provision of 100 mm concrete housekeeping pads under all floor mounted mechanical equipment and supports. Extend pads over the full equipment base and isolator area.

B. Concrete work, including housekeeping pads, required for Division 15 work and

shown on the Structural or Architectural Drawings will be provided by Division 3.

2.12 COVERS (BY OTHER DIVISIONS)

A. Supply frames for installation by Division 3.

B. Provide covers for pits and sumps.

C. Provide gas tight gaskets for sewage pits.

D. Trench gratings will be provided by Division 5.

2.13 STEEL

A. Provide steel required for Division 15 work including supports, framing of openings and lintels over openings that is not shown on Structural or Architectural Drawings.

B. Provide steel of adequate strength to support equipment and materials during all

operating and test conditions.

C. Support suspended equipment from the bottom or from manufacturer's designated suspension points. Support tanks and similar equipment with adequate beam strength by saddles with curvature to match the equipment. Continuously support other equipment.

D. Provide base supports for all pipe risers. Design to distribute operating and static loads to meet Consultant requirements.

E. Fabricate steel supports in contact with water or humidity conditions from materials

having approved corrosion resistance or galvanize after fabrication or brush welds clean and apply a prime coat of rust inhibiting paint.

2.14 BELT DRIVES

A. Type: ANSI/RMA standard V-belts with proper motor pulley and driven sheave. Belts shall be constructed of reinforced cord and rubber.

B. Dimensions, rating and selection standards: ANSI/RMA IP-20 and IP-21.




C. Minimum Horsepower Rating: Motor horsepower plus recommended ANSI/RMA service factor (not less than 20 percent) in addition to the ANSI/RMA allowances for pitch diameter, center distance, and arc of contact.

D. Maximum Speed: 25 m/s (5000 feet per minute).

E. Adjustment Provisions: For alignment and ANSI/RMA standard allowances for

installation and take-up.

F. Drives may utilize a single V-Belt (any cross section) when it is the manufacturer's standard.

G. Multiple Belts: Matched to ANSI/RMA specified limits by measurement on a belt measuring fixture. Seal matched sets together to prevent mixing or partial loss of sets. Replacement, when necessary, shall be an entire set of new matched belts.

H. Sheaves and Pulleys:

1. Material: Pressed steel, or close grained cast iron.

2. Bore: Fixed or bushing type for securing to shaft with keys.

3. Balanced: Statically and dynamically.

4. Groove spacing for driving and driven pulleys shall be the same.

5. Minimum Diameter of V-Belt Sheaves (ANSI/RMA recommendations) in millimeters and inches:

Fractional Horsepower Standard High Capacity

Cross Section

Min. od mm (in)

Cross Section

Min. od mm (in)

Cross Section

Min. od mm (in)

2L 20 (0.8) A 83 (3.25) 3V 67 (2.65)

3L 38 (1.5) B 146 (5.75) 4V 180 (7.10)

4L 64 (2.5) C 239 (9.40) 5V 318 (12.50)

5L 89 (3.5) D 345 (13.60)

E 554 (21.80)

I. Drive Types, Based on ARI 435:

1. Provide adjustable-pitch or fixed-pitch drive as follows:

a. Fan speeds up to 1800 RPM: 7.5 kW (10 horsepower) and smaller.

b. Fan speeds over 1800 RPM: 2.2 kW (3 horsepower) and smaller.

2. Provide fixed-pitch drives for drives larger than those listed above.

3. The final fan speeds required to just meet the system CFM and pressure requirements, without throttling, shall be determined by adjustment of a temporary adjustable-pitch motor sheave or by fan law calculation if a fixed-pitch drive is used initially.




2.15 DRIVE GUARDS

A. For machinery and equipment, provide guards as shown in AMCA 410 for belts, chains, couplings, pulleys, sheaves, shafts, gears and other moving parts regardless of height above the floor. Drive guards may be excluded where motors and drives are inside factory fabricated air handling unit casings.

B. Materials: Sheet steel, cast iron, expanded metal or wire mesh rigidly secured so as to be removable without disassembling pipe, duct, or electrical connections to equipment.

C. Access for Speed Measurement: 25 mm (one inch) diameter hole at each shaft center.

2. 16 FIRESTOPPING

Section 07841 specifies an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases where penetrations occur for piping and ductwork. Refer to Section 15080, for firestop pipe and duct insulation.

2.17 TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS

A. Furnish, and turn over to the Consultant, special tools not readily available commercially, that are required for disassembly or adjustment of equipment and machinery furnished.

B. Grease Guns with Attachments for Applicable Fittings: One for each type of grease

required for each motor or other equipment.

C. Tool Containers: Hardwood or metal, permanently identified for intended service and mounted, or located, where directed by the Consultant.

D. Lubricants: A minimum of 0.95 L (one quart) of oil, and 0.45 kg (one pound) of

grease, of equipment manufacturer's recommended grade and type, in unopened containers and properly identified as to use for each different application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

A. Conform to the requirements of Division 2.

B. Read subsurface information data.

C. Excavation and backfill required for Division 15 work inside the building and to a point 1.5 m outside building shall be carried out by the Division listed in the following schedule:

1. Excavation:

Initial excavation to 150 mm above pipe inverts Division 2

2. Final excavation to pipe inverts Division 15 3. Backfill

Initial backfill with sand to 300 mm above top of pipes Division 15




4. Final backfill Division 2

D. Ensure that excavation work is executed to attain required inverts and grades.

E. Remove material excavated by Division 15 and not to be reused, from the site. F. Carefully prepare the bottom of pipe trench. Use one of the following bedding

methods:

1. In firm undisturbed soil, lay pipe directly on the soil and shape soil to fit the lower 1/3 segment of pipe and fittings.

2. In rock, shale and where noted, excavate to 150 mm below and minimum 200

mm on each side of pipe. Form a 150 mm thick bedding using 10 mm crushed stone. Provide continuous support over at least the lower 1/3 segment of pipe.

3. In unstable soil, in fill and where soil has been disturbed during previous

excavation work, excavate to at least 150 mm below bottom of pipe and form a reinforced concrete cradle supporting full length between firm support, or install piers down to undisturbed solid soil. Piers shall be at a maximum spacing of 2400 mm. Provide at least one pier for each pipe length. Support over at least the lower 1/3 segment of pipe.

G. Where excavation is necessary close to and below the level of any footing, backfill

with 14,000 kPa concrete to the level of the highest adjacent footing. Do not proceed with the work prior to receiving written approval from Consultant.

H. Obtain approval from governing authorities and Consultant before backfilling.

I. Provide backfilling materials as specified in Division 2. Lay and compact as specified

in Division 2.

3.2 PIPE, DUCT AND EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Locate distribution systems, equipment and materials for maximum usable space, optimum service clearances and to accommodate current requirements and identified future expansion.

B. Coordinate Division 15 services installation above typical floor modular ceilings to

allow installation and future relocation of lights and air troffers without interfering with or requiring relocation of mechanical, electrical or other services, or removal of ceiling grid.

C. Include all pipe and duct offsets required to eliminate interference with the work of

other Divisions.

D. Install equipment and materials to present a neat appearance. Run piping, ducts and conduit parallel to or perpendicular to building planes. Conceal piping, ducts and conduit in finished areas. Install so as to require a minimum amount of furring.

E. Install pipe, duct and conduit straight, parallel and close to walls and slab or deck

underside, with specified pitch.

F. Use standard fittings for all direction changes. Do not use drilled tees and other field fabricated fittings.

G. Install eccentric reducers in horizontal piping to permit drainage and eliminate air

pockets.




H. Where pipe sizes differ from connection sizes of equipment, provide reducing fittings between inline components such as valves, strainers and fittings, and equipment. Reducing bushings are not permitted.

I. Cap open ends of piping during installation.

J. Lay copper tubing so that it is not in contact with dissimilar metal and will not kink or

collapse. K. Use non-corrosive lubricant or teflon tape equal to Dow Corning and apply on male

thread. L. Provide brass adaptors or dielectric couplings wherever dissimilar metals are joined.

M. No pipe to be laid in water or when, in opinion of Consultant conditions are unsuitable.

N. Ensure that pipe installation does not transmit vibration to the walls and floors through

which they pass.

O. Make provisions for neat insulation finish around equipment and materials. Do not mount equipment within insulation depth.

P. Provide, in electrical rooms and elevator machine rooms, drip trays under the entire

length of pipe within the confines of the room. Pipe drip tray to nearest floor drain.

Q. Perform welding to meet ANSI B31.9.

3.3 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT

A. Provide unions or flanges at all connections to equipment. Ensure that piping adjacent to equipment is readily removable for servicing and/or removal of equipment without shutting down entire system.

B. Install unions in piping up to and including 50 mm pipe size. Install flanges in piping

65 mm pipe size and larger.

C. Prevent galvanic corrosion by isolating copper and steel. Use red brass adapters, or completely isolate flanges using full face gaskets with bolts installed through phenolic sleeves with insulating fibre washers. Where the Plumbing Code prohibits the use of red brass adapters, use insulating couplings. Where system valves are required, solid brass isolating valves may be used in lieu of adapters or couplings.

D. Provide metallic code rated continuity link between flanges or unions, where pipe

mains carry flammable fluids or gases.

E. Make all plumbing and sheet metal connections to equipment provided by the Owner.

3.4 INSERTS

A. Size and space for the loads to be supported.

B. Properly locate and firmly secure inserts to forms before concrete is poured.

C. Place inserts only within main structure and not in any finishing materials.

D. When inserts are required in precast concrete, supply inserts and location drawings to the precast concrete supplier for casting into material. Otherwise, include the cost of having the precast concrete supplier install inserts at the site.




E. Do not use powder actuated tools.

3.5 HANGERS

A. Suspend piping, ductwork and equipment with all necessary hangers and supports required for a safe and neat installation. Ensure that pipes are free to expand and contract and are graded properly. Adjust each hanger to take its full share of the weight.

B. Suspend hanger rods directly from the structure. Do not suspend pipes, ducts or

equipment from other pipes, ducts, equipment, metal work or ceilings.

C. Provide auxiliary structural steel angles, channels and beams where ductwork, piping and equipment must be suspended between joists or beams.

D. Use galvanized rods, steel support angles, channels and beams where exposed to

direct contact with water or to possible high humidity conditions where condensation can occur.

E. Space hangers to ensure that structural steel members are not over stressed. In no

case shall pipe hangers be further apart than indicated in the tables. When requested, submit detailed drawings showing locations and magnitude of ductwork, piping and equipment loads on the structure. Provide calculations when requested by Consultant.

F. Do not use trapeze type hangers for support of piping, without prior review by

Consultant. Where permitted, fabricate from angle or channel frames, and space hangers to suit the smallest pipe size.

G. Except for specified Wire Rope Suspension Systems, do not use hooks, chains or straps to support equipment and materials.

H. For precast concrete work, if inserts cannot be cast into members, pass hanger rods between the members and weld to steel plates resting on the upper surface of the precast material. To prevent raising of the hanger rod, apply a lock nut and 50 mm minimum dia. flat washer tight against the under surface of the precast material.

I. Ensure that copper materials are completely isolated from ferrous materials. Use

plastic or epoxy coated hangers and clamps, or use lead inserts between copper piping and ferrous materials, and between copper piping and copper coated ferrous materials.

J. Provide round steel threaded rods meeting ASTM A-36.

K. The following table establishes minimum standards of rod sizes and hanger spacing

for steel and copper piping.




Maximum Horizontal

Spacing of Supports

Pipe Size

mm

Rod Size

mm

Steel

m

Copper

m

12 20 25 32 40 50 65 75 90 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600

10 10 10 10 10 10 12 12 12 16 16 20 22 22 22 25 25 29 32 32

1.5 1.8 1.8 2.4 2.7 2.7 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7

1.5 1.8 1.8 2.1 2.4 2.7 3.0 3.0 3.3 3.7 3.7 3.7

L. In addition to these basic requirements, provide hangers in the following location:

1. to eliminate vibration

2. at points of vertical and horizontal change of direction of pipe

3. at inline centrifugal pumps

4. at valves and strainers 5. on mains at branch takeoffs

6. to avoid stress on equipment connections

7. as required for seismic restraint

M. Install spring hangers or other special supports specified in Section 15071. N. Support horizontal cast iron soil pipe at each hub. Where groups of fittings occur, not

more than three joints shall be between hangers.

O. Refer to applicable articles of the Specification regarding thermal insulation requirements. Unless shown specifically on Drawings, provide the following support methods.

1. For insulated condensate piping up to 65 mm diameter, support with hangers

directly on piping.




P. Generally, support ducts with 2.7 mm by 25 mm wide galvanized hangers or with 12 mm dia. rods and 40 mm rolled angle saddles to meet SMACNA or ASHRAE Standards.

Q. Support vertical duct risers at each floor with rolled angle collars bearing on building

structure.

3.6 SLEEVES, WALL PLATES, FLOOR PLATES

A. Set sleeves for piping and ductwork in conjunction with erection of floors and walls. Locate sleeves accurately in accordance with submittal drawings, and as follows:

1. Through interior walls, set sleeves flush with finished surfaces on both sides.

2. Through exterior walls above grade, set sleeves flush with finished surfaces

on inside and to suit flashing on outside.

3. For floors in Mechanical Equipment Rooms, Janitors Closets, Kitchens and similar areas where a water dam is required, set sleeves flush to underside of structure and extending 50 mm above finished floor.

4. For other floors, set sleeves flush to both finished surfaces.

B. Size sleeves to provide 25 mm clearance around insulated piping and ductwork.

C. Ensure that fire ratings of floors and walls are maintained.

D. Provide continuous insulation runs through fire separations. Ensure that piping and

ductwork do not touch sleeves.

E. Pack clearance spaces with Rectorseal Metacaulk Firestopping materials strictly as recommended by the manufacturer.

F. Install leak tight seals to meet the manufacturer's requirements. Select the inside

diameter of each wall sleeve opening to fit the pipe and leak tight seal, all to ensure watertight joint.

G. Additional sleeving requirements:

1. Provide sleeves for systems not part of Contract, but identified to be required

on Drawings. 2. Provide sleeves to accommodate compressed air piping and wiring conduits

required for Division 15 work.

3. Utilize, insofar as possible, sleeves provided in other Contracts. 4. Provide additional sleeves as required by Drawings to accommodate service

requirements. Include for the cost of drilling and setting sleeves.

5. Fill unused sleeves with lime plaster.




3.7 PROVISION FOR PIPE EXPANSION, CONTRACTION AND BUILDING SHRINKAGE

A. Make provision for pipe expansion, contraction and building shrinkage with suitable anchors and offsets or expansion loops.

B. Install piping to allow freedom of movement in all planes without imposing undue

stress on any section of main piping, branch piping, equipment and structure.

C. Use offsets at take-offs to fans, fan coil units, pipe risers and other branch lines.

D. Select expansion joints for the calculated movement according to the following temperature ranges.

1. For cold pipes, from minimum operating temperature to 38 deg C, plus 25%

safety factor.

2. For warm and hot pipes, from minimum ambient, but not lower than -5 deg C, to maximum operating temperature plus 25% safety factor.

E. When ambient temperature during installation is higher than operating temperature,

use precompressed expansion joints.

F. Select expansion joints to withstand system test pressure, as well as operating pressures and temperatures.

G. Install expansion joints in accordance with manufacturers published installation

instructions.

H. During the construction and warranty periods, regularly review provisions for building shrinkage and make necessary adjustments to piping to ensure freedom from binding and stress.

3.8 PIPE GUIDES AND ANCHORS

A. Install pipe guides for expansion joints according to expansion joint manufacturer's published recommendations. Use at least two guides on each side of expansion joint.

B. Install manufactured or field fabricated alignment guides to allow movement in axial

direction only.

C. Install vertical risers properly anchored and guided to maintain accurate vertical position of piping. At time of start-up, clean and lubricate guides, and adjust to allow free sliding at operating conditions.

D. For piping up to and including 75 mm, guide pipes at every floor or every 3900 mm.

Guide larger pipes at every second floor or every 7500 mm.

E. Fabricate anchors from structural steel channels, plates or angles. F. Secure anchors to the structure. Avoid introduction of excessive reactive forces and

operating weights into the structure and onto equipment and piping.

G. Where guides are provided on cold piping, provide thermal break to prevent sweating.




3.9 PAINTING

A. Supply ferrous metal work except piping and galvanized and stainless steel ductwork, with at least one factory prime coat, or paint one prime coat on job.

B. Clean and steel brush surfaces with welds. Then prime coat all steel supports and

brackets.

C. On uninsulated piping, steel brush and prime coat welds.

D. Touch-up or repaint all surfaces damaged during shipment or installation and leave ready for finish painting.

E. Prime coat material shall conform to, Approved Standards.

F. Finish painting will be provided under Section 09910.

3.10 MOTOR AND DRIVE ALIGNMENT

A. Belt Drive: Set driving and driven shafts parallel and align so that the corresponding grooves are in the same plane.

B. Direct-connect Drive: Securely mount motor in accurate alignment so that shafts are free from both angular and parallel misalignment when both motor and driven machine are operating at normal temperatures.

3.11 LUBRICATION

Field check and lubricate equipment requiring lubrication prior to initial operation.

3.12 START-UP AND TEMPORARY OPERATION

Start-up equipment as described in equipment specifications. Verify that vibration is within specified tolerance prior to extended operation. Temporary use of equipment is specified in Section 15010, Article, Temporary use of Mechanical and Electrical Equipment.

3.13 OPERATING AND PERFORMANCE TESTS

A. Prior to the final inspection, perform required tests as specified in Section 15010, Article, Tests and submit the test reports and records to the Consultant.

B. Should evidence of malfunction in any tested system, or piece of equipment or component part thereof, occur during or as a result of tests, make proper corrections, repairs or replacements, and repeat tests at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. When completion of certain work or system occurs at a time when final control settings and adjustments cannot be properly made to make performance tests, then make performance tests for heating systems and for cooling systems respectively during first actual seasonal use of respective systems following completion of work.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Motors, Starters, Control Centers and Wiring SECTION 15055


Motors, Starters, Control Centers and Wiring.doc

PART 1 - GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 WORK INCLUDED .................................................................................................................................... 1 1.2 RELATED WORK ..................................................................................................................................... 1 1.3 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS .................................................................................................................... 1 1.4 SUBMITTALS ............................................................................................................................................ 1 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................................................. 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................................................ 2

2.1 MOTORS .................................................................................................................................................. 2 2.2 STARTERS, CONTACTORS AND MOTOR CONTROL ................................................................................. 3 2.3 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS .................................................................................................................. 4 2.4 CONTROLLER OVER CURRENT PROTECTION AND DISCONNECTION MEANS FOR COMBINATION

STARTER ................................................................................................................................................. 7

PART 3 - EXECUTION ....................................................................................................................................... 7

3.1 INSTALLATION AND WIRING .................................................................................................................... 7 3.2 WARNING NOTICES................................................................................................................................. 8




SECTION 15055

MOTORS, STARTERS, CONTROL CENTERS AND WIRING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Comply with Division 1, General Requirements and all documents referred to therein.

B. Provide all labour, materials, products, equipment and services to supply and install

the motors, starters, control centres and wiring indicated on the Drawings and specified in this Section of the Specification.

1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 15075 - Variable Speed Drives.


The Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only.

A. IEEE 112 B - Test procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators

B. NEMA MG I – Motors and Generators C. UL-B45

D. NEMA 1652-322

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and manufactures’ data for the following items in accordance with the conditions of the contract. 1. Elementary control diagrams, unit wiring diagram for each motor controller,

assembly outline drawings, summary sheets, shop interwiring diagrams, field connection diagrams, shall be submitted.

2. Include full detailed and dimensioned plans, section and elevations. Include

information on type and size of structural supports, metal thickness, surface finishes, bus cross sections, provisions for lifting as well as single line diagram of switch, fuse, circuit breakers, bus arrangements, metering arrangements, etc.

3. Furnish complete schematic wiring diagram and a full set of equipment wiring

diagrams for protective equipment relays, pilot, lights, alarms, controls, etc. Provide narratives for all wiring diagrams.

4. Include full load heat rejection in BTU per hour for total components by control

center. 5. All circuit breaker sizes and types must be indicated. 6. Where a control center assembly is shipped in more than one section, show

field inter wiring required to maintain circuit continuity upon reassembly. Clearly delineate shipping sections.




7. Include a statement verifying coordination with the automatic temperature controls fire alarm system, BMS and the other required systems.

8. For equipment and material submittals, provide certificate of origin to be

included in the submittal and bill of lading before delivery to site.


A. Each as a complete and finished product shall receive a single integrated equipment rating by the manufacturer. The integrated equipment short circuit wiring shall certify that all equipment is capable of withstanding the thermal and magnetic stress of a fault equal to the value specified on the Drawings. Such rating shall be established by actual tests by the manufacturer on similar equipment. This certification shall be permanently affixed to each motor control center. Test data shall be submitted to the Engineer at time of submission of Acceptance Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MOTORS A. Provide Westinghouse, GE or U.S. Electric, 60 cycle, 1800 rpm for 4P motors, except

where noted, with the following characteristics:

1. under 1.0 kW - single phase, 220 V

2. 1.0 kW and over - 3 phase, 380 V

B. High efficiency motors (per NEMA Standard) shall be provided and shall be compatible with standard motor frames.

C. All motors 1.0 kW and over, unless specified differently, shall be T-frame, A.C. Three

Phase and equal to Motor Efficiency Level as tested to the most recent issue of IEEE 112B.

D. Provide squirrel cage induction motors built to NEMA MGI.

E. The minimum requirement for 3 phase motors shall be NEMA Design B, Class B

insulated for maximum 40 deg. C ambient. F. Select motors for quiet continuous operation to suit loads imposed by equipment.

Recognize that motor horsepower specified and scheduled are minimum sizes. Include extra costs for larger motors, starters, power wiring and additional control wiring if larger motors are required per Contractor’s actual approved submittals.

G. Provide motor enclosures as follows:

1. Open drip-proof, 1.15 service factor for motors protected from the weather

and moisture entertainment to operate satisfactorily at maximum temperature and moisture levels of surrounding air for motors located in air streams.

2. Totally enclosed fan cooled 1.15 service factor for motors in all other

locations, including cooling towers. 3. Provide explosion proof motors where scheduled.

H. Equip motors 18 kW and larger, as well as those smaller but with longer than 10

second starting time, with inherent overheat protection, consisting of thermistors, one for each phase, embedded in the stator windings. Extend wires out to motor terminal




box, ready for field wiring into the starter holding coil circuit. Provide manual reset tripping device compatible with starter.

I. Provide motors to operate with variable speed drives supplied according to Section

15075 and to meet the following:

1. Rated for VSD duty

2. Be operable from a pulse width modulated (PWM) waveform and shall not saturate while operating at up to 110% of the nameplate voltage.

3. At least Class F insulation.

4. Cast frame construction.

5. Must be capable of running at 10% full rated speed with the VSD output

provided by the drives supplied under Section 15075.

6. Provided with thermal sensors imbedded in the windings with connections extended to the motor terminal box. For motor sizes up to and including 18.6 kW, the thermal sensors may be thermistors. For larger sizes, provide RTDs (Resistive Temperature Device). Embed sensors in that part of the windings which is in the iron for response to both copper and iron temperature.

J. Two speed motors shall be, single winding, variable torque high and low speed.

Provide starter to suit motor requirements.

2.2 STARTERS, CONTACTORS AND MOTOR CONTROL

A. Starters and contactors factory built into the control panel of packaged equipment will be considered as an integral part of the package and may be from a different manufacturer.

B. Magnetic Motor Starters

1. Magnetic Motor Starters shall be for general purpose, Class A and for

induction motors rated in horsepower.

2. Self contained unit in a NEMA 1 gasketed enclosure (NEMA 3R where installed outdoors), externally operable from the front.

3. Provide full voltage non-reversing (FVNR) type combination magnetic starters

for motors of ½ HP (0.373 kw) to 7.5 HP (5.5 kw).

4. Provide reduced voltage, non reversing, Wye-delta type combination magnetic starters for motors 10 HP (7.46 kw) up to 50 HP (37.3 kw).

1. Adjustable timing relay for start to run transfer timing. 2. Closed transition from reduced to full voltage.

5. Provide reduced voltage, non-reversing, auto-transformer type, combination

starters for motors above 50 HP.

1. Two winding, open delta connected. 2. Adjustable timing relay for start to run transfer timing.

3. Closed transition from reduced to full voltage.




4. Field adjustable auto transformers taps, 50%, 65%, and 80%, factory set at 80%.

6. Provide an individual control power transformer with two primary and one

secondary control fuses for each motor controller. The other secondary lead shall be grounded. Secondary voltage shall be 230V AC.

7. Provide each motor controller with three phase, ambient temperature

compensating, thermal overload relays with heaters. Overload relays shall have be adjustable from 90% to 110% of heater rating, factory set at 100%. Provide an insulated pushbutton on the outside of door to reset overload relays.

8. Provide each motor controller with a Hand-Off-Automatic (HOA) selector

switch. Provide a Hand-Automatic (HA) selector switch for life safety equipment. Mount switch on outside of door.

9. Provide each motor controller with 2 normally open and 2 normally closed

auxiliary contacts long life (50,000 hours) pilot indicators on outside of door, auxiliary relays, and other devices required for operation of the equipment to be controlled.

10. Provide transformer type indicating lights in from cover (Lens color(s) red-

stop, green run) and push to test type indicating lights.

2.3 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS

A. General

1. Provide motor control centers, completely factory-assembled and tested, metal-enclosed, free-standing, dead-front equipment, with the following general ratings and construction designations.

a. Voltage: 380/220V as indicated, 3 phase, 4-wire, 60 hertz except as

otherwise noted.

b. Minimum bus short circuit rating: as indicated in the drawing.

c. Motor Controllers: Combination magnetic type with circuit breaker switches.

d. Feeder access: Top or bottom as job conditions permit.

e. Wiring: Type B, Class I, as defined by National Electrical

Manufacturers’ Association Standards.

B. Construction

1. Provide number of vertical sections and general arrangement of modular control units as outlined and as required. Provide disconnect switches or miscellaneous equipment. Each vertical section to contain no more than 6 modular units, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide motor control centers to consist of detachable vertical sections, each

reinforced, shaped, rigid, free-standing structure, with cover plate of steel or aluminium. Provide each standard section capable of mounting interchangeably with various motor controller units and designed so that control units may be readily removed or added as required. Mount entire assembly on two (2) sturdy structural steel channels, drilled for bolting to floor.




Provide each section 2300mm overall height by 500mm wide by 500mm.

a. Horizontal sections of entire assembly to contain the main horizontal bus feeding the busses of the vertical sections. Provide removable plates for access to main bus. Provide sections above or below control units constituting a continuous wiring through with screw-on covers along the entire length of the control center.

b. Provide each vertical section to be dead-front NEMA 4. Provide

vertical bus full-length and isolated from starter compartments by a full-height fiber barrier, provided with opening so designed that control units of any standard size can be removed or added as required. Provide a 100-millimeter minimum-width, full-length vertical wiring trough with cable supports on one side of each section. Provide easily removable isolating metal barriers between control units.

3. Provide a separate, formed, heavy sheet door for each control unit. Doors

secured to the vertical section frame by screw-fastened, concealed hinges and bolted door fasteners, capable of being tightened by hand or screwdriver. Door to be gasketed dust-tight all around, including disconnect operating handles and knockouts and opening for required pushbuttons, selector switches and indicating lights. Do not attach wiring to door.

4. Provide disconnect handle mounted on door of each control unit to operate

switch through adjustable linkage with clearly marked “On” and “Off” designations. Handle designed for padlocking either in “On” or “Off” position with 1 to 3 padlocks. Provide mechanical interlock to prevent opening of door when handle is in the “On” position. Interlock to be bypassable with special tool.

5. Provide each vertical section with a number of motor controllers, fused

switches, or miscellaneous equipment units. Provide each unit with components and wiring readily accessible for ease of maintenance and connected to the vertical bus by means of self-aligning connectors having free-floating spring construction so as to insure a positive silver-to-silver contact with both sides of the bus at all times. Provide stationary structure and unit supports designed to support and align the units during removal or replacement and for locking in connect or disconnect positions. Provide units of modular heights and interchangeable with other units of same size or multiple of this size.

a. Provide each modular unit capable of being secured and padlocked

from the power bus, to facilitate inspection and maintenance.

6. Provide control center with facilities for future field installation of motor controller units without requiring modification of the bus structures.

7. Thoroughly clean interior and exterior of entire assembly, including pullbox,

after fabrication and give it a rust-inhibiting primer coat followed by finish coats of medium-light gray air-drying lacquer or baked enamel.

8. Provide control center completely assembled and connected at factory and

then given operating and high potential test in accordance with American Institute of Electrical Engineers and National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association Standard. Provide entire assembly suitably reinforced for shipping and provided with bolted-on lifting irons at the top. Ship control center as a single assembly unless entry conditions or handling facilities at a point of installation require division into smaller sections.




9. Provide factory wired terminal strips for all required field connections at top of each vertical section.

C. Buswork

1. Horizontal bus sized as indicated, but not less than 600 amperes. Provide bus supports of high-quality insulators with high dielectric strength low moisture absorption, and high impact strength, so arranged and secured to bus as to provide the required short-circuit bracing and integrated equipment rating.

2. Bus bars shall be arranged throughout A-B-C left to right, top to bottom and

front to rear. Where special circuiting precludes this arrangement has accepted by the Architects/Engineers bus bars shall be permanently labelled.

3. Conductor material shall be plated copper.

4. Bus shall be sized at 155 centimeter but in no case less that of sufficient

cross section to limit temperature rise to 55 degrees Celcius above an ambient temperature of 40 degrees Celcius.

5. Horizontal bus shall be full size, tapered bus is not permitted. Provide bolt

holes drilled and tapped for future expansion at the end of horizontal bus bars including neutral and ground bus. The provisions shall include bus bars installed and extended to the extreme side of the section and be fabricated in such a fashion that the addition of a future section would require only the installation of standard bolted splice plates.

D. Grounding

1. Provide a ground of 33 percent of phase bus capacity throughout the length of the control center with grounding lugs for equipment grounding.

E. Motor Controllers

1. Provide motor controller unit of the combination type with circuit breaker switches and magnetic starter, complete with auxiliary equipment, including selector switches, pushbuttons, indicating lights, auxiliary contacts, and all other devices required for satisfactory operation of the equipment to be controlled.

a. Starter short-circuit current-interrupting rating to be not less than

65,000 amperes symmetrical at 240 volts.

b. Provide standard magnetic type starter 3 properly sized overload heaters for 3-phase motors, manual reset overload pushbutton, and a minimum of 2 auxiliary contacts arranged in the normally closed position. Provide each starter with a long-life green pilot light and a HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC selector switch. Provide necessary interlocks and remote terminals for both local and remote connections indicated for the electrical or mechanical work. Coordinate requirements with BMS and Fire Alarm System and other required systems.

c. Provide starter operating coil with voltage of 120 volts. Provide a two-

winding control circuit transformer for each starter unit of sufficient capacity to supply the inrush and continuous volt-amperes required by the starter coil and other devices in the control circuit. Capacity of transformers shall be a minimum of 150VA over standard by size of




motor starter. Furnish a dual element fuse in each line of the primary circuit of the control transformer. Required fuse size engraved on fuse block or adjacent thereto.

2.4 CONTROLLER OVER CURRENT PROTECTION AND DISCONNECTION MEANS FOR COMBINATION

STARTER

A. Motor Circuit Protector: A motor short circuit protector shall be permitted in lieu of devices as listed in PEC Part 1 Table 6.6.12.6. Motor short circuit protector is part of a PS or UL listed combination controller having both motor over load protection and short circuit & protection in each conductor and if it will operate at not more than 13 times of full load motor current. Provide interlock to prevent opening front cover with motor circuit protector in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position, where required to achieve specified short-circuit rating, provide a current-limiter attachment.

B. Molded-Case Thermal/Magnetic Circuit Breakers: circuit breakers with integral

thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Provide interlock to prevent opening front cover with circuit breaker in ON position defeatable with screw driver. Handle lockable in OFF position. Interrupting rating shall be as indicated in the drawings. Where required to achieve specified short-circuit rating, provide a current-limiter attachment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION AND WIRING A. Provide conduit and wiring materials and methods in strict accordance with Division

16 requirements.

B. Provide motors, starters, contactors, disconnect switches and control devices for Division 15 work.

C. Provide all power wiring from load side of starters and contactors required for Division

15 work.

D. Sizing for starters and wiring shall meet requirements of the Electrical Code.

E. Provide control wiring for all equipment provided or supplied under Division 15.

F. Provide control wiring between kitchen exhaust hood control box and exhaust fan starter.

G. Connections to motors shall be made in flexible seal-tight conduit, and with sufficient

material to reduce vibration transmission and to allow full travel of motor for belt adjustment.

H. Install wiring materials parallel to or perpendicular to building planes.

I. Refer to Division 16, for all line side power wiring to loose starters, MCCs and

Contactors.

J. Refer to Division 16, for normal and emergency power service locations. Provide power wiring for electrical tracing, controls and elsewhere where required.

K. Power wiring and control wiring connected to life safety equipment shall utilize fire

rated cable. (Wiring located in room where equipment is located shall not be fire rated.)




3.2 WARNING NOTICES A. Place warning notices at each starter and on or close to each motor under BMS

control.

B. Provide conspicuous notices with bold lettering and advising that the motor is under BMS control and may start at any time without warning. Submit notices at the shop drawing stage for Consultant review.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Control SECTION 15071

MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC. S:\admin\mpi\MP1716_Baguio General Hospital and Medical Trauma Center\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2018-04-06_100% DD\01-MECHANICAL\15071-Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Control.doc

PART 1 - GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................................................... 1 1.2 RELATED WORK ..................................................................................................................................... 1 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................................................. 1 1.4 SUBMITTALS ............................................................................................................................................ 2 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS ................................................................................................................... 3

PART 2 – PRODUCTS ....................................................................................................................................... 4

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................................................... 4 2.2 SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT ........................................................................ 4 2.3 VIBRATION ISOLATORS ........................................................................................................................... 4 2.4 BASES ..................................................................................................................................................... 6 2.5 SOUND ATTENUATING UNITS ................................................................................................................. 7 2.6 ACOUSTICAL ENCLOSURES IN MECHANICAL ROOMS ............................................................................ 7 2.7 VERTICAL RISER SUPPORT SYSTEM ...................................................................................................... 7

PART 3 - EXECUTION ....................................................................................................................................... 7

3.1 INSTALLATION ......................................................................................................................................... 7 3.2 ADJUSTING .............................................................................................................................................. 8


MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC. Page 1 of 10 S:\admin\mpi\MP1716_Baguio General Hospital and Medical Trauma Center\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2018-04-06_100% DD\01-MECHANICAL\15071-Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Control.doc

SECTION 15071 MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

Noise criteria, seismic restraints for equipment, vibration tolerance and vibration isolation for HVAC Works.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 15050- Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.

B. Section 15815- Metal Ducts and Accessories. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Refer to article, QUALITY ASSURANCE in specification Section 15050. B. Noise Criteria:

1. Noise levels in all 8 octave bands due to equipment and duct systems shall not exceed following NC levels:

TYPE OF SPACE NC CRITERIA (NC) LEVEL

General office space in excess of 5 meters from the core mechanical rooms

35

Offices within 5.0 meters of the core

40

Lobbies, Corridors, Halls 45

Service Spaces, Parking Garages 45-50

2. After systems have been balanced, take sound measurements throughout

the complete range of audible frequencies from 63 Hz through 8000 Hz, in each occupied area above, below and beside each Mechanical Equipment Room and where directed. Plot readings on noise criteria NC curves.

3. Modify, as required and at no additional cost to the Owner, the fan

distribution and other mechanical systems to achieve the specified noise criteria.

4. Submit a report, including sound curves, to substantiate that equipment has

been isolated adequately, and that acceptable noise levels have been attained. Provide a list to indicate equipment in operation at time of readings taken. Certify report by Professional Engineer.

5. Make sound measurements in accordance with the American Standard

Method for the Physical Measurement of Sound, ANSI S1.2.

6. Sound measuring equipment shall be Type 2 Class I in accordance with ANSI Standards S1.4 or S1.11.

http://www.va.gov/facmgt/standard/spec/15050.doc




7. For equipment which has no sound power ratings scheduled on the plans, the contractor shall select equipment such that the foregoing noise criteria, local ordinance noise levels, and OSHA requirements are not exceeded. Selection procedure shall be in accordance with ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook 2001, Chapter 7, Sound and Vibration.

8. An allowance, not to exceed 5db, may be added to the measured value to

compensate for the variation of the room attenuating effect between room test condition prior to occupancy and design condition after occupancy which may include the addition of sound absorbing material, such as, furniture. This allowance may not be taken after occupancy. The room attenuating effect is defined as the difference between sound power level emitted to room and sound pressure level in room.

9. In absence of specified measurement requirements, measure equipment

noise levels three feet from equipment and at an elevation of maximum noise generation.

C. Seismic Restraint Requirements:

1. Equipment:

a. All mechanical equipment not supported with isolators external to the unit shall be securely anchored to the structure. Such mechanical equipment shall be properly supported to resist a horizontal force of 50 percent of the weight of the equipment furnished.

b. All mechanical equipment mounted on vibration isolators shall be

provided with seismic restraints capable of resisting a horizontal force of 100 percent of the weight of the equipment furnished.

2. Piping: Refer to specification Section 15050. 3. Ductwork: Refer to specification Section 15815.

D. Allowable Vibration Tolerances for Rotating, Non-reciprocating Equipment: Not to

exceed a self-excited vibration maximum velocity of 5 mm per second (0.20 inch per second) RMS, filter in, when measured with a vibration meter on bearing caps of machine in vertical, horizontal and axial directions or measured at equipment mounting feet if bearings are concealed. Measurements for internally isolated fans and motors may be made at the mounting feet.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:

1. Vibration isolators:

a. Floor mountings b. Hangers c. Snubbers d. Thrust restraints

2. Bases. 3. Seismic restraint provisions and bolting. 4. Acoustical enclosures.




B. Isolator manufacturer shall furnish with submittal load calculations for selection of isolators, including supplemental bases, based on lowest operating speed of equipment supported.

C. Seismic Requirements: Submittals are required for all equipment anchors, supports and seismic restraints. Submittals shall include weights, dimensions, standard connections, and manufacturer's certification that all specified equipment will withstand seismic Lateral Force requirements as shown on the documents.

D. In conjunction with vibration isolator supplier/manufacturer, the Contractor shall

submit official certification on vibration – free installation. E. For equipment and material submittals, provide certificate of origin to be included in



The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. A. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.

(ASHRAE):

ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook 2001 - Sound and Vibration, Chapter 7 B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

A123/A123M - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on major Iron and Steel Components (except spring elements).

A884/A884M-02 - Epoxy Coating on spring elements and other Iron

and Steel components. A325 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile

Strength D2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property -

Durometer Hardness A216 - Carbon Cast Steel top cup and bottom cup.

C. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): 29 CFR 1910 - Guidelines for Noise Enforcement, Appendix A, 1983



PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Type of isolator, base, and minimum static deflection shall be as required for each specific equipment application as recommended by isolator or equipment manufacturer but subject to minimum requirements indicated herein and in the schedule on the drawings.

B. Elastometric Isolators shall comply with ASTM D2240 and be oil resistant neoprene

with a maximum stiffness of 60 durometer and have a straight-line deflection curve. C. Exposure to weather: Isolators, excluding springs, exposed to weather shall be hot

dip galvanized after fabrication. Hot-dip zinc coating shall not be less than 609 grams per square meter (two ounces per square foot) by weight complying with ASTM A123 or Epoxy Coating complying with ASTM A884/A884M-02.In addition provide limit stops to resist wind velocity. Comply with the design wind velocity of 125 mph (200 kmph).

D. Uniform Loading: Select and locate isolators to produce uniform loading and

deflection even when equipment weight is not evenly distributed. E. Color code isolators by type and size for easy identification of capacity.

2.2 SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT

A. Bolt pad mounted equipment, without vibration isolators, to the floor or other support using ASTM A307 standard bolting, material or equal.

B. Floor mounted equipment, with vibration Isolators: Type SS. Where Type N isolators

are used provide channel frame base horizontal restraints bolted to the floor, or other support, on all sides of the equipment Size and material required for the base shall be as recommended by the isolator manufacturer.

C. On all sided of suspended equipment, provide bracing for rigid supports and provide

restraints for resiliently supported equipment. The slack cable restraint method, Mason Industries, or equal, is acceptable.

2.3 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Floor Mountings:

1. Double Deflection Neoprene: Shall include neoprene covered steel support plated (top and bottom), friction pads, and necessary bolt holes.

Type: “Mason” SLFH, “VCS” NM or equal 2. Captive Spring Mount for Seismic Restraint:

a. Design mounts to resiliently resist seismic forces in all directions. Snubbing shall take place in all modes with adjustment to limit upward, downward, and horizontal travel to a maximum of 6 mm (1/4-inch) before contacting snubbers. Mountings shall have a minimum rating of one G coefficient of gravity as calculated and certified by a registered structural engineer.



b. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50 percent of the rated deflection. Mountings shall have ports for spring inspection. Provide an all directional neoprene cushion collar around the equipment bolt.

Type: “Mason” SSLFH, “VCS” SM or equal

3. Spring Isolators with Vertical Limit Stops: Similar to spring isolators noted above, except include a vertical limit stop to limit upward travel if weight is removed and also to reduce movement and spring extension due to wind loads. Provide clearance around restraining bolts to prevent mechanical short circuiting. Isolators shall have a minimum seismic rating of one G.

Type: “Mason” SLR, SLRS, “VCS” FSR or equal 4. Seismic Pad: Pads shall be felt, cork neoprene waffle, neoprene and cork

sandwich, neoprene and fiberglass, neoprene and steel waffle, or reinforced duck and neoprene, with steel top plate and drilled for an anchor bolt. Washers and bushings shall be reinforced duck and neoprene. Size pads for a maximum load of 345 kPa (50 pounds per square inch).

Type “Mason” Super W, Mini Super W, “VCS” HE or equal

B. Hangers: Shall be combination neoprene and springs unless otherwise noted and shall allow for expansion of pipe.

1. Combination Neoprene and Spring: Vibration hanger shall contain a spring

and double deflection neoprene element in series. Spring shall have a diameter not less than 0.8 of compressed operating spring height. Spring shall have a minimum additional travel of 50 percent between design height and solid height. Spring shall permit a 15 degree angular misalignment without rubbing on hanger box.

Type: “Mason” 30N, “VCS” HE or equal 2. Spring Position Hanger: Similar to combination neoprene and spring hanger

except hanger shall hold piping at a fixed elevation during installation and include a secondary adjustment feature to transfer load to spring while maintaining same position.

Type: “Mason” PC30N, “VCS” HPE or equal 3. Neoprene: Vibration hanger shall contain a double deflection type neoprene

isolation element. Hanger rod shall be separated from contact with hanger bracket by a neoprene grommet.

Type: “Mason” HD, “VCS” H1-3 or equal 4. Spring: Vibration hanger shall contain a coiled steel spring in series with a

neoprene grommet. Spring shall have a diameter not less than 0.8 of compressed operating spring height. Spring shall have a minimum additional travel of 50 percent between design height and solid height. Spring shall permit a 15 degree angular misalignment without rubbing on hanger box.

Type: “Mason” 30, “VCS” H or equal



5. The first four (4) Hanger supports from the vibrating equipment for piping 5 mm (2 inches) and larger shall have a pointer and scale deflection indicator.

Type: “Mason” PC30N or equal

C. Snubbers: Each spring mounted base shall have a minimum of four all-directional or

eight two directional (two per side) seismic snubbers that are double acting. Elastomeric materials shall be shock absorbent neoprene bridge quality bearing pads, maximum 60 durometer, replaceable and have a minimum thickness of 6 mm (1/4 inch). Air gap between hard and resilient material shall be not less than 3 mm (1/8 inch) nor more than 6 mm (1/4 inch). Restraints shall be capable of withstanding design load without permanent deformation.

Type: “Mason” Z-1011, Z-1225 or equal D. Thrust Restraints: Restraints shall provide a spring element contained in a steel

frame with neoprene pads at each end attachment. Restraints shall have factory preset thrust and be field adjustable to allow a maximum movement of 6 mm (1/4 inch) when the fan starts and stops. Restraint assemblies shall include rods, angle brackets and other hardware for field installation.

Type: “Mason” WBI, WBD, or equal

2.4 BASES

A. Rails: Design rails with isolator brackets to reduce mounting height of equipment and cradle machines having legs or bases that do not require a complete supplementary base. To assure adequate stiffness, height of members shall be a minimum of 1/12 of longest base dimension but not less than 100 mm (4 inches). Where rails are used with neoprene mounts for small fans or close coupled pumps, extend rails to compensate overhang of housing.

Type: “Mason” ICS Rails, or equal

B. Integral Structural Steel Base: Design base with isolator brackets to reduce mounting

height of equipment which require a complete supplementary rigid base. To assure adequate stiffness, height of members shall be a minimum of 1/12 of longest base dimension, but not less than 100 mm (four inches).

Type: “Mason” WFSL or equal C. Inertia Base: Base shall be a reinforced concrete inertia base. Pour concrete into a

welded steel channel frame, incorporating pre-located equipment anchor bolts and pipe sleeves. Level the concrete to provide a smooth uniform bearing surface for equipment mounting. Provide grout under uneven supports. Channel depth shall be a minimum of 1/12 of longest dimension of base but not less than 150 mm (six inches). Form shall include 13-mm (1/2-inch) reinforcing bars welded in place on minimum of 203 mm (eight inch) centers running both ways in a layer 40 mm (1-1/2 inches) above bottom. Use height saving brackets in all mounting locations. Weight of inertia base shall be equal to or greater than weight of equipment supported to provide a maximum peak-to-peak displacement of 2 mm (1/16 inch).

Type: “Mason” BMK or equal D. Curb Mounted Isolation Base: Fabricate from aluminum to fit on top of standard curb

with overlap to allow water run-off and have wind and water seals which shall not interfere with spring action. Provide resilient snubbers with 6 mm (1/4 inch) clearance for wind resistance. Top and bottom bearing surfaces shall have sponge type weather



seals. Integral spring isolators shall comply with Spring Isolator (Type S) requirements.

Type: “Mason” CMAB or equal

2.5 SOUND ATTENUATING UNITS

Refer to specification Section 15815.

2.6 ACOUSTICAL ENCLOSURES IN MECHANICAL ROOMS

Provide if necessary to meet the required NC criteria at no additional cost to the Owner. Enclosures shall be removable and sectional, of a size and weight that sections can be readily handled with typical lifting and moving equipment available in the equipment room. Enclosures must contain access openings, observation ports, lights, and ventilation where required for normal operation, observation and servicing.

2.7 VERTICAL RISER SUPPORT SYSTEM

All vertical risers subjected to thermal expansion and/or contraction shall be supported by

spring isolators and central anchors designed to insure loading within design limits at structural support points. The riser design must be prepared and submitted for approval by the same isolation vendor supplying the HVAC mechanical equipment isolation and must include the initial load, initial deflection, change in deflection, final load and change in load at all spring support locations. In order to minimize load changes, the initial spring deflection must be at least 4 times the thermal movement. The submittal must also include anchor loads when installed, cold filled, and at operating temperature. Include calculated pipe stress at end conditions and branch off locations as well as installation instruction. The submittal must be stamped and signed by a licensed professional engineer in the employ of the vibration vendor for at least five years.

Proper provision shall be made for seismic protection in seismic zones. The support spring mounts shall be Type SLF, anchors Type ADA, telescoping guides Type

VSG, all as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. The isolation vendor shall provide and design all brackets at riser spring and anchor locations

where standard clamps lack capacity or do not fit. The contractor must install and adjust all isolators under the supervision of the designing isolation vendor or his representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Vibration Isolation:

1. No metal-to-metal contact will be permitted between fixed and floating parts. 2. Connections to Equipment: Allow for deflections equal to or greater than

equipment deflections. Electrical, drain, piping connections, and other items made to rotating or reciprocating equipment (pumps, compressors, etc.) which rests on vibration isolators, shall be isolated from building structure for first three hangers or supports.

3. Common Foundation: Mount each electric motor on same foundation as

driven machine. Hold driving motor and driven machine in positive rigid alignment with provision for adjusting motor alignment and belt tension.



Bases shall be level throughout length and width. Provide shims to facilitate pipe connections, leveling, and bolting.

4. Provide heat shields where elastomers are subject to temperatures over 38

degrees C (l00 degrees F).

5. Extend bases for pipe elbow supports at discharge and suction connections at pumps. Pipe elbow supports shall not short circuit pump vibration to structure.

6. Non-rotating equipment such as heat exchangers and convertors shall be

mounted on isolation units having the same static deflection as the isolation hangers or support of the pipe connected to the equipment.

B. Inspection and Adjustments: Check for vibration and noise transmission through

connections, piping, ductwork, foundations, and walls. Adjust, repair, or replace isolators as required to reduce vibration and noise transmissions to specified levels.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust vibration isolators after piping systems are filled and equipment is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal

operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.

C. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4inch (6-mm)

movement during start and stop. D. Adjust active height of spring isolators. E. Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's recommendations. F. Adjust seismic restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode

of operation. G. Torque anchor bolts according to equipment manufacturer's recommendations to

resist seismic forces.



SELECTION GUIDE FOR VIBRATION ISOLATORS

50FT FLOOR SPAN

EQUIPMENT BASE TYPE

ISOL TYPE

MIN DEFL

REFRIGERATION MACHINE

ABSORPTION --- SP 2”

PACKAGED HERMETIC

R SP 2.5

OPEN CENTRIFUGAL

B SP 3.5

ROTARY-SCREW --- N 0.40

RECIPROCATING

500 - 750 RPM R SP 3.5

751 RPM & OVER R SP 2.5

COMPRESSORS AND VACUUM PUMPS

UP THROUGH 1-1/2 HP

--- D,L,W ---

2 HP AND OVER

500 - 750 RPM --- S 2.5

750 RPM & OVER --- S 2.5

PUMPS

CLOSE COUPLED

UP TO 1-/2 HP

--- D,L,W

---

BASE MOUNTED

2 HP & OVER

I S 2”

I S 2”

I S 2”

I S 2.5

ROOF VENTILATORS



ABOVE OCCUPIED AREAS:

5 HP & OVER CB S 1.0

CENTRIFUGAL BLOWERS

UP TO 50 HP

UP TO 200 RPM B S 3.5

201 - 300 RPM B S 3.5

301 - 500 RPM B S 3.5

501 RPM & OVER B S 2.5

60 HP & OVER

UP TO 300 RPM I S 3.5

301 - 500 RPM I S 3.5

501 RPM & OVER I S 2.5

COOLING TOWERS UP TO 500 RPM --- SP 3.5

501 RPM & OVER --- SP 2.5

INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES

UP TO 25 HP I S 2.5

30 THRU 100 HP I S 3.5

125 HP & OVER I S 4.5

AIR HANDLING UNIT PACKAGES

SUSPENDED

UP THRU 5 HP --- H 2”

7-1/2 HP & OVER

UP TO 500 RPM --- H,THR

2”

501 RPM & OVER --- H,THR

2”

FLOOR MOUNTED:

UP THRU 5 HP --- S 2”

7-1/2 HP & OVER

UP TO 500 RPM R S,THR 2”

501 RPM & OVER R S,THR 2”

IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL AND VANE AXIAL FANS, FLOOR MOUNTED: (APR9)

UP THRU 50 HP:

UP TO 300 RPM R S 3.5

301 - 500 RPM R S 2.5

501 - & OVER R S 2.5

60 HP AND OVER

301 - 500 RPM R S 3.5

501 RPM & OVER R S 2.5

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Variable Speed Drives SECTION 15075


Variable Speed Drives.doc

PART 1 - GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 WORK INCLUDED .................................................................................................................................... 1 1.2 RELATED WORK ..................................................................................................................................... 1 1.3 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS .................................................................................................................... 1 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS ..................................................................................................................................... 1

PART 2 – PRODUCTS ....................................................................................................................................... 2

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................................................... 2 2.2 VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES (VSD) ........................................................................................................... 2 2.3 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION ..................................................................................................................... 4

PART 3 – EXECUTION....................................................................................................................................... 4

3.1 INSTALLATION.......................................................................................................................................... 4




SECTION 15075

VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Comply with Division 1, General Requirements and all documents referred to therein.

B. Provide all labour, materials, products, equipment and services to supply and install variable speed drives and motors, as indicated on the Drawings and specified in this Section of the Specifications.

1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 15055 – Motors, Starters, Control Centers and Wiring.

B. Section 15900 – HVAC Instrumentation and Controls.


The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are reference in the text by basic designation only:

A. FCC Part 15, Class A

B. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):

IEEE Standard 519

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Use only products which have been successfully used on other projects in similar HVAC applications and for which there are local parts and service.

B. Provide variable speed drives from suppliers who have been established locally for at

least five years. C. The manufacturer of variable speed drives should demonstrate a continuous period of

manufacture and development for at least 15 years. The variable speed drives should be supported locally in the Philippines by the manufacturer who shall provide full technical support.




PART 2 – PRODUCTS


A. Provide variable torque variable speed drives capable of driving a standard AC induction motor.

B. Provide variable speed drives as shown in the equipment schedules on the Drawings. C. The variable speed drive should not be a general purpose product. It must be a

dedicated HVAC drive with pump and fan characteristics in program.

2.2 VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES (VSD)

A. Provide VSDs to convert three phase, 60 Hz, 380 or 460 volt (refer to equipment schedule) utility power to an adjustable voltage and frequency, 3 phase power for stepless motor speed. The VSD must be designed with rectifiers in the input circuit which converts the incoming AC voltage to DC voltage. The DC voltage will be converted to AC voltage with insulated bipolar transistors (IGBTs) in the output circuit.

B. Provide VSDs with Voltage Vector Control (VVC) output, all solid state. No motor

derating is allowed. For pulse width modulated output, provide output LRC filters designed for 100 meters of output cable length.

C. Provide IP54 (NEMA 4) enclosures for each variable speed drive for protection

against dust, splashing water and moisture. D. Provide VSDs with built-in DC link filters to reduce harmonic distortion on the main

supply. The 5th harmonic must be reduced to 35% or below in accordance with IEEE Standard 519-1992. No external reactors are allowed.

E. Provide VSDs capable of accepting 380 or 460 volt (refer to equipment schedule), 3

phase line voltage at the input terminals and capable of operating within rated input voltage of +\- 10% at 60 Hz.

F. Provide current limiting feature that will protect the electronics upon sensing excessive

currents by shutting the drive down. Maximum motor current must be limited to 110% of rated motor current to prevent motor damage.

G. Provide local or remote mode selection to enable remote speed control or local speed

control, programmable in the VSD through manual pre-setting.

H. Provide manual speed control through the full speed range located on the outside front display of the VSD.

I. Provide VSDs with speed control input for 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 20 VDC, 2 to 10 mA or 4 to

20 mA.

J. Provide adjustments for maximum and minimum speeds, acceleration and deceleration times. Automatic adjustment of the ramp time, to prevent motor from tripping, must be incorporated in the VSD. In case of power loss, the VSD must go into an orderly, pre-programmed deceleration. Upon resumption of power, the VSD must go into an orderly, pre-programmed automatic restart sequence and provide for motor soft start.

K. Provide VSDs rated to operate at maximum loads in ambient temperatures of 10 deg C to 40 deg C and ambient humidity range of 20 to 95% RH, non-condensing.




L. Design VSDs to suppress all electrical and radio interference. Ensure that

interference, caused by switching, commutation, or pulse generation, does not affect sound, communication, video, radio or telephone systems, or any other control equipment in or adjacent to building. Keep external electrical and magnetic fields of VSD to minimum level that will not cause interaction with microphones, magnetic device replay heads, audio or radio frequency loops, computers or any other apparatus likely to be used in vicinity. Ensure that VSD is protected from unexpected service failure or normal levels of service-borne interference caused by others. The VSD shall comply with FCC Part 15, Class A.

M. Provide short circuit protection for the VSD. The VSD must not be damaged if a short

circuit at the output phase to phase or phase to ground occurs. The VSD must be protected against transients on the mains.

N. Provide VSDs with a minimum line side power factor of 0.95 over the entire speed

range.

O. Provide VSDs with built-in as standard, galvanic isolation to protect connected PLCs or BMS against damage.

P. Provide VSDs that model the motor in its software to predict motor overheating

without the use of thermistors in the motor. If overheat is predicted, an alarm or automatic shutdown shall be initiated.

Q. Provide VSDs that incorporate a run permissive function, which will export a “run

permissive standby” signal to a digital output, when a start signal is applied to the VSD.

R. Provide VSDs which can catch a rotating motor operating forward or reverse up to full

speed without requiring fan or pump motor to stop and prevent nuisance tripping.

S. In case of AC mains failure and voltage drops, the VSD must be able to reset automatically when the voltage normalizes.

T. Provide VSDs with built-in PID controller to maintain constant pressure or flow for

closed loop control or remote position. Two set point PID process controller should be able to accept at least two sensor feedback with minimum, maximum, sum, difference, or average calculations. Response to the set point/feedback differences must be programmable in process units.

U. Provide VSDs with Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) to optimize motor

performance, improve start capabilities and compensate for motor cable variances. AMA should be carried out at motor standstill with no need for detaching the load from the motor.

V. Provide VSDs with automatic energy optimization feature to reduce voltages when the

motor is lightly loaded and minimize the motor’s energy consumption. The remote position, a sleep mode should be carried out when the motor’ load is minimal and the motor should automatically restart when the theoretical output frequency exceeds the preset minimum value.

W. If one of the input phases is missing or if there is critically high mains imbalance, the

VSD must be able to reduce the output power to maintain operation at reduced speed. X. Provide VSDs with display on the front to indicate status for power, running or fault

including operating speed indication, in percentage of full speed. Provision for logging and display of the total energy consumption in KWH must be available.




Y. In case of alarm or warning, a clear message must be indicated with clear

alphanumeric text on the display of the VSD.

Z. Provide VSDs with open protocol serial communication capability with the BMS in Section 15900 through the use of RS-485 or RS-232 port. Provide the necessary hardware and software for this communication. Liase with BMS vendor to ensure full communication including run/stop control, speed set adjustment, drive status, warning/fault status and diagnostics and drive by pass status at a minimum.

2.3 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

1. With the Local/Remote mode selection in the Local position, power shall be applied to the VSD to provide a soft motor start and acceleration to the speed set on the manual control.

2. With the Local/Remote mode selection in the Remote position, stop and start of the

VSD will be controlled by the BMS or sensors sending a corresponding feedback signal wired to the appropriate VSD terminal. Drive speed will be controlled by the speed control input signal.


3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Meet manufacturer’s installation instructions.

B. Field wiring of automatic controls shall be provided by the Controls Contractor.

C. Provide a disconnect switch at the motor where required by the authorities having jurisdiction. Where such a switch is installed, provide an auxiliary contact or switch at the disconnect, mounted to open when the disconnect switch is opened and wired to the VSD terminal such that opening the disconnect switch initiates a drive shut down and prevents the drive from starting in either Line or Drives positions.

D. Locate and mount VSD panels in Mechanical Rooms or where shown on the

Drawings.

E. Arrange for the manufacturer’s technical representative or local representative, if qualified, to inspect the installation of each drive and to commission operation with startup and testing procedures. Arrange for the controls Contractor to provide coordination of control sequences for start-up and testing.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Mechanical Insulation SECTION 15080

MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC. S:\admin\mpi\MP1716_Baguio General Hospital and Medical Trauma Center\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2018-04-06_100% DD\01-MECHANICAL\15080-Mechanical Insulation.doc

PART 1 – GENERAL .............................................................................................................................. 1

1.1 DESCRIPTION .............................................................................................................................. 1 1.2 RELATED WORK .......................................................................................................................... 2 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................................................. 2 1.4 SUBMITTALS ............................................................................................................................... 4 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS ......................................................................................................... 4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................ 6

2.1 INSULATION FACINGS AND JACKETS ............................................................................................. 6 2.2 FLEXIBLE CLOSED CELL ELASTOMERIC RUBBER INSULATION (BASE OFFER FOR DUCTWORK) ........ 7 2.3 CLOSED-CELL POLYOLEFIN FOAM INSULATION (ALTERNATIVE OFFER FOR DUCTWORK) ................. 8 2.4 MINERAL FIBER INSULATION (ALTERNATIVE OFFER FOR DUCTWORK) ............................................ 8 2.5 FLEXIBLE CLOSED CELL ELASTOMERIC RUBBER INSULATION ........................................................ 9 2.6 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION (UNDER GENSET PACKAGE) ....................................................... 10 2.7 DUCT WRAP FOR KITCHEN HOOD GREASE DUCTS ..................................................................... 10 2.8 INSULATION ACCESSORY MATERIALS ......................................................................................... 10

PART 3 – EXECUTION ........................................................................................................................ 12

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................................... 12 3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION ......................................................................................................... 12


MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC. Page 1 of 14 S:\admin\mpi\MP1716_Baguio General Hospital and Medical Trauma Center\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2018-04-06_100% DD\01-MECHANICAL\15080-Mechanical Insulation.doc

SECTION 15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Field applied insulation for thermal efficiency and condensation control for

1. HVAC piping, ductwork and equipment.

2. Boiler plant mechanical systems are not included.

B. Definitions

1. ASJ: All service jacket, white finish facing or jacket.

2. Air conditioned space: Space directly supplied with heated or cooled air.

3. Cold: Equipment, ductwork or piping handling media at design temperature of 16 degrees C (60 degrees F) or below.

4. Concealed: Ductwork and piping above ceilings and in chases, interstitial space, and pipe spaces.

5. Exposed: Piping, ductwork, and equipment exposed to view in finished areas including mechanical, Boiler Plant and electrical equipment rooms or exposed to outdoor weather. Attics and crawl spaces where air handling units are located are considered to be mechanical rooms. Shafts, chases, interstitial spaces, unfinished attics, crawl spaces and pipe basements are not considered finished areas.

6. FSK: Foil-scrim-kraft facing.

7. Hot: HVAC Ductwork handling air at design temperature above 16 degrees C (60 degrees F);HVAC and plumbing equipment or piping handling media above 41 degrees C (105 degrees F); Boiler Plant breechings and stack temperature range 150-370 degrees C(300-700 degrees F) and piping media and equipment 32 to 230 degrees C(90 to 450 degrees F)

8. Density: Kcm - kilograms per cubic meter (Pcf - pounds per cubic foot).

9. Runouts: Branch pipe connections up to 25-mm (one-inch) nominal size to fan coil units or reheat coils for terminal units.

10. Thermal conductance: Heat flow rate through materials.

a. Flat surface: Watt per square meter (BTU per hour per square foot).

b. Pipe or Cylinder: Watt per square meter (BTU per hour per linear foot).

11. Thermal Conductivity (k): Watt per meter, per degree C (BTU per inch thickness, per hour, per square foot, per degree F temperature difference).

12. CH: Chilled water supply.

13. CHR: Chilled water return.

14. RS: Refrigerant suction.



1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01340 - Sample and Shop Drawings

B. Section 07841 – Through penetration Firestopping Systems

C. Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods


A. Refer to article QUALITY ASSURANCE, in Section 15010.

B. Criteria:

1. Comply with NFPA 90A, particularly paragraphs 2-3.3.1 through 2-3.3.5; 2-3.10.2(a); and 3-4.6.4, parts of which are quoted as follows:

a. 2-3.3.1 Pipe insulation and coverings, duct coverings, duct linings, vapor retarder facings, adhesive, fasteners, tapes and supplementary materials added to air ducts, plenums, panels and duct silencers used in duct systems shall have, in the form in which they are used, a maximum flame spread index of 25 without evidence of continued progressive combustion and a maximum smoke developed index of 50. Where these products are to be applied with adhesive, they shall be tested with such adhesive applied or the adhesive used shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when in the final dry state.

b. Closure systems for use with rigid and flexible air ducts tested in accordance with UL 181, Standard for Safety Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors, shall have been tested and listed in accordance with UL 181A, Standard for Safety Closure Systems for Use with Rigid Air Ducts and Air Connectors, or UL 181B, Standard for Safety Closure Systems for Use with Flexible Air Ducts and Air Connectors, and used in accordance with the conditions of their listings.

Exception No. 1: This requirement shall not apply to air duct weatherproof coverings where they are located entirely outside of a building, do not penetrate a wall or roof, and do not create an exposure hazard.

Exception No. 2: Smoke detectors required by 4-4.2.

c. 2-3.3.2 Air duct, panel and plenum coverings and linings and pipe insulation and coverings shall not flame, glow, smolder, or smoke when tested in accordance with a similar test for pipe coverings; ASTM C 411, Standard Test Method for Hot-Surface Performance of High-Temperature Thermal Insulation at the temperature to which they are exposed in service. In no case shall the test temperature be below 250 degrees F (121 degrees C)

d. 2-3.3.3 Air duct coverings shall not extend through walls or floors that are required to be fire stopped or required to have a fire resistance rating.

Exception: Where such coverings meet the requirements of 3-4.6.4.

e. 2-3.3.4 Air duct linings shall be interrupted at fire dampers to prevent interference with the operation of devices.






f. 2-3.3.5 Air duct coverings shall not be installed so as to conceal or prevent the use of any service openings.

g. 2-3.10.2(a) All materials exposed to the airflow shall be noncombustible or limited combustible and have a maximum smoke developed index of 50.

h. 3-4.6.4 Where air ducts pass through walls, floors or partitions that are required to have a fire resistance rating and where fire dampers are not required, the opening in the construction around the air duct shall be as follows:

1) Not exceeding a 2.5 cm (one inch) average clearance on all sides.

2) Filled solid with an approved material capable of preventing the passage of flame and hot gases sufficient to ignite cotton waste when subjected to the time-temperature fire conditions required for fire barrier penetration as specified in NFPA 251, Standard Methods of Tests of Fire Endurance of Building Construction and Materials.

Exception: Where fire dampers are installed, proper clearance for expansion shall be maintained.

2. Test methods: ASTM E84, UL 723, or NFPA 255.

3. Specified k factors are at 24 degrees C (75 degrees F) mean temperature unless stated otherwise. Where optional thermal insulation material is used, select thickness to provide thermal conductance no greater than that for the specified material. For pipe, use insulation manufacturer's published heat flow tables. For domestic hot water supply and return, run out insulation and condensation control insulation, no thickness adjustment need be made.

4. All materials shall be compatible and suitable for service temperature, and shall not contribute to corrosion or otherwise attack surface to which applied in either the wet or dry state.

5. Listings or Certification from Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., or an equivalent third party testing laboratory will be required to show that surface burning characteristics for materials to continue to adhere to the specified ratings.

C. Every package or standard container of insulation or accessories delivered to the job site for use must have a manufacturer's stamp or label giving the name of the manufacturer and description of the material.

D. General Requirement for CHW Pipe Insulation

The Contractor shall comply with the following performance specifications relating to CHW piping system (equipment, piping, accessories):

The insulation thickness indicated in the technical specifications are the minimum thickness to be provided, regardless of whether the performance specifications specified below are being met or not.

The temperature rise due to heat gain in the piping system from the source (chiller) to the farthest AHU/FCU or any point in the piping system shall not exceed 1.11ºC (2ºF) CHW temperature from the chiller is 5.56ºC (42ºF).



The insulation thickness and also the workmanship shall be such that the CHW distribution system (equipment, piping, accessories) shall not have any condensation at any part and portion thereof, or at any worst case operating condition including that of ambient.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. All information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications and ASTM, BS, DIN, Federal and Military specifications.

a. Insulation materials: Specify each type used and state surface burning characteristics.

b. Insulation facings and jackets: Each type used. Make it clear that white finish will be furnished for exposed ductwork, casings and equipment.

c. Insulation accessory materials: Each type used. d. Manufacturer's installation and fitting fabrication instructions for

flexible unicellular insulation. e. Make reference to applicable specification paragraph numbers for

coordination. C. Samples:

1. Each type of insulation: Minimum size 100 mm (4 inches) square for board/block/ blanket; 150 mm (6 inches) long, full diameter for round types.

2. Each type of facing and jacket: Minimum size 100 mm (4 inches square). 3. Each accessory material: Minimum 120 ML (4 ounce) liquid container or 120

gram (4 ounce) dry weight for adhesives / cement / mastic. D. For equipment and material submittals, provide certificate of origin to be included in



The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only.

A. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):

HH-B-100 - (Rev. B) Barrier Material Vapor (For Pipe, Duct and Equipment Thermal, Insulation)

L-P 535 E - Plastic Sheet (Sheeting): Plastic Strip; Poly (Vinyl Chloride) and Poly (Vinyl Chloride - Vinyl Acetate), Rigid.

B. Military Specifications (Mil. Spec.):

MIL-A-3316C (2) - Adhesives, Fire-Resistant, Thermal Insulation

MIL-A-24179A - Adhesive, Flexible Unicellular-Plastic NOTICE 1 Thermal Insulation

MIL-C-19565C (1) - Coating Compounds, Thermal Insulation, Fire-and Water-Resistant, Vapor-Barrier



MIL-C-20079H - Cloth, Glass; Tape, Textile Glass; and Thread, Glass and Wire-Reinforced Glass

C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

C411 - Standard test method for Hot-Surface Performance of High-Temperature Thermal Insulation

C449 - Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement

C533 - Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation

C534 - Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form

C612 - Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation

C1126 - Faced or Unfaced Rigid Cellular Phenolic Thermal Insulation

D1171 - Ozone Resistance

D1667 - Specific Gravity

D1668-Rev.A - Glass Fabrics (Woven and Treated) for Roofing and Waterproofing

E84-Rev.A - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

E662 - Smoke Density

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

96 - Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations.

251 - Methods of Tests of Fire Endurance of Building Construction Materials.

255 - Method of Tests of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

181 - Standard for Safety Factory -Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors

181A - Standard for Safety Closure systems for use with Rigid Air Ducts and Air Connectors

181B - Standard for Safety Closure Systems for use with Flexible Air Ducts and Air Connectors

723 - UL Standard for Safety Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials with Revision of 12/98



F. British Standards

BS 476 part 7 - Ignitability and Spread of Flame; Class “1” BS 874 part 2 - Thermal Conductivity BS 4370 part 2 - Water Vapor Permeability

G. DIN Standards

DIN 52612/52613 - Thermal Conductivity DIN 52615 - Water-Vapour Diffusion Resistance Factor DIN 53434 - Water Absorption

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION FACINGS AND JACKETS

A. Fed. Spec. HH-B-100 for Vapor Barrier Type I and II: The mold and mildew test

requirement is waived.

1. Type I, low vapor transmission (0.02 perm rating), Beach puncture 50 units: Use for insulation facing on exposed ductwork, casings and equipment, and for pipe insulation jackets. Facings and jackets shall be white all service (ASJ) suitable for painting without sizing.

2. Type II, medium vapor transmission, Beach puncture 25 units: Foil-Scrim-

Kraft (FSK) type for concealed ductwork and equipment.

3. Pre-sized Glass Cloth Jacket, Beach puncture 100 units: Not less than 240 grams per square meter (7.8 ounces per square yard), with integral vapor barrier where required; for use where specified and in lieu of Type I and Type II jacket at the Contractor’s option.

4. Factory composite materials may be used provided that they have been

tested and certified by the manufacturer, and witnessed by the authority having jurisdiction to meet Beach puncture units specified above. Witnessing of the test may be waived by the authority having jurisdiction.

5. Fire and smoke treatment of jackets and facings shall be permanent. The use

of soluble treatments is not acceptable.

6. Pipe insulation jackets shall have a minimum 40 mm (1 ½ inch) lap at longitudinal joints and not less than 75 mm (3 inch) butt strips at end joints. Facing on board, blanket and block insulation shall have 50 mm (2 inch) laps or a minimum 75 mm (3 inch) butt strips. Butt strips may be self-sealing type with factory applied pressure sensitive adhesive.

7. PVC Jackets (for indoor CHW Piping): Shall be according to Fed. Spec. L-P-

535, Composition A, Type II, Grade GU. One-piece pre-molded plastic covers for fittings, flanges, and valves are limited to indoor piping only.



B. Protective Coverings Provide protective jackets over insulation as follows:

a. All piping and ducts exposed to outdoor weather. b. Piping exposed in building, within 1800 mm (6 feet) of the floor.

Jacket may be applied with pop rivets. Provide aluminum angle ring escutcheons at wall, ceiling or floor penetrations.

c. A 50 mm (2 inch) overlap is required at longitudinal and circumferential joints.

Protective coverings shall be installed on areas of insulation that are exposed to weather or subject to Mechanical damage. The protective covering shall be:

1. “Arma-Check Silver” multi-layer laminate of Aluminum, coated with a UV

protective film and backed with flexible PVC film. The material should be adhered with Armaflex 520 Adhesive or equivalent, and all joins and seams secured with “Arma-Chek Silver Tape”. Insulation shall be in all cases to the manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. High density rubber cladding of the “Arma-chek R” type bonded using an appropriate full contact adhesive with a minimum 50mm overlap at all butt joints and longitudinal seams. A weather-proof mastic sealant shall be applied over all seams and joints. All materials shall be overlapped and staggered in such a way as to ensure a watershed is always provided. Installation shall be in all cases to the manufacturer’s recommendations. All excess adhesive visible on the surface of the completed assembly shall be removed using an appropriate cleaning material.

3. Metal Protective Jacket:

a. Sheet aluminum: ASTM B209, 3003 alloy, H-14 temper, 0.4 mm

(0.016 inch) thick. Provide moisture barrier lining for service temperature 16 ºC (60 ºF) or less except where applied over a Type I or II jacket. Longitudinal lap shall be at least 50 mm (2 inches) wide. For service temperature 16 ºC (60 ºF) or less, seal all jacket laps in accordance with Mil. Spec. MIL-C-19565, Type II Coating.

b. Fitting covers: Factory fabricated from not lighter than 0.5 mm (0.020 inch) thick type 3003 sheet aluminum.

c. Bands: 20 mm (3/4 inch) wide aluminum on maximum 450 mm (18

inch) centers.

2.2 FLEXIBLE CLOSED CELL ELASTOMERIC RUBBER INSULATION (BASE OFFER FOR DUCTWORK)

A. ASTM C534, k = 0.033 Watt per meter, per degree C (0.27), flame spread not over 25, smoke developed not over 50, for temperatures from minus 4 degrees C (40 degrees F) to 93 degrees C (200 degrees F). No jacket required except those required under item 2.1 B above.

B. Insulation Thickness

1. Exposed, unlined ductwork and equipment in unfinished areas, mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, and attics containing air handling units, and ductwork exposed to outdoor weather:



a. 50 mm (2 inch) thick insulation faced with ASJ (white all service jacket): Supply air ducts exposed to ambient, unlined air handling units, and final filter housing. (40 mm (1-1/2 inch) thick for above ceilings below roof deck areas (supply and return).

b. 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) thick insulation faced with ASJ: Mixed air plenums and pre-filter housing.

c. 25mm (1 inch) thick insulation faced with ASJ: Supply and return air ducts other than the above.

d. Outside air ducts: No insulation required.

2.3 CLOSED-CELL POLYOLEFIN FOAM INSULATION (ALTERNATIVE OFFER FOR DUCTWORK)

A. Closed-cell polyolefin foam insulation may be provided for ductwork in lieu of mineral

fiber insulation. Insulation efficiency of polyolefin foam must not be less than that of the specified thickness of mineral fiber insulation, where thickness of polyolefin foam insulation is not specified.

B. Electron Beam (Physically) Crosslinked, closed cell Polyolefin foam with factory applied reinforced aluminum foil and acrylic adhesive backing, 25kg/m³ density, maximum 0.032 W/mK @ 20ºC, non-hydroscopic, water vapor permeability better than 0.8gm/m²/24hrs (90% RH, 38 ºC), -80 to 100 ºC, service temperature, Class O fire rating according to BS 476 parts 6 & 7.

1. Exposed, unlined ductwork and equipment in unfinished areas mechanical

and electrical equipment rooms and office containing air handling units, and ductwork exposed to outdoor weather:

a. 25mm (1 inch) complete with foil adhesive and aluminum foil:

Supply air ducts exposed to ambient, unlined air handling units, and final filter housing. 19mm (3/4 inch) thick for above ceiling below roof deck areas (supply and return).

b. 19mm (3/4 inch) thick complete with foil adhesive and aluminum foil in mixed air plenums and pre-filter housing and to all supply and return air ducts other than the above.

2.4 MINERAL FIBER INSULATION (ALTERNATIVE OFFER FOR DUCTWORK)

A, Note the NFPA 90A building characteristic requirements of 25/50 in paragraph 1.3.B.

Refer to paragraph 3.1 for items not to be insulated.

B. ASTM C612 (Board, Block), Class 1 or 2, K = 0.037 Watt per meter, per degree C (0.26 BTU-in/ft² hr ºF), external insulation for temperatures up to 204 ºC (400 ºF).

1. Exposed, unlined ductwork and equipment in unfinished areas, mechanical

and electrical equipment rooms, and attics containing air handling units, and ductwork exposed to outdoor weather:

a. 50 mm (2 inch) thick insulation faced with ASJ (white all service

jacket): Supply air ducts exposed to ambient, unlined air handling units, and final filter housing. (40 mm (1-1/2 inch) thick for above ceilings below roof deck areas (supply and return).

b. 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) thick insulation faced with ASJ: Mixed air plenums and pre-filter housing.

c. 25mm (1 inch) thick insulation faced with ASJ: Supply and return air ducts other than the above.

d. Outside air ducts: No insulation required.



C. Firestop Pipe and Duct Insulation:

1. Provide firestopping insulation at fire and smoke barriers through penetrations. Firestopping insulation shall be UL listed and as defined in Section 07841.

2. Pipe and duct penetrations requiring fire stop insulation including, but not

limited to the following:

a. Pipe risers through mechanical room floors. b. Pipe or duct chase walls and floors. c. Smoke partitions. d. Fire partitions.

2.5 FLEXIBLE CLOSED CELL ELASTOMERIC RUBBER INSULATION

A. ASTM C534, k = 0.033 Watt per meter, per degree C (0.27), flame spread not over 25, smoke developed not over 50, for temperatures from minus 4 degrees C (40 degrees F) to 93 degrees C (200 degrees F). No jacket required except those required under item 2.1 B above.

B. Pipe insulation: Nominal thickness in millimeters (inches are specified in table below for piping above ground:

Nominal Pipe Size millimeters (inches)

25 (1) & below) (Tube)

32-65 (1¼-2½) (Tube)

75-250 (3”-10”) (Sheet)

350 & Up (14” & up)

(Sheet)

1. 4-16 ºC (40-60 ºF) (CH,

CHR) 25

(1.0) 32

(1 1/4) 40

(1.5) 50 (2)

a. Runouts to fan coil

units, cooling coil condensate piping

20 (0.75)

25 (1.0)

32 (1 ¼)

-

2. 10 ºC (50 ºF) and

less, RS for DX refrigerants

20

(0.75)

25 (1)

C. Use Class S (Sheet), 25 mm 1 (inch) thick for the following:

1. Chilled water pumps

2. Chillers, insulate any cold chiller surfaces subject to condensation which has not been factory insulated.

3. Expansion tank, chemical pot feeder, water filter/separator.



2.6 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION (UNDER GENSET PACKAGE)

A. ASTM C533:

Type I Type II

Use temperature, maximum ºC (ºF) 649 (1200) 927 (1700) Density (dry), max kg/m ³ (lb/ft³) 240 (15) 352 (22) Thermal Conductivity: W/m K (Btu in/h ft² ºF) @ mean temp of 93 ºC (200 ºF)

0.065 (0.45)

0.078 (0.54)

Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame Spread Index, Max Smoke Density Index, Max

0 0

0

B. Engine Exhaust Insulation for Emergency Generators.

Type II, Class D, 65 mm (2 ½ inch) nominal thickness. Cover exhaust completely form engine through roof or wall construction, including muffler.

2.7 DUCT WRAP FOR KITCHEN HOOD GREASE DUCTS

A. Light weight, high temperature Rockwool of 50mm (2 inches) thick with low thermal conductivity K value of 0.036 W/m ºC (0.250 Btu in/hr ft² Fº) at mean temperature of 20 ºC (68 ºF) with nominal density value of 50 – 60 kg/m3.

B. Material shall be fully encapsulated by UL classified aluminum foil and tested to

ASTM E84 standard. C. Material shall be UL tested for internal grease fire to 1093 ºC (2,000 ºF) with zero

clearance and for through-penetration firestop.

D. Provide stainless steel jacket for all exterior and exposed interior ductwork.

E. Material shall be UL classified for 1 hour, 2 hours, fire rating for grease duct enclosure, and meet NFPA 96 requirements for direct applied insulating material to grease ducts with zero clearance.

F. Material flame spread and smoke developed ratings shall not be higher than 5, as per

ASTM E 84/UL 723 flammability test.

2.8 INSULATION ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Insulation inserts at pipe supports: Provide for all insulated piping as per Section

15050, Item 2.2L

B. Adhesive, Mastic, Cement

1. Mil. Spec. MIL-A-3316, Class 1: Jacket and lap adhesive and protective finish coating for insulation.

2. Mil. Spec. MIL-A-3316, Class 2: Adhesive for laps and for adhering insulation to metal surface.

3. Mil. Spec. MIL-A-24179, Type II Class 1: Adhesive for installing flexible unicellular insulation and for laps and general use.

4. Mil. Spec. MIL-C-19565, Type I: Protective finish for outdoor use.



5. Mil. Spec. MIL-C-19565, Type I or Type II: Vapor barrier compound for indoor use.

6. ASTM C449: Mineral fiber hydraulic-setting thermal insulating and finishing cement.

7. Other: Insulation manufacturer’s published recommendations.

C. Mechanical Fasteners:

1. Pins, anchors: Welded pins, or metal or nylon anchors with tin-coated or fiber washer, or clips. Pin diameter shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer.

2. Staples: Outward clinching monel or stainless steel.

3. Wire: 1.3 mm thick (18 gage) soft annealed galvanized, or 1.9 mm (14 gage) copper clad steel or nickel copper alloy.

4. Bands: 20mm (3/3 inch) nominal width, brass, galvanized steel, aluminum or stainless steel.

D. Reinforcement and Finishes:

1. Glass Fabric, open weave: ASTM D1668, Type III (resin treated) and Type I (asphalt treated).

2. Glass fiber fitting tape: Mil.Spec. MIL-C-20079, Type II, Class 1.

3. Tape for Flexible Unicellular Insulation: Scoth No. 472, Nashua PE-12, or approved equal recommended by the insulation manufacturer.

4. Hexagonal wire netting: 25 mm (one inch) mesh, 0.85 mm thick (22 gage) galvanized steel.

5. Corner beads: 50 mm (2 inch) by 50 mm (2 inch), 0.55 mm thick (26 gage) galvanized steel; or, 25 mm (1 inch) by 25 mm (1 inch), 0.47 mm thick (28 gage) aluminum angle adhered to 50 mm (2 inch) by 50 mm (2 inch) Kraft paper.

6. PVC fitting cover: Fed. Spec. L-P-535, Composition A, 11-86 Type II, Grade GU, with Form B Mineral Fiber insert, for media temperature ºC (40 ºF) to 121 ºC (250 ºF). Below 4 ºF) and above 121 ºC (250 ºF) provide double layer insert. Provide color matching, vapor barrier, pressure sensitive tape.

E. Firestopping Material, Other than Pipe and Duct Insulation: Refer to Section 07841.





A. Required pressure tests of duct and piping joints and connections shall be completed and the work approved by the Resident Engineer for application of insulation. Surface shall be clean and dry with all foreign materials, such as dirt, oil, loose scale and rust removed.

B. Except for specific exceptions, insulate entire specified equipment, piping (pipe, fittings, valves, accessories), and duct systems. Insulate each pipe and duct individually. Do not use scrap pieces of insulation where a full length section will fit.

C. Where removal of insulation of piping, ductwork and equipment is required to comply with Asbestos Abatement, such areas shall be reinsulated to comply with this specification.

D. Insulation materials shall be installed in a first class manner with smooth and even surfaces, with jackets and facings drawn tight and smoothly cemented down at all laps. Insulation shall be continuous through all sleeves and openings, except at fire dampers and duct heaters (NFPA 90A). Vapor retarders shall be continuous and uninterrupted throughout systems with operating temperature 16 degrees C (60 degrees F) and below. Lap and seal vapor barrier over ends and exposed edges of insulation. Anchors, supports and other metal projections through insulation on cold surfaces shall be insulated and vapor sealed for a minimum length of 150 mm (6 inches).

E. Install vapor stops at all insulation terminations on either side of valves, pumps and equipment and particularly in straight lengths of pipe insulation.

F. Construct insulation on parts of equipment such as chilled water pumps and heads of chillers, convertors and heat exchangers that must be opened periodically for maintenance or repair, so insulation can be removed and replaced without damage. Install insulation with bolted 1 mm thick (20 gage) galvanized steel or aluminum covers as complete units, or in sections, with all necessary supports, and split to coincide with flange/split of the equipment.

G. HVAC work not to be insulated:

1. Internally insulated ductwork and air handling units. Omit insulation on relief air ducts.

2. Exhaust air ducts and plenums, and ventilation exhaust air shafts, unless otherwise specified.

G. Apply insulation materials subject to the manufacturer's recommended temperature limits. Apply adhesives, mastic and coatings at the manufacturer's recommended minimum coverage.

3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Mineral Fiber Board:

1. Faced board: Apply board on pins spaced not more than 300 mm (12 inches) on center each way, and not less than 75 mm (3 inches) from each edge of board. In addition to pins, apply insulation bonding adhesive to entire underside of horizontal metal surfaces. Butt insulation edges tightly and seal all joints with laps and butt strips. After applying speed clips cut pins off flush and apply vapor seal patches over clips.



2. Plain board:

a. Insulation shall be scored, beveled or mitered to provide tight joints and be secured to equipment with bands spaced 225 mm (9 inches) on center for irregular surfaces or with pins and clips on flat surfaces. Use corner beads to protect edges of insulation.

b. For hot equipment: Stretch 25 mm (1 inch) mesh wire, with edges wire laced together, over insulation and finish with insulating and finishing cement applied in one coat, 6 mm (1/4 inch) thick, trowel led to a smooth finish.

c. For cold equipment: Apply meshed glass fabric in a tack coat 1.5 to 1.7 square meter per liter (60 to 70 square feet per gallon) of vapor mastic and finish with mastic at 0.3 to 0.4 square meter per liter (12 to 15 square feet per gallon) over the entire fabric surface.

d. Chilled water pumps: Insulate with removable and replaceable 1 mm thick (20 gage) aluminum or galvanized steel covers lined with insulation. Seal closure joints/flanges of covers with gasket material. Fill void space in enclosure with flexible mineral fiber insulation.

B. Closed-Cell Polyolefin Foam Insulation

1. The insulation must be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

2. All joints should be butted firmly against each other, Seal all joints with 75mm

reinforced aluminum foil tape. No gluing of joints is required.

3. Insulate each duct separately. Flanges should be insulated with a 120mm wide strip of insulation material, ensuring joints are sealed with 75mm reinforced aluminum foil tape.

4. No additional vapor barrier, or coatings are required.

5. All supporting hangers should be lined with the same insulation material to

avoid excess compression of insulation. (Refer manufacturer’s instructions).

6. Ensure no air pockets during the installation of the insulation to the duct. C. Flexible Closed-Cell Elastomeric Rubber Insulation:

1. Apply insulation and fabricate fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and finish with two coats of weather resistant finish as recommended by the insulation manufacturer.

2. Pipe and tubing insulation:

a. Use proper size material. Do not stretch or strain insulation. b. To avoid undue compression of insulation, provide cork stoppers or

wood inserts at supports as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. Insulation shields are specified under Section 15050.

c. Where possible, slip insulation over the pipe or tubing prior to connection, and seal the butt joints with adhesive. Where the slip-on technique is not possible, slit the insulation and apply it to the pipe sealing the seam and joints with contact adhesive. Optional tape sealing, as recommended by the manufacturer, may be employed. Make changes from mineral fiber insulation in a straight run of pipe, not at a fitting. Seal joint with tape.

3. Apply sheet insulation to flat or large curved surfaces with 100 percent adhesive coverage. For fittings and large pipe, apply adhesive to seams only.




D. Pipe and Duct Insulation at Penetrations of Fire or Smoke Barriers:

1. Wrap pipe or duct with firestop pipe insulation, seal jacket seam and seal and joints to adjacent sections of insulation.

2. Seal opening between insulation and pipe sleeve with firestopping material.

3. Among pipe and duct penetrations requiring fire stop insulation are the following:

a. Floor (platform) of interstitial space (ducts and pipes). b. Pipe risers through mechanical room floors. c. Pipe or duct chase walls and floors. d. Smoke partitions.

e. Fire partitions.

F. Duct Wrap for Kitchen Hood Grease Ducts:

1. The insulation thickness, layers and installation method shall be as per recommendations of the manufacturer to maintain the fire integrity and performance rating.

G. Calcium Silicate Insulation:

1. The installation and fastening method shall be as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Conform to workmanship and dimensional tolerances as required by ASTM

C533 standard.

H. Weatherproofing Outdoor Insulation:

1. Piping, round and oval ducts: Protective metal jacket. 2. Plenums, casing, fans, rectangular or square ducts and equipments: apply

two coats of weatherproof coating, Mil. Spec. MIL-C-19565, each trowelled or sprayed in place to a wet thickness of 6 mm (1/4 inch), reinforced with open weave glass fabric. After the second layer of mastic has dried, coat and seal with a layer of asphalt aluminum sealer brushed in place.

3. Flexible elastomeric cellular and polyethylene insulation: Finish with two coats of weather resistant finish as recommended by the insulation manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Refrigerant Piping SECTION 15183


Refrigerant Piping.doc

PART 1 – GENERAL .......................................................................................................................................... 1 1.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 1 1.2 RELATED WORK ................................................................................................................................ 1 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ....................................................................................................................... 1 1.4 SUBMITTALS ...................................................................................................................................... 2 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS .............................................................................................................. 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................................................ 4

2.1 PIPING AND FITTINGS ........................................................................................................................ 4 2.2 PRESSURE-TEMPERATURE GAGES .................................................................................................. 5 2.3 THERMOMETERS AND WELLS ........................................................................................................... 5 2.4 PIPE SUPPORTS ................................................................................................................................ 6 2.5 HEATING TAPE .................................................................................................................................. 6 2.6 REFRIGERANTS AND OILS................................................................................................................. 6 2.7 PIPE/CONDUIT ROOF PENETRATION COVER ................................................................................... 6 2.8 PIPE INSULATION FOR DX HVAC SYSTEMS .................................................................................... 6 2.9 PIPE INSULATION FOR WALK-IN REFRIGERATORS AND FREEZERS ................................................ 6

PART 3 - EXECUTION ....................................................................................................................................... 7

3.1 INSTALLATION .................................................................................................................................... 7 3.2 PIPE AND TUBING INSULATION ......................................................................................................... 7 3.3 SIGNS AND IDENTIFICATION .............................................................................................................. 8 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ................................................................................................................. 8 3.5 FIELD TESTS ..................................................................................................................................... 8 3.6 SYSTEM TEST AND CHARGING ......................................................................................................... 9




SECTION 15183

REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Field refrigerant piping for direct expansion HVAC systems. Field refrigerant piping and associated drain and condenser water piping for walk-in refrigerators and freezers, including required pipe insulation.

B. Definitions:

1. Refrigerating system: Combination of interconnected refrigerant-containing parts constituting one closed refrigeration circuit in which a refrigerant is circulated for the purpose of extracting heat.

a. Low side means the parts of a refrigerating system subjected to evaporator pressure.

b. High side means the parts of a refrigerating system subjected to condenser pressure.

2. Brazed joint: A gas-tight joint obtained by the joining of metal parts with alloys which melt at temperatures higher than 427 degrees C (800 degrees F) but less than the melting temperatures of the joined parts.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 15010 – Mechanical General Provisions

B. Section 15050 – Basic Mechanical Materials And Methods: General mechanical requirements and items, which are common to more than one section of Division 15.

C. Section 15080 – Mechanical Insulation: Requirements for piping insulation.

D. Section 15181 – Hydronic Piping: Requirements for water and drain piping and valves.


A. Refer to specification Section 15010.

B. Comply with ASHRAE Standard 15, Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. The application of this Code is intended to assure the safe design, construction, installation, operation, and inspection of every refrigerating system employing a fluid which normally is vaporized and liquefied in its refrigerating cycle.

C. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX: Welding and Brazing Qualifications.

D. Products shall comply with UL 207 "Refrigerant–Containing Components and Accessories, "Nonelectrical"; or UL 429 "Electrical Operated Valves."





1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with specification Section 15010.

1. Sufficient information for components noted, including valves and refrigerant piping accessories, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications for components noted below:

a. Tubing and fittings

b. Valves

c. Strainers

d. Moisture-liquid indicators

e. Filter-driers

f. Flexible metal hose

g. Liquid-suction interchanges

h. Oil separators (when specified)

i. Gages

j. Pipe and equipment supports

k. Flexible elastomeric pipe insulation

l. Refrigerant and oil

m. Pipe/conduit roof penetration cover

n. Soldering and brazing materials

2. Layout of refrigerant piping and accessories, including flow capacities, valves locations, and oil traps slopes of horizontal runs, floor/wall penetrations, and equipment connection details.

B. Certification: Copies of certificates for welding procedure, performance qualification record and list of welders' names and symbols.

C. Design Manual: Furnish two copies of design manual of refrigerant valves and accessories.

D. For equipment and material submittals, provide certificate of origin to be included in the submittal and bill of lading before delivery to site.


The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.

A. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI):

495 - Refrigerant Liquid Receivers

760 - Solenoid Valves for Use with Volatile Refrigerants.




B. American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE):

15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration

17 - Method of Testing Capacity of Thermostatic Refrigerant Expansion Valves

63.1 - Method of Testing Liquid Line Refrigerant Driers

69 - Methods of Testing Discharge line Refrigerant-Oil Separators

C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

A13.1 - Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems

B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings

B16.24 - Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 150, 300, 400, 600, 900, 1500 and 2500, (Errata-1991, R (1998)

B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping

Z535.1 - Safety Color Code

D. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes, Section 9 – Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing Operators

E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

A126 - Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fittings.

B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal

B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube

B88-M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric)

B280 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service

F. American Welding Society, Inc. (AWS):

A5.8 - Standard Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding.

G. Federal Specifications (FS):

GG - G -76 - Gages, Pressure and Vacuum, Dial Indicating (for Air, Steam, Oil, Water, Ammonia, Chloro-Flouro Hydrocarbon and Compressed Gases)

H. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA):

NEMA 250 - Enclosure for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts)




I. Underwriters Laboratories (U.L.):

UL 207 - Standard for Refrigerant-Containing Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical

UL 429 - Standard for Electrically Operated Valves

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING AND FITTINGS

A. Refrigerant Piping: Copper refrigerant tube, ASTM B280, cleaned, dehydrated and sealed, marked ACR on hard temper straight lengths. Coils shall be tagged ASTM B280 by the manufacturer. Or aluminum refrigerant tube, ASTM B75-02 (subject to extended warranty coverage by aluminum tube supplier).

B. Water and Drain Piping: Copper water tube, ASTM B88, Type M or L, or refrigerant tube ASTM B280.

C. Fittings, Valves and Accessories:

1. Solder joints: Wrought copper fittings, ANSI B16.22.

a. Solder, refrigerant tubing: Cadmium free, AWS A5.8, 45 percent silver brazing alloy, Class Bag-5.

b. Solder, water and drain: 95-5 tin-antimony, ASTM B32 (95TA).

2. Flanges and flanged fittings: ANSI B16.24.

3. Refrigeration Valves:

a. Stop Valves: Brass or bronze alloy, packless, or packed type with gas tight cap, frost proof, backseating.

b. Pressure Relief Valves: Forged brass with nonferrous, corrosion resistant internal working parts of high strength, cast iron bodies conforming to ASTM A126, Grade B. Set valves in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 15.

c. Solenoid Valves: ARI 760, UL-listed, two-position, direct acting or pilot-operated, moisture and vapor-proof type of corrosion resisting materials, designed for intended service, and solder-end connections. Fitted with suitable NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location and normally open holding coil.

d. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Brass body with stainless- steel or non-corrosive non ferrous internal parts, diaphragm and spring-loaded (direct-operated) type with sensing bulb and distributor having side connection for hot-gas bypass and external equalizer. Size and operating characteristics as recommended by manufacturer of evaporator and factory set for superheat requirements. Solder-end connections. Testing and rating in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 17.

e. Check Valves: Brass or bronze alloy with swing or lift type, with tight closing resilient seals for silent operation; designed for low pressure drop, and with solder-end connections. Direction of flow shall be legibly and permanently indicated on the valve body.




4. Strainers: Designed to permit removing screen without removing strainer from piping system, and provided with screens 80 to 100 mesh in liquid lines up to 30 mm (1-1/8 inch), 60 mesh in liquid lines over 30 mm (1-1/8 inch), and 40 mesh in suction lines. Provide strainers in liquid line serving each thermostatic expansion valve, and in suction line serving each refrigerant compressor not equipped with integral strainer.

5. Refrigerant Moisture/Liquid Indicators: Double-ported type having heavy sight glasses sealed into forged bronze body and incorporating means of indicating refrigerant charge and moisture indication. Provide screwed brass seal caps.

6. Refrigerant Filter-Dryers: UL listed, angle or in-line type, as shown on drawings. Conform to ASHRAE Standard 63. Heavy gage steel shell protected with corrosion-resistant paint; perforated baffle plates to prevent desiccant bypass. Size as recommended by manufacturer for service and capacity of system with connection not less than the line size in which installed. Filter driers with replaceable filters shall be furnished with one spare element of each type and size.

7. Flexible Metal Hose: Seamless bronze corrugated hose, covered with bronze wire braid, with standard copper tube ends. Provide in suction and discharge piping of each compressor.

8. Liquid-Suction Heat Exchanger: Designed for counter flow and for free drainage of oil. Size shall suit system conditions and refrigerant used. Interchangers shall be ASME construction or UL listed.

9. Water Piping Valves and Accessories: Refer to specification Section 15181.

10. Oil Separators: Provide for condensing units, as shown. All welded steel construction with capacity to eliminate a minimum of 95 percent of the oil from the hot gas flowing through it. Provide manufacturer's published ratings for minimum and maximum refrigeration tonnage corresponding to this oil separating efficiency. Conform to ASHRAE Standard 69. Separator shall be equipped with a float valve to prevent return of the hot gas to crankcase, and shall have isolating stop valves so it can be opened and services without pumping out any other part of the system. ASME construction or UL listed.

11. Receivers: Conform to ARI 495, steel construction, equipped with tappings for liquid inlet and outlet valves, pressure relief valve and liquid level indicator.

2.2 PRESSURE-TEMPERATURE GAGES A. Fed. Spec. GG-G-76, Type III (freon), 65 mm (2-l/2 inch) minimum diameter, bottom

connection, one percent accuracy, graduated in kPa gage (psig) and corresponding refrigerant temperature, with pressure snubber.

B. Provide board-mounted gages of the following ranges for each compressor. Provide gage shut-off valve.

1. Suction: 101 kPa (30 inches Hg) vacuum to 1723 kPa (gage) (250 psig).

2. Discharge: 0 to 3445 kPa (gage) (0 to 500 psig).

2.3 THERMOMETERS AND WELLS





2.4 PIPE SUPPORTS


2.5 HEATING TAPE

Refer to specification Section 15181. Provide for freezer unit cooler drain piping.

2.6 REFRIGERANTS AND OILS

Provide required refrigerant and oil for proper system operation. Refrigerant gas to be used shall be HFC-407C, HFC-410A or equivalent type.

2.7 PIPE/CONDUIT ROOF PENETRATION COVER

A. Prefabricated Roof Curb: Galvanized steel or extruded aluminum 300 mm (12 inches) overall height, continuous welded corner seams, treated wood nailer, 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) thick, 48 kg (3 pound) density rigid mineral fiberboard insulation with metal liner, built-in cant strip (except for gypsum or tectum decks). For surface insulated roof deck, provide raised cant strip (recessed mounting flange) to start at the upper surface of the insulation. Curbs shall be constructed for pitched roof or ridge mounting as required to keep top of curb level.

B. Penetration Cover: Galvanized sheet metal with flanged removable top. Provide 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) thick mineral fiber board insulation.

C. Flashing Sleeves: Provide sheet metal sleeves for conduit and pipe penetrations of the penetration cover. Seal watertight penetrations.

2.8 PIPE INSULATION FOR DX HVAC SYSTEMS Refer to specification Section 15080.

2.9 PIPE INSULATION FOR WALK-IN REFRIGERATORS AND FREEZERS

A. Flexible elastomeric: Refer to specification Section 15080.

B. Insulate refrigerant suction piping from unit cooler to condensing unit. Use 20 mm (3/4-inch) thick insulation on piping inside the refrigerator or freezer and 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) thick insulation (double layer required) on piping outside the refrigerated space.

C. Insulate unit cooler drain piping in freezer units, over electric heat tracing tape, to prevent drain from freezing during defrost.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install refrigerant piping and refrigerant containing parts in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 15 and ANSI B31.5. Refrigerant piping shall be brazed with 15 percent silver solder in accordance with AWS A5.8.

1. Install piping as short as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbow and fittings.

2. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers to allow for service and inspection. Space piping, including insulation, to provide 25 mm (one inch) minimum clearance between adjacent piping or other surface. Use pipe sleeves through walls, floors, and ceilings, sized to permit installation of pipes with full thickness insulation.

3. Locate and orient valves to permit proper operation and access for maintenance of packing, seat and disc. Generally locate valve stems in overhead piping in horizontal position. Provide a union adjacent to one end of all threaded end valves. Control valves usually require reducers to connect to pipe sizes shown on the drawing.

4. Use copper tubing in protective conduit when installed below ground.

5. Swab fittings and valves with manufacturer's recommended cleaning fluid to remove oil and other compounds prior to installation.

6. Install hangers and supports per ANSI B31.5 and the refrigerant piping manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Protect refrigerant system during construction against entrance of foreign matter, dirt and moisture; have open ends of piping and connections to compressors, condensers, evaporators and other equipment tightly capped until assembly.

C. Pass nitrogen gas through the pipe or tubing to prevent oxidation as each joint is brazed. Cap the system with a reusable plug after each brazing operation to retain the nitrogen and prevent entrance of air and moisture.

D. Pipe relief valve discharge to outdoors for systems containing more than 45 kg (100 pounds) of refrigerant.

E. Firestopping: Fill openings around uninsulated piping penetrating floors or fire walls, with firestop material. For firestopping insulated piping refer to Section 15080.

F. Seismic Bracing: Refer to specification Section 15071, for bracing of piping.

3.2 PIPE AND TUBING INSULATION

A. Apply flexible cellular insulation and fabricate fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Use proper size material. Do not stretch or strain insulation.

C. To avoid undue compression of insulation, provide cork stoppers or wood inserts at supports as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. Insulation shields are specified under specification Section 15050.




D. Where possible, slip insulation over the pipe or tubing prior to connection, and seal the butt joints with adhesive. Where the slip-on technique is not possible, slit the insulation and apply it to the pipe sealing the seam and joints with contact adhesive. Optional tape sealing, as recommended by the manufacturer, may be employed.

E. Apply two coats of weather-resistant finish as recommended by the manufacturer to insulation exposed to outdoor weather.

3.3 SIGNS AND IDENTIFICATION

A. Each refrigerating system erected on the premises shall be provided with an easily legible permanent sign securely attached and easily accessible, indicating thereon the name and address of the installer, the kind and total number of pounds of refrigerant required in the system for normal operations, and the field test pressure applied.

B. Systems containing more than 50 kg (110 lb) of refrigerant shall be provided with durable signs, in accordance with ANSI A13.1 and ANSI Z53.1, having letters not less than 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) in height designating:

1. Valves and switches for controlling refrigerant flow, the ventilation and the refrigerant compressor(s).

2. Signs on all exposed high pressure and low pressure piping installed outside the machinery room, with name of the refrigerant and the letters "HP" or "LP."

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Prior to initial operation examine and inspect piping system for conformance to plans and specifications and ASME 31.5. Equipment, material, or work rejected because of defects or nonconformance with plans and specifications, and the Contractor shall correct ANSI codes for pressure piping.

3.5 FIELD TESTS

A. After completion of piping installation and prior to initial operation, conduct test on piping system according to ASME B31.5. Furnish materials and equipment required for tests. Perform tests in the presence of Consultant. If the test fails, correct defects and perform the test again until it is satisfactorily done and all joints are proved tight.

1. Every refrigerant-containing parts of the system that is erected on the premises, except compressors, condensers, evaporators, safety devices, pressure gages, control mechanisms and systems that are factory tested, shall be tested and proved tight after complete installation, and before operation.

2. The high and low side of each system shall be tested and proved tight at not less than the lower of the design pressure or the setting of the pressure-relief device protecting the high or low side of the system, respectively, except systems erected on the premises using non-toxic and non-flammable Group A1 refrigerants with copper tubing not exceeding 16 mm (0.62 in) O.D. This may be tested by means of the refrigerant charged into the system at the saturated vapor pressure of the refrigerant at 20 degrees C (68 degrees F) minimum.




B. Test Medium: A suitable dry gas such as nitrogen or shall be used for pressure testing. The means used to build up test pressure shall have either a pressure-limiting device or pressure-reducing device with a pressure-relief device and a gage on the outlet side. The pressure relief device shall be set above the test pressure but low enough to prevent permanent deformation of the system components.

3.6 SYSTEM TEST AND CHARGING

A. System Test and Charging: As recommended by the equipment manufacturer or as follows:

1. Connect a drum of refrigerant to charging connection and introduce enough refrigerant into system to raise the pressure to 70 kPa (10 psi) gage. Close valves and disconnect refrigerant drum. Test system for leaks with halide test torch or other approved method suitable for the test gas used. Repair all leaking joints and retest.

2. Connect a drum of dry nitrogen to charging valve and bring test pressure to design pressure for low side and for high side. Refer to Article 1.3, QUALITY ASSURANCE. Test entire system again for leaks.

3. Evacuate the entire refrigerant system by the triplicate evacuation method with a vacuum pump equipped with an electronic gage reading in mPa (microns). Pull the system down to 665 mPa (500 microns) and hold for four hours then break the vacuum with dry nitrogen (or refrigerant). Repeat the evacuation two more times breaking the third vacuum with the refrigeration to be charged and charge with the proper volume of refrigerant.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Fuel Oil Storage Tank, Piping and Accessories SECTION 15191

MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC. S:\admin\mpi\MP1716_Baguio General Hospital and Medical Trauma Center\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2018-04-06_100% DD\01-MECHANICAL\15191-Fuel Oil Storage Tank, Piping and Accessories.doc

PART 1 – GENERAL .......................................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................................................... 1 1.2 RELATED WORK ..................................................................................................................................... 1 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................................................. 1 1.4 SUBMITTALS ............................................................................................................................................ 2 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING .................................................................................................... 3 1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS ................................................................................................................... 4 1.7 PERMITS ................................................................................................................................................. 5

PART - 2 PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................................................ 6

2.1 FUEL OIL PIPING ..................................................................................................................................... 6 2.2 JOINTS AND FITTINGS ............................................................................................................................ 6 2.3 VALVES ................................................................................................................................................... 6 2.4 GENERATOR EXHAUST PIPE (BY GENSET CONTRACTOR) .................................................................... 6 2.5 FUEL OIL TRANSFER PUMPS .................................................................................................................. 6 2.6 MAIN FUEL OIL STORAGE TANK ............................................................................................................. 7 2.7 FUEL STORAGE DAY TANK ..................................................................................................................... 7 2.8 OVERFILL PROTECTION DEVICE ............................................................................................................. 7 2.9 OVERFILL PROTECTION DEVICE ............................................................................................................. 8 2.10 FUEL OIL FILTER (BY GENSET CONTRACTOR) ........................................................................................ 8 2.11 LEVEL INDICATION .................................................................................................................................. 8

PART 3 – EXECUTION ...................................................................................................................................... 8

3.1 LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM ..................................................................................................................... 8 3.2 TANK FLUID LEVEL MONITOR AND ALARM SYSTEMS ............................................................................ 9 3.3 CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS ................................................................................................................... 10 3.4 GENERATOR FUEL SYSTEM PIPING INSTALLATION .............................................................................. 10 3.5 FUEL PROVISION (BY GENSET CONTRACTOR) ..................................................................................... 11 3.6 GENERATOR EXHAUST PIPE INSTALLATION (BY GENSET CONTRACTOR) ............................................ 11 3.7 WIRING AND CONTROLS ....................................................................................................................... 11 3.8 TESTING ................................................................................................................................................ 11


MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC. Page 1 of 11 S:\admin\mpi\MP1716_Baguio General Hospital and Medical Trauma Center\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2018-04-06_100% DD\01-MECHANICAL\15191-Fuel Oil Storage Tank, Piping and Accessories.doc

SECTION 15191 FUEL OIL STORAGE TANK, PIPING AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Tanks, piping, and accessories located outside, underground or aboveground as shown, for storage and distribution of diesel fuel oil, or burner fuel oil (unheated or heated). Refer to drawings for type and temperature of fuel and for tank capacities.

B. Tank fluid level monitoring and alarm systems. C. Tank and piping leak detection systems.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 09910 – Painting – Equipment and Piping

B. Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Method

C. Section 15071 - Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Control


A. Approval by Consultant is required of products or services of proposed manufacturers, suppliers and installers, and will be based on Contractor’s certification that:

1. Manufacturers regularly and currently manufacture tanks, tank and piping

accessories, tank fluid level monitoring and leak detection systems. 2. The design and size of each item of equipment provided for this project is of

current production and has been in satisfactory operation on at least three installations for approximately three years. Current models of fluid level and leak detection systems with less than three years service experience are acceptable if similar previous models from the same manufacturer have at least three years service experience.

B. Apply and install materials, equipment and specialties in accordance with

manufacturer’s written instructions. Conflicts between the manufacturer’s instructions and the contract drawings and specifications shall be referred to the Consultant’s Technical Representative (CTR) or Consultant for resolution. Provide copies of installation instructions to the CTR prior to commencing installation of any item.

C. All equipment shall be free from defects which would adversely affect the

performance, maintainability and appearance of individual components or overall assembly.

D. Tanks, Secondary Containment Systems for Piping, Plastic Piping and Containment

Systems, Tank Level Monitoring Systems, Leak Detection Systems, Cathodic Protection Systems: Authorized manufacturers representatives shall provide on-site training of installers and supervision of the installation and testing of the equipment and systems to assure conformance to written instructions of manufacturers.



E. Tank and piping installation contractor shall be certified as acceptable by local and pollution control authorities.

F. Entire installation shall conform to requirements of local and pollution control

authorities.

G. Pipe Welding: Conform to requirements of ASME B31.1. Welders shall show evidence of qualification. Each welder shall utilize a stamp to identify their work. Unqualified personnel will be rejected.

H. Assembly of Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic Piping: Installation personnel shall have

been trained, tested and certified under a procedure approved by the manufacturer of the piping. Proof of certification, in writing, shall be provided to the CTR or RE.

I. Where specified codes or standards conflict, consult the CTR or RE. J. Label of Conformance (definition): Labels of accredited testing laboratories showing

conformance to the standards specified. K. Equipment and materials installed shall be compatible in all respects with other items

being furnished and with existing items so that the result will be a complete and fully operational system which conforms to contract requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Underground Steel Tanks Including Vault-Type Tanks:

1. Drawings of tanks, supports, ladders, platforms, tank manholes, emergency relief vents and all accessories. Include overall dimensions and dimensional locations and sizes of pipe connections, and access openings.

2. Recommended tank support locations. 3. Weight of entire tank assembly, empty and flooded. 4. Design and construction of primary tanks, insulation, secondary

containments, supports, pipe connections, platforms, heating coils. 5. Application and performance data on coatings from manufacturer of coatings. 6. Data certifying tanks are designed for surcharge loads of platforms shown. 7. Certification of compliance with specified standards. 8. Design, construction, performance, dimensions of emergency relief vents. 9. Seismic Data: refer to Section 15071, Mechanical Vibration and Seismic

Controls.

B. Fuel Piping:

1. ASTM and UL compliance. 2. Grade, class or type, schedule number. 3. Manufacturer.



C. Pipe Fittings, Unions, Flanges:

1. ASTM and UL compliance. 2. ANSI standards number. 3. Catalog cuts. 4. Pressure and temperature rating.

D. Foot Valves, Check Valves, Overfill Prevention Valves:

1. Catalog cuts showing design and construction. 2. Pressure and temperature ratings. 3. Pressure loss and flow rate data. 4. Materials of construction. 5. Accessories.

E. Secondary Containment System for Fuel Piping:

1. Sizes, materials, construction of containment system including end seals, sumps, coatings and pipe supports.

2. Layout of system. 3. Installation instructions. 4. Design of cathodic protection system (steel casing). (Not Applicable)

F. Leak Detection System:

1. Drawings, description and performance data on sensors, control units. 2. Description of operation. 3. Layout of system. 4. Installation and operating instructions. 5. Data on interconnecting wiring systems to be furnished.

G. Tank Fluid Level Monitoring Instrumentation System:

1. Drawings showing instruments and in-tank sensing units, with dimensions. 2. Design and construction of all elements of system. 3. Installation instructions.

H. Tank and Piping Accessories: Design, construction, and dimensions of vent caps, fill boxes, fill caps, spill containers and other accessories.

I. For equipment and material submittals, provide certificate of origin to be included in the submittal and bill of lading before delivery to site.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Protection of Equipment:

1. Equipment and material placed on the job site shall remain in the custody of the Contractor until phased acceptance, whether or not the Contractor has been reimbursed for the equipment and material by the Owner. The Contractor is solely responsible for the protection of such equipment and material against any damage.

2. Place damaged equipment in first class, new operating condition; or, replace

same as determined and directed by the Consultant or RE. Such repair or replacement shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.



3. Protect new equipment and piping systems against entry of foreign matter on the inside. Clean both inside and outside before painting or placing equipment in operation.

4. Existing equipment and piping being worked on by the Contractor shall be

under the custody and responsibility of the Contractor and shall be protected as required for new work.

B. Cleanliness of Equipment and Piping:

1. Exercise care in storage and handling of equipment and piping material to be incorporated in the work. Remove debris arising from cutting, threading and welding of piping.

2. Piping systems shall be flushed, blown or pigged as necessary to provide

clean systems. 3. Clean interior of all tanks prior to delivery for beneficial use by the Owner. 4. Contractor shall be fully responsible for all costs, damages and delay arising

from failure to provide clean systems and equipment.


The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only. A. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):

RR-F-621E Frames, Covers, Gratings, Steps, Sump and Catch Basin, Manhole

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

A36/A36M Carbon Structural Steel A53/A53M Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and

Seamless A106 Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High Temperature Service A126 Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fittings A234/A234M Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for

Moderate and High Temperature Service B62 Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings D2996 Filament-Wound “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced-

Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe

D. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

B16.5 Steel Pipe Flanges, Flanged Pipes and Fittings. B16.9 Factory - Made Wrought Butt Welding B16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded



B31.1 Code for Pressure Piping, Power Piping with Current Amendments

E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)

F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

30 Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code 31 Oil Burning Equipment 70 National Electrical Code

G. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):

142-93 Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids

2085-97 Insulated Secondary Containment Above-ground Tank for

Flammable and Combustible Liquids.

H. Steel Tank Institute (STI):

F911-93 Standard for Unitized Steel Aboveground Storage Tank Systems with Open Top Secondary Containment

F921-92 Double Wall Aboveground Steel Storage Tanks F922 Specification for Permatank

I. National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE):

NACE 3 Commercial Blast Cleaning NACE 4 Brush-off Blast Cleaning

1.7 PERMITS

Contractor shall obtain and complete all tank permit and registration forms required by governmental authorities.



PART - 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FUEL OIL PIPING

A. Pipe larger than 12 mm, Schedule 40 steel to ASTM A120.

B. All piping exposed to the elements or exterior of the building shall be galvanized.

2.2 JOINTS AND FITTINGS

A. Provide joints threaded with approved oil resistant jointing compound. B. For steel piping larger than 12 mm, provide screwed malleable iron fittings rated at

1035 kPa.

2.3 VALVES

A. Provide Crane, Kitz, Nibco, Showa, Toyo or Victaulic valves from one manufacturer, new, all brass/bronze construction and packed for oil use, to the following Kitz Figure numbers:

1. Gate valves 75 mm and smaller, 862 kPa bronze, screwed ends, rising stem,

solid wedge disc, Fig. 24.

2. Globe valves 75 mm and smaller, 862 kPa bronze, union bonnet, screwed ends with P.T.F.E. disc, Fig. 03.

3. Check valves 75 mm and smaller, 862 kPa bronze, screwed ends, horizontal

swing check, regrinding type, Fig. 22.

4. Ball valves 75 mm and smaller, 1034 kPa, brass or bronze body, two piece, full port, screwed ends, with chrome plated solid ball, Fig. 58.

B. Provide Jamesbury Type 23-2236MT or equivalent Apollo fuel supply fire safety ball

valve complete with torque handle fusible link; Model LK 500 for 20 mm.

2.4 GENERATOR EXHAUST PIPE (BY GENSET CONTRACTOR)

A. Provide standard weight ASTM Specification steel pipe. Weld all joints, except at connection to muffler discharge pipe where flanges shall be used.

B. Provide 1035 kPa forged steel, welding flange, flanged faced and drilled to conform to ASA B16.5. Provide asbestos-free high temperature gaskets 1.6 mm thickness.

C. Provide flapper type weather cap at exterior end of stack, manufactured as an

accessory item for the installation. Do not use field manufactured type. D. Where piping is exposed to weather, supply two coats of high temperature anti rust

paint.

2.5 FUEL OIL TRANSFER PUMPS

A. Provide a duplex pumping set, direct driven gear pumps with performance required on Pump Schedule.

B. Equip each pump with suction and discharge pressure and vacuum gauges, discharge line globe valve, suction line gate valve, dual check valves, relief valve with stainless steel trim and piping to return line, thermometer and strainer.



C. Provide under the complete pump set, a stainless steel drip tray with 40 mm upturned edges.

D. Factory equip pump set with an oil pressure failure switch. Wire to the auto position

of starters to shut off both pumps in the event of oil pressure drop due to oil line failure, or, increase in pressure due to blockage.

E. Provide factory assembled panel to accomplish the specified control sequence.

Panel shall include:

1. Single power source for both fuel oil pumps with main disconnect switch.

2. Individual magnetic starters for each pump with circuit breaker protection.

3. Power "on" pilot light.

4. High oil pressure failure pilot light.

5. Low oil pressure failure pilot light. 6. Motor run pilot light for each motor.

7. Auxiliary contacts for BMS use to indicate each pump motor status.

2.6 MAIN FUEL OIL STORAGE TANK

A. Provide storage tanks suitable for under ground mounting located inside or installation inside a vault of the building (refer to plan for location). Tank shall be factory tested for a minimum of 5 PSI.

B. Provide tanks with capacity indicated on plans. Provide tanks with manhole access and connections for piping detailed on the Drawings.

C. Tank to be fabricated to Underwriters Laboratory of Standard.

2.7 FUEL STORAGE DAY TANK

A. Provide diesel fuel day tank complete with support stands. (Capacity and location as shown on plans).

B. Factory pressure tested tank to 5 PSI. C. Fabricate to Underwriters Laboratory Standard.

2.8 OVERFILL PROTECTION DEVICE

A. Provide Scully Electronic Systems SP-O-E Dynaprobe within Main Storage Tank.

B. Provide Scully Electronic Systems SF-15-LAB Single Point Control Unit in Nema 4 Weatherproof Enclosure with red/green indicating lights, audible high level and alarm silence pushbutton. Control unit shall incorporate SF-15H module with dynamic self checking, and high level failsafe feature.

C. Install Control Unit at Oil Fill Station.

D. Provide interconnecting signal wire between probe and electronics.



E. Provide engraved nameplate at Controller Location stating "Fill only when green light is flashing. Stop if red light comes on. Notify Building Engineer."

2.9 OVERFILL PROTECTION DEVICE A. Provide Magnetrol Model 802 Sentinel transmitter with dual D.P.D.T. relays for

high/low level, and 4-20 mA output proportional to level, complete with integral 90 second time delay.

B. Install probe in a 32 mm external oil column with isolation, drain and vent valves.

C. Set relays for low level failsafe operation.

D. Wiring to transfer fuel oil pumps shall be by the Mechanical Contractor.

2.10 FUEL OIL FILTER (BY GENSET CONTRACTOR)

A. Provide Raycor Turbine Series filter and water separator in the fuel supply line downstream of the day tank. Assembly shall be 1000 FG (maximum 180 GPH).

B. Locate assembly within the oil containment area.

2.11 LEVEL INDICATION

A. Provide Senior levelometer at each of main tanks. Locate adjacent to tank. B. Provide a Magnetrol Model 41-5027-XXX shielded capacitance probe and Model 802

Sentinel 4-20 mADC transmitter, with dual DPDT high/low level relays, in the main fuel oil storage tanks.


3.1 LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM

A. Type: Automatic microprocessor-based continuous monitoring systems responsive to the presence of water and hydrocarbons in the interstitial space of the double-wall tanks, in the tank manhole access enclosures, and in the secondary containment of fuel piping systems. System shall distinguish between hydrocarbon and water and identify location of leak as to individual tank and piping system. System may be combined with tank fluid level monitor and alarm system specified in Article, TANK FLUID LEVEL MONITOR AND ALARM SYSTEM.

B. Functions and Arrangement:

1. Single control station to monitor all sensing probes.

2. Visual indicator to monitor and identify leaks as water or hydrocarbon and location.

3. Indicators showing system status including faults and alarms.

4. On board printer which provides complete reports of all system functions upon command.

5. Panel circuit test button.

6. 95 dB audible alarm with silencing control to sound when leak is detected.

7. Eight hour memory backup system with battery.

8. NEMA 250 Type 4 cabinet.



9. UL or other accredited testing laboratory listing.

10. Interface with engineering control system to indicate system in service and alarm conditions.

C. Sensors:

1. Designed for required locations including: Insertion between walls of double-wall tanks, in sumps in double-wall piping systems and in tank manhole enclosures. Sensing points shall be at lowest point of each tank or sump. Intrinsically safe design.

2. Sensing units shall detect presence of water and a minimum 3 mm (0.125 inch) thick layer of hydrocarbon on surface of water and minimum 50 mm (2 inch) thickness of hydrocarbon in area which has no water present.

3. Cap, at grade, for each sensor. Designed to allow removal and replacement of sensor without disturbing other portions of leak detection system or fuel storage and piping system.

4. Materials of construction shall be non-corroding.

5. Transmit status signal to control unit.

D. Components:

1. Provide manholes at grade for each sensor cap similar in construction to fill boxes. Manholes shall be cast iron, quick-opening cover, watertight, minimum size necessary to accommodate sensor caps. Provide identification plates, similar to those specified for fill points, labeled “MONITORING/OBSERVATION WELL-DO NOT FILL”. Provide special tools if necessary for opening covers.

2. Sensor housings from tank and piping to grade shall be Schedule 40 PVC, or stainless steel.

3. Underground wiring between probes and control unit: Place in water-tight corrosion-resistant conduit system conforming to electrical specifications.

3.2 TANK FLUID LEVEL MONITOR AND ALARM SYSTEMS

A. Type: Microprocessor-based systems for central monitoring of fuel and water levels in all fuel oil storage tanks in the project. High and low level visual and audible alarms. Volumetric tank-tightness testing. Complete with all transducing, transmitting, and receiving devices. On board printer to provide complete report of all system functions upon command. System may be combined with leak detection system specified in Article, LEAK DETECTION SYSTEMS.

B. Fluid Level Monitor:

1. Digital continuous readout, showing tank oil and water levels in liters, (smallest reading one liter). Provide identification of product measured, measuring units, and the tank number.

2. Tank and fuel characteristics contained in preprogrammed non-volatile field-replaceable databases. Protected power supply.

C. High and Low Fluid Level Alarm System:

1. Automatic continuous on-line monitoring of all tanks.

2. Visual and audible indicators combined with fluid level monitor. Identify the tank which is in alarm condition.

3. Manual alarm test and silencing controls.

4. Low level alarm actuation adjustable 0-25 percent of tank capacity. High level alarm actuation adjustable 75-100 percent of tank capacity.



D. Locate all indicators, selector switches, alarms on face of wall-mounted NEMA 250, Type 4 panel.

E. Remote Alarm Annunciator:

1. Visual and audible high level alarms adjacent to tank fill box locations. Locate in NEMA 250 Type 4X weatherproof exterior wall or pole-mounted panels.

2. Alarm shall include flashing red light with 180 degree visibility for each tank and 95 dB horn or 100 mm (4 inch) diameter bell. Provide alarm silence control.

3. Provide identification sign: "WHEN ALARM SOUNDS - FUEL TANK FILLED TO CAPACITY - DO NOT OVERFILL".

F. Interface with engineering control system to indicate tank fluid level and alarm conditions.

G. System Performance: Accuracy plus or minus 2.5 mm (0.01 inch) of fluid height in inventory mode and 0.25 mm (0.001 inch) in leak detection mode. Automatic compensation for fluid temperature changes. Volumetric tank tightness sensitivity of 0.4 lph (0.1 gph).

H. Sensors:

1. Provide sensor types such as magnetostrictive, capacitance, float, hydrostatic and other types as necessary for the applications.

2. Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions with provisions for easy future replacement without need for excavation.

3. Provide for each hydrostatic sensor a constant flow differential pressure regulator and pneumatic transmitter protected from fuel contamination. Air supply shall include filter and over-pressure protection. Provide desiccant-type dryer on air supply designed for removal of water vapor. Dryer rating, minimum 280 cubic liters per minute (10 scfm). Provide moisture indicator. Dryer may be deleted if air supply source has a refrigerated dryer.

4. Float-type units shall be designed for installation and removal through a 100 mm (4 inch) diameter vertical pipe mounted in the top of the tank.

I. Underground Wiring and Piping: Enclose in water-tight corrosion-resistant conduit system sized and arranged as recommended by system manufacturer and conforming to electrical specification.

J. Code Conformance: NFPA-70.

K. Manufacturer: Preferred Utilities, Veeder-Root, or equal.

3.3 CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS

Concrete ballast foundations for underground tanks and concrete pads for aboveground tanks are specified under Section 03300. Ballast foundations shall be sized for buoyancy of entire tank when empty. Credit for overburden is allowed.

3.4 GENERATOR FUEL SYSTEM PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Slope fill and vent piping to storage tank. Provide swing joint pipe connections.

B. Terminate the oil tank vent in a manufactured vent fitting similar to OPW catalogue #45.

C. Provide an alarm whistle on vent piping.

D. Provide manufactured lockable fill cap similar to OPW catalogue #62.



E. Install fuel oil connections at generator. (By Genset Contractor) 3.5 FUEL PROVISION (BY GENSET CONTRACTOR)

A. Provide sufficient fuel to circulate for 48 hours to clean fuel system. Discard

circulated fuel.

B. Fill complete system, including all tanks and piping with fuel oil recommended by generator manufacturer.

C. Refill system following final testing.

3.6 GENERATOR EXHAUST PIPE INSTALLATION (BY GENSET CONTRACTOR) A. Provide all connectors, hangers and brackets required for a satisfactory installation.

Allow for expansion in the vertical and horizontal directions, especially at locations where pipes pass through roof or wall.

B. Insulate exhaust stack and muffler as per Section 15080.

3.7 WIRING AND CONTROLS

A. Fuel pumps shall be able to run at all times. Fuel shall recirculate from day tank to

main storage tanks.

B. Wire low level switch on day tank to generator control panel to annunciate low fuel alarm.

C. Wire high space temperature switch in Generator Room to generator control panel to

annunciate ventilation failure alarm.

D. Field calibrate all level controls. Provide 24 VDC power to level controls, connected to emergency power source.

E. Provide all wiring and devices necessary to implement the pump and alarm/trouble

controls described in this section. 3.8 TESTING

A. Test fuel oil system to NFPA standards.

B. Pressure test exhaust stack at 35 kPa with air. Maintain test pressure for a minimum of 1 hour.

C. Cooperate with Division 16 in testing of the complete installation.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL DX Split System & Window Type Air-Conditioning Units SECTION 15781

MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC. S:\admin\mpi\MP1716_Baguio General Hospital and Medical Trauma Center\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2018-04-06_100% DD\01-MECHANICAL\15781-DX Split System & Window Type AC.doc

PART 1 - GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 SCOPE OF THE SECTION ........................................................................................................................ 1 1.2 WORK INCLUDED .................................................................................................................................... 1 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................................................. 1 1.4 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS ................................................................................................... 1 1.5 SUBMITTALS ............................................................................................................................................ 2 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA ................................................................................................... 2 1.7 WARRANTY ............................................................................................................................................. 2 1.8 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS ............................................................................................................... 2

PART 2 - PRODUCT..................................................................................................................................... 2

2.1 DX SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS ................................................................................................. 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION................................................................................................................................... 4

3.1 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING ..................................................................................................... 4 3.2 INSTALLATION ......................................................................................................................................... 4


MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC. Page 1 of 4 S:\admin\mpi\MP1716_Baguio General Hospital and Medical Trauma Center\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2018-04-06_100% DD\01-MECHANICAL\15781-DX Split System & Window Type AC.doc

SECTION 15781

DX SPLIT SYSTEM & WINDOW TYPE AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF THE SECTION

A. This technical specification establishes the quality of materials and workmanship to be used in the supply and installation of the DX Split type and Window Type air conditioners units.

1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. The provision of all equipment , labor, materials and the performance of all operations in

connection with the supply and installation of packaged and room air conditioners as specified herein and shown on the drawings.

B. Coordination. The Contractor shall be responsible for proper coordination of the work of

all trades. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of packaged and room air

conditioning equipment and fittings whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.

B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged in the installation of packaged and room air

conditioning equipment of a similar quality and scope as this project for at least five years.

1.4 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS A. The DX Split System and room air conditioners shall comply fully with the latest

relevant American, international and British Standards in all respects. B. The following are the most commonly used standards associated with packaged air

conditioners, however the Contractor shall ensure that all applicable standards are complied with, whether listed here or not.

BS 3456 Part 2 Room Air Conditioners. Section 2.34. BS 2852 Testing for Rating of Room Air Conditioners. BS 5491 Testing Unit Air Conditioners Above 7 Kw Capacity. UL 465-82 Central Cooling Air Conditioners. UL 484-82 Room Air Conditioners. NFPA 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code. ASHRAE 37-1978 Methods of Testing for Rating Unitary Air Conditioners. ASHRAE 15-78 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.



NEC Article 44 Air Conditioning and Refrigerating Equipment. IEC 328-ANSI Safety Requirements for the Electrical Equipment Room

Air Conditioners. ISO R859 Testing and Rating Room Air Conditioners. ARI 210 Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment. ARI 270 Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment. ARI 360 Commercial Industrial Air Conditioning Equipment. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Drawings: Refer to Section 15010. B. Products: Submit full manufacturer’s data for every item.

C. For equipment and material submittals, provide certificate of origin to be included in the submittal and bill of lading before delivery to site.

1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Comply with Section 15010. 1.7 WARRANTY

A. Provide 12 months warranty in accordance with contract conditions. 1.8 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

1. Carrier 2. Trane 3. Samsung 4. Mitsubishi 5. Hitachi 6. National 7. LG 8. Midea

PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.1 DX SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS A. Direct Expansion (DX) split system air conditioning units shall be installed as

indicated on the drawings and shall be complete with all required refrigerant piping, temperature controls and all other necessary ancillary items.

B. The units shall deliver the design cooling capacity at the external ambient specified.

The units are rated at 35°C and shall be suitable for continuous operation with reduced capacity at an external ambient temperature 40°C.

C. Controls shall be factory wired and completely enclosed within the unit. All operating

controls shall be located in a single area. Adjustable thermostats shall automatically cycle the compressor to maintain space conditions and the sensing element shall extend across the complete face of the cooling coil.



D. Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER) Submit data to demonstrate that the units will produce the efficiency rates specified.

1. Window Type Units: Units shall produce not less than 9.5 BTU’s per hour cooling per watt-input for 230 volts AC units.

E. Exhaust Air

Provisions shall be made in the unit for controlled exhausting of room air and/or the controlled admittance of fresh air from the unit.

F. Unit Supports

Provide supports and mounts in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation or as indicated on drawings.

G. Condensate removal shall be by means of gravity drainage. H. Unit electrical power shall be 230 volts three phase, 60 hertz or as indicated on the

drawings. The unit shall be capable of operating within line voltage limits of + 3 % to -4.6 %.

I. Evaporator and condenser coils shall be of copper tube construction with aluminium

fins and additional anti corrosion coating suitable for salty spray atmosphere. (“Thermoguard”, “Eroguard”, or equal).

J. Compressor motors shall be two pole, permanent split capacitor type protected

against both thermal and electrical overload. K. Filters shall be washable type, easily accessible, and shall cover the full unit area of

re-circulated air. Air filter shall be of aluminium wood material and shall have a minimum efficiency of 60% when tested in accordance with BS; 2831 Test Dust No. 3.

L. Refrigerant stop valves which incorporate a spindle gland shall be serviceable with

the valves “in situ”. M. For refrigerant piping insulation, Refer to Section 15080 and the required

manufacturer insulation. Tape all joints to form a good vapor seal, then wrap with glass cloth and paint with two coats of approved vapor seal.

N. For refrigerant piping specifications, refer to Section 15183. O. The evaporator/fan coil section shall be ceiling, wall or floor standing and complete

with concealed control panel and finishes as indicated on the drawings. P. The control panels shall have at least the following functions: 1. On/Off/Heat/Cool Control. 2. Low/High Heating and Cooling Control. 3. Adjustable Thermostat.



PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All products shall be delivered in manufacturer’s original protective packaging. B. All products shall be inspected at time of delivery for damage and for compliance with

specifications. C. All products that are found to be damaged, or not in accordance with the

specifications shall immediately be repaired or removed from the site and replaced. Repairs shall not be undertaken before Engineer’s review of the Contractor’s proposed action.

D. All products shall be handled and stored as recommended by manufacturer to

prevent damage and deterioration. E. The Contractor shall supply handling equipment such as lifting beams, reinforced

canvas slings, protective paddings, struts, cradles, etc., required to handle products without damaging hardware or linings and coatings.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. All units mounted externally shall have a raised concrete base with a minimum height

of 150mm above surrounding surfaces. The base shall be sloped to provide natural drainage and ensure that ponding does not occur under the unit.

B. Each packaged unit of whichever type shall be complete with a local electrical

disconnect switch. C. The units shall be of the sizes, capacities, duties and types indicated on the drawings

and shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturers requirements.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Variable Refrigerant Flow System (VRF) SECTION 15800

MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC. S:\admin\mpi\MP1716_Baguio General Hospital and Medical Trauma Center\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2018-04-06_100% DD\01-MECHANICAL\15800-Variable Refrigerant Flow System (VRF).doc

PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................ 1

2.1 OUTDOOR UNIT ......................................................................................................................... 1 2.2 INDOOR UNIT ............................................................................................................................. 2 2.3 CONTROL .................................................................................................................................. 3 2.4 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ................................................................................................. 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION ........................................................................................................................... 4

3.1 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................ 4 3.2 WARRANTY AND FIRST YEAR PLANNED MAINTENANCE ................................................................ 4 3.3 EXTENDED PLANNED MAINTENANCE CONTRACT ......................................................................... 5


MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC. Page 1 of 5 S:\admin\mpi\MP1716_Baguio General Hospital and Medical Trauma Center\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2018-04-06_100% DD\01-MECHANICAL\15800-Variable Refrigerant Flow System (VRF).doc

SECTION 15800

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM (VRF) PART 1 - GENERAL

Unit shall be air cooled, split type multi-system air conditioner consisting of one outdoor unit and plural indoor units, each having capability to cool independently for the requirements of the rooms. Up to 10 different type and capacity indoor units can be connected to one refrigerant circuit and controlled individually. Compressor shall be equipped with inverter controller, and capable of changing the rotating speed to follow variations in cooling load. Outdoor units shall be suitable for mix-match connection of following models:

Ceiling mounted cassette type (Double flow)

Ceiling mounted cassette type (Multi flow) – Super Cassette –

Ceiling mounted low silhouette duct type

Ceiling mounted built-in type

Ceiling mounted duct type

Ceiling suspended type

Wall mounted type

Floor standing type

Concealed floor standing type

Ceiling mounted cassette corner type

Ceiling concealed (all fresh air type)

The refrigerant piping shall be extended up to 100m with 50m (*1) level difference without any oil traps.

Air conditioner shall operate continuously at the ambient temperature of – 5oC in cooling. Both indoor unit outdoor unit are assembled, tested, and charged with refrigerant at the factory.

*1: The value is based on the case where the outdoor unit is located above indoor unit.

Where the outdoor unit is located under the indoor unit, the level difference is a maximum of 40m.

The refrigerant to be utilized shall be environmentally friendly with zero ODP.

R410A

R407C

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OUTDOOR UNIT

The outdoor unit shall be a factory assembled unit housed in a sturdy weatherproof casing constructed from rust-proofed mild steel panels coated with a baked enamel finish.

The outdoor unit of 8 and 10HP shall have two of scroll compressors and be able to operate even in case that inverter compressor is out of order. The outdoor unit of 5HP shall have one scroll compressor.

The connectable range of indoor units shall be from 0.8 to 10HP with all outdoor units.



The noise level shall not be more than 58 dB(A) at normal operation measured horizontally 1m away and 1.5m above ground. The outdoor unit shall be modular in design and should be allowed for side by side installation.

A. Compressor

The compressor shall be of highly efficient hermetic scroll type and equipped with inverter control capable of changing the speed in accordance to the cooling or heating load requirement.

The inverter shall be IGBT type to be efficient and quiet. (*2)

The 8 and 10HP outdoor unit shall have at least 20 steps of capacity control to meet load fluctuation and indoor unit individual control. The 5HP outdoor unit shall have at least 13 steps of capacity control.

*2: IGBT represents insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor.

B. Refrigerant Circuit

The refrigerant circuit shall include an accumulator, liquid and gas shut off valves and a solenoid vales.

All necessary safety devices shall be provided to ensure the safety operation of the system.

C. Safety Devices

The following safety devices shall be part of the outdoor unit; high pressure switch, fuse, crankcase heater, fusible plug, over current protector for inverter, and short recycling guard time.

D. Oil Recovery System

Unit shall be equipped with an oil recovery system to ensure stable operation with long refrigerant piping.

2.2 INDOOR UNIT

A. Heat Exchanger

The heat exchanger shall be constructed with copper tubes mechanically bonded to aluminum fins to form a cross fin coil.

The aluminum fins shall be covered by anti-corrosion resin film. Each indoor unit shall be of the ceiling mounted cassette type (Double flow type), or ceiling mounted cassette type (Multi-flow type), or ceiling mounted ducted type, or wall mounted type.

It shall have electronic control valve which control refrigerant flow rate in respond to load variations of the room.

B. Fan Section

The fan shall be of the dual suction multi blade type and statically and dynamically balanced to ensure low noise and vibration free operation.

The address of the indoor unit shall be set automatically in case of individual and group control.



In case of centralized control, it shall be set by liquid crystal remote controller. C. Casing

Casing shall be fabricated from Electro-Galvanized mild steel all metals in their casing shall be given rust preventive treatment. The casing shall be insulated internally with EDS Polyethylene Foam to prevent sweating of the casing under normal operating condition.

2.3 CONTROL

Computerized PID control shall be used to maintain a correct room temperature. Unit shall be equipped with a self-diagnosis for easy and quick maintenance and service. The LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) remote controller shall memorize the latest malfunction code for easy maintenance. It shall be able to control up to 16 indoor units and change fan speed and angle of swing flap individually in the group. A. Local Remote Controller

a. On/Off Operation for a single group b. Temperature setting for a single group

Cool/dry

Heat

Auto c. Fanspeed Setting

Hi/Mid-2/Mid-1 Low

Hi/Low d. Airflow Direction Setting

Air Flow Direction Angles; 100% -80% -60% -40% Swing.

Louver On/Off e. Indoor unit intake temp. f. Test run mode

To simplify operation of the system, the range of control has been limited to temperature and fanspeed.

The only wiring required is crossover wiring based on two wires signal lines.

Room temperature sensor is built in to the unit.

The indoor unit can be replaced with the body thermostat.

B. Central Remote Group Controller

A multi-functional centralized controller (central remote controller) shall be supplied as shown on the drawings.

It shall be able to control up to 64 zones or 64 groups (each group consists of Max. 16 units) or 128 nos. of indoor units with the following functions.

a. Temperature setting for each zone, or group, or indoor unit. b. On/Off as a zone or individual unit. c. Indication of operating condition. d. Select one of 10 operation modes for each zone.



The controller shall have wide screen liquid crystal display and can be wired by a non-polar 2-wire transmission cable to a distance of 1 km away from the indoor unit.

2.4 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

AC Equipment Manufacturer’s Brand Source Remarks

a. VRV Mitsubishi Electric Japan Basis of Design

b. VRV Mitsubishi Heavy Industries

Japan Approved Equal

PART 3 - EXECUTION Follow strictly manufacturer’s recommendation on system installation, testing and commissioning.

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Assemble air handling unit components following manufacturer's instructions for

handling, testing and operation. Repair damaged galvanized areas with paint in accordance with Military Spec. DOD-P-21035. Repair painted units by touch up of all scratches with finish paint material. Vacuum clean interior of air handling units prior to operation.

B. Leakage and test requirements for air handling units shall not exceed Leakage Class

(CL) 12 listed in SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual when tested at 1.5 times the design static pressure. Repair casing air leaks that can be heard or felt during normal operation and to meet test requirements.

C. Perform field mechanical (vibration) balancing in accordance with Section 15071. D. Seal and/or fill all openings between the casing and AHU components and utility

connections to prevent air leakage or bypass. E. Make casing penetrations according to the casing manufacturer's instructions and

details. Provide sleeves through the unit casing. F. AHU Manufacturer shall provide factory service for pre-start-up site inspection, start-

up and operating instruction to Owner personnel. G. Support interconnecting piping independently to prevent stresses from being

transmitted casing.

H. Lubricate in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions before operation.

3.2 WARRANTY AND FIRST YEAR PLANNED MAINTENANCE

A. Provide manufacturer's warranty against defects in materials and workmanship for a

period of 12 months from acceptance of equipment. Substantial performance of the work.

B. Include replacement of oil lost due to leaks during the warranty period.

C. Include all labour costs for replacement and/or repair of defective equipment and

materials.



D. Include for any additional costs to provide a complete planned maintenance program during the warranty period including for the costs of all labour and materials necessary to maintain the air handling units, starters and controls in first class working condition.

3.3 EXTENDED PLANNED MAINTENANCE CONTRACT

A. Submit a separate price to provide an extended warranty complete with planned and

emergency maintenance services on the air handling units for the first year following the completion of the standard warranty period in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended standard and schedule. Base price upon work being executed during normal working hours. Include separate emergency call out provisions. Prices submitted should be based upon current price lists and labour rates, details of which shall be included within the bid.

B. The planned maintenance contract may be renewed annually, at the option of the

owner, up to a total term of 10 years. The price shall be negotiated three months in advance of each annual contract expiry and shall be at the mutual agreement of both parties. Variation in annual prices shall reflect only changes in material and labour costs that can be substantiated by the manufacturer and agreed to by the Owner.

C. It shall be understood that the planned maintenance contract shall be commence in

any event before the termination of the warranty period. D. The planned maintenance contract services at each location shall, at minimum,

include: 1. Checking the performance of all equipment and components provided under

this contract on a regular schedule basis. Performance checking shall involve diagnostic tests, examination, cleaning, lubrication, adjustment and calibration, as appropriate, together with other function as recommended by the component manufacturer or as required to maintain the air handling units fully operational and in compliance with these Specifications.

2. Provide labour and material for the repair or replacement of worn or defective equipment and components where such items were initially provided as part of this Contract or the Preventative Maintenance Contract. Provide replacement items of the same quality as parts that are replaced.

E. Maintain an inventory of sufficient normal replacement parts, components, materials, tools, equipment and testing devices such that repairs or parts replacement can commence within 8 hours of notification that a machine is malfunctioning or inoperable. Have major replacement components available within 24 hours of component malfunction.

F. Undertake planned and emergency maintenance with qualified technicians who have

received adequate training in the maintenance and repair of the equipments and its components.

G. If overtime work is required to meet the intent of the planned maintenance contract,

then perform this work at no additional cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Metal Ducts and Accessories SECTION 15815

MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC. S:\admin\mpi\MP1716_Baguio General Hospital and Medical Trauma Center\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2018-04-06_100% DD\01-MECHANICAL\15815-Metal Ducts and Accessories.docx

PART 1 – GENERAL .......................................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................................................... 1 1.2 RELATED WORK ..................................................................................................................................... 1 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................................................ 1 1.4 SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................................................................... 2 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS ................................................................................................................... 3

PART 2 – PRODUCTS ....................................................................................................................................... 5

2.1 DUCT MATERIALS AND SEALANTS ......................................................................................................... 5 2.2 DUCT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION ............................................................................................ 5 2.3 DUCT LINER (WHERE INDICATED ON DRAWINGS) ................................................................................... 6 2.4 DUCT ACCESS DOORS, PANELS AND SECTIONS .................................................................................. 7 2.5 FIRE DAMPERS ....................................................................................................................................... 7 2.6 SMOKE DAMPERS ................................................................................................................................... 8 2.7 FIRE DOORS ........................................................................................................................................... 9 2.8 FLEXIBLE AIR DUCT CONNECTORS ........................................................................................................ 9 2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS ........................................................................................................................ 9 2.10 SOUND ATTENUATING UNITS ............................................................................................................... 10 2.11 GRAVITY TYPE AIR INTAKE/EXHAUST HOODS ..................................................................................... 10 2.12 PREFABRICATED ROOF CURBS............................................................................................................ 10 2.13 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS ........................................................................................................................ 10 2.14 FIRESTOPPING MATERIAL .................................................................................................................... 11 2.15 SEISMIC RESTRAINT FOR DUCTWORK ................................................................................................. 11 2.16 SHEET METAL DUCT ISOLATION .......................................................................................................... 11 2.17 THERMOMETER (AIR) ............................................................................................................................ 12 2.18 INSTRUMENT TEST FITTINGS................................................................................................................ 12 2.19 CONSTANT AIRFLOW REGULATOR (CAR) ........................................................................................... 12 2.20 PERFORATED DISTRIBUTION PLATE (WHERE APPLICABLE) ................................................................. 12 2.21 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS .................................................................................................................... 12 2.22 WIRE MESH GRILLE ............................................................................................................................. 14 2.23 MISCELLANEOUS DUCT ACCESSORIES ................................................................................................ 14

PART 3 – EXECUTION .................................................................................................................................... 18

3.1 INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................................................... 18 3.2 TESTING ................................................................................................................................................ 19 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING.................................................................................................................. 20 3.4 SCHEDULE ............................................................................................................................................ 20


MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC. Page 1 of 20 S:\admin\mpi\MP1716_Baguio General Hospital and Medical Trauma Center\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2018-04-06_100% DD\01-MECHANICAL\15815-Metal Ducts and Accessories.docx

SECTION 15815 METAL DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Ductwork and accessories for HVAC including the following:

1. Supply air, return air, outside air, exhaust, and relief systems.

B. Definitions:

1. SMACNA Standards as used in this specifications means the HVAC Duct

Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible.

2. Seal or Sealing: Use of liquid or mastic sealant, with or without compatible tape overlay, or gasketing of flanged joints, to keep air leakage at duct joints, seams and connections to an acceptable minimum.

3. Duct Pressure Classification: SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards,

Metal and Flexible.

4. Exposed Duct: Exposed to view in a finished room.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provisions

B. Section 07841 - Through Penetration Firestopping Systems

C. Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods

D. Section 15071 - Noise and Vibration Control

E. Section 15840 - Air Terminal Units

F. Section 15725 - Typical Air Handling Units

G. Section 15900 - HVAC Instrumentation and Controls


A. Refer to article, QUALITY ASSURANCE, in Section 15010. B. Fire Safety Code: Comply with NFPA 90A.

C. Duct System Construction and Installation: Referenced SMACNA Standards are the

minimum acceptable quality.

D. Duct Sealing: Air Leakage Criteria, and Air Leakage Tests:

1. All ducts shall be sealed as per SMACNAS duct sealing requirements in Section 1 of SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual for actual duct pressure classes shown on the drawings. All ducts less than 500 Pa (2 inches w.g) pressure classification shall meet requirements of class C seal.



2. At the beginning of the work, leak test representative samples of the duct construction for each pressure class greater than 750 Pa (3 inches w.g). The sample specimen shall be minimum 25% of the ductwork of the selected system representing each pressure class, and shall include at least five transverse joints, typical seams, an access door, and at least two typical branch connections and an elbow. The sample specimen shall be part of the actual ductwork to be installed for the project.

3. The leakage amount shall not exceed the permissible leakage rate in CFM

per 100 square feet of duct surface for the pressure and leakage classes shown in table below. The permissible leakage rate shall be calculated as per Section 4 of SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.

DUCT CONSTRUCTION CLASS (Representing Pressure Class)

Leakage Class

2490 pa (10 inches w.g) and above

3

1500 pa (6 inches w.g)

6


6


12

4. Follow leakage testing procedures, test apparatus, and test reports to be

submitted to the Consultant as per SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. All tests shall be performed in the presence of the Consultant. The Test and Balance agency shall measure and record duct leakage as specified herein, and shall report any unusual conditions to the Consultant and identify leakage source.

5. If a specimen fails to meet the permissible leakage level, the contractor shall

modify all ductwork installed represented by this specimen to bring it into compliance and shall retest it until acceptable leakage is demonstrated to the Consultant.

6. Tests and re-tests and necessary repairs shall be completed prior to

insulation and concealment of ducts.

E. Duct accessories exposed to the air stream, such as dampers of all types (except smoke dampers) and access openings, shall be of the same material as the duct or provide at least the same level of corrosion resistance.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Manufacturer’s Literature and Data:

1. Rectangular ducts:

a. Schedules of duct systems, materials and selected SMACNA construction alternatives for joints, sealing, gage and reinforcement.

b. Duct liner. c. Sealants and gaskets



d. Access doors.

2. Round and flat oval duct construction details:

a. Manufacturer’s details for duct fittings: b. Duct liner. c. Sealants and gaskets. d. Access sections. e. Installation instructions.

3. Volume dampers, back draft dampers.

4. Upper hanger attachments.

5. Fire dampers, fire doors, and smoke dampers with installation instructions and certificates of origin.

6. Sound attenuators, including pressure drop and acoustic performance.

7. Flexible ducts and clamps, with manufacturer’s installation instructions.

8. Flexible connections.

9. Air intake/exhaust hoods.

10. Instrument test fittings.

11. Perforated distribution plates.

12. Diffusers, registers, grilles and accessories, including certificate of origin.

13. Details and design analysis of alternate or optional duct systems.

C. Coordination Drawings: Refer to article, DRAWINGS AND APPROVAL, in Section

15010.

D. For equipment and material submittals, provide certificate of origin to be included in the submittal and bill of lading before delivery to site.



A. Air Diffusion Council Test Code:

1062R4 Certification, Rating, and Test Manual (1977)

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

A167 Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel, Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip A527 Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum

Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality.



A569 Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent), Hot Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality

B209 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy

Sheet and Plate C1071 Standard Specification for Thermal and Acoustical Insulation

(Mineral Fiber, Duct Lining Material) E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials.

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

90A Standard for the Installations of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

96 Standard for the Installation of Equipment for the Removal of

Smoke and Grease-Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment.

D. National Uniform Seismic Installation Guideline (NUSIG)

E. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA):

HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems

F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

181 UL Standard for Safety Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors

555 UL Standard for Fire Dampers 555S UL Standard for Safety Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in

Smoke Control System

G. Australian Standards AS 1682.1 – 1990 Fire dampers Part 1 – Specifications AS 1530.4 – 1990 Methods for fire tests on building materials, components and

structures Part 4 – Fire-resistance tests of elements of building

construction H. ISO834: 1975 Fire-resistance tests – Elements of building construction



PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCT MATERIALS AND SEALANTS

A. General: Except for systems specified otherwise, construct ducts, casings, and

accessories of galvanized sheet steel, ASTM A653 or A875, coating G60 (Z180) for dry indoor ducts and G115 (Z350) for ducts exposed outdoors: or equal; or aluminum sheet, ASTM B209, alloy 1100, 3003 or 5052.

B. Specified Corrosion Resistant Systems: Stainless steel sheet, ASTM A167, Class

302 or 304, Condition A (annealed), Finish No. 4 for exposed ducts and Finish No. 2B for concealed ducts. For chlorinated indoor pools, STP exhaust ducts and other ducts inside the STP room, and other highly – corrosive environment and applications.

1. Damper frames, damper blades and shafts, shall be stainless steel or PVC

coated galvanized steel, with non-ferrous bearing material.

C. Grease Duct: Double wall Metalbestos Model PS, factory-built grease duct, UL labeled and complying with NFPA 96 may be furnished in lieu of specified materials for kitchen and grill hood exhaust duct. Installation and accessories shall comply with the manufacturers catalog data. Outer jacket or exposed ductwork shall be stainless steel. Square and rectangular duct shown on the drawings will have to be converted to equivalent round size.

D. Joint Sealing: Refer to SMACNA Standards, paragraph S1.8 and S1.9

2. Sealant: Elastomeric compound, gun or brush grade, maximum 25 flame spread and 50 smoke developed (dry state) compounded specifically for sealing ductwork as recommended by the manufacturer. Generally provide liquid sealant, with or without compatible tape, for low clearance slip joints and heavy, permanently elastic, mastic type where clearances are larger. Oil base caulking and glazing compounds are not acceptable because they do not retain elasticity and bond.

3. Tape: Use only tape specifically designated by the sealant manufacturer and

apply only over wet sealant. Pressure sensitive tape shall not be used on bare metal or on dry sealant.

4. Gaskets in Flanged Joints: Soft neoprene.

E. Approved factory made joints such as DUCTMATE SYSTEM may be used.

2.2 DUCT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION

A. Follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.

B. Duct Pressure Classes: As shown on the drawings.

C. Seal Classes: As shown on the drawings and in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air

Duct Leakage Test Manual.

D. Kitchen and Grill Hood (Ventilator) Exhaust Ducts: Comply with NFPA 96.

1. Material: 1.6mm (16 gage) steel sheet (black iron), ASTM A569, or 1.3mm (18 gage) stainless steel. Use stainless steel for exposed duct in occupied areas.



E. Round and Flat Oval Ducts: Furnish duct and fittings made by the same manufacturer

to insure good fit of slop joints. When submitted and approved in advance, round and flat oval duct, with size converted on the basis of equal pressure drop, may be furnished in lieu of rectangular duct design shown on the drawings.

1. Elbows: Diameters 80 through 200 mm (3 through 8 inches) shall be two

section die stamped, all others shall be gored construction, maximum 18 degree angle. With all seams continuously welded or standing seam. Coat galvanized areas of fittings damaged by welding with corrosion resistant aluminum paint or galvanized repair compound.

2. Provide bellmouth, conical tees or taps, laterals, reducers, and other low loss

fittings as shown in SMACNA Standards.

3. Ribbed Duct Option: Lighter gage round/oval duct and fittings may be furnished provided certified tests indicating that the rigidity and performance is equivalent to SMACNA standard gage ducts are submitted.

a. Ducts: Manufacturer’s published standard gage, G90 coating, spiral

lock seam construction with an intermediate standing rib. b. Fittings: May be manufacturer’s standard as shown in published

catalogs, fabricated by spot welding and bonding with neoprene base cement or machine formed seam in lieu of continuous welded seams.

4. Provide flat side reinforcement of oval ducts as recommended by the

manufacturer and SMACNA Standard S3.13. Because of high pressure loss, do not use internal tie-rod reinforcement unless approved by the Consultant.

F. Canopy Hoods, Reagent Grade Water Treatment Room Exhausts: Constructed of

1.3, (18 gauge) stainless steel.

G. Casings and Plenums: Construct in accordance with SMACNA Standards Section VI, including curbs, access doors, pipe penetrations, eliminators and drain pans. Access doors shall be hollow metal, insulated with latches and door pulls, 500 mm (20 inches) wide by 1200 - 1350 mm (48-54 inches) high. Provide viewport in the doors where shown. Provide drain for outside air louver plenum. Outside air plenum shall have exterior insulation. Drain piping shall be routed to the nearest floor drain.

H. Volume Dampers: Single blade or opposed blade, multi-louver type as detailed in

SMACNA Standards.

I. Duct Hangers and Supports: Refer to SMACNA Standards Section IV. Avoid use of trapeze hangers for round duct.

2.3 DUCT LINER (WHERE INDICATED ON DRAWINGS)

A. Duct sizes shown on drawings for lined duct are clear opening inside lining.

B. Rectangular Duct or Casing Liner: ASTM C1071, Type I (flexible), or Type II (board),

25 mm (one inch) minimum thickness matte face with anti-microbial coating, applied with mechanical fasteners and 100 percent coverage of adhesive in conformance with SMACNA, Duct Liner Application Standard.

C. Round and Oval Duct Liner: Factory fabricated double-walled with 25 mm (one inch)

thick sound insulation and inner perforated galvanized metal liner. Construction shall comply with flame and smoke rating required by NFPA 90A. Metal liner shall be 1.0 to 0.60 mm (20 to 24 gage) having perforations not exceeding 2.4 mm (3/32 inch) diameter and approximately 22 percent free area. Metal liner for fittings need to be



perforated. Assemblies shall be complete with continuous sheet mylar liner, 2 mil thickness, between the perforated liner and the insulation to prevent erosion of the insulation. Provide liner couplings/spacer for outer shell to liner size. Provide liner spacing/concentricity leaving airway unobstructed.

2.4 DUCT ACCESS DOORS, PANELS AND SECTIONS

A. Provide access doors, sized and located for maintenance work, upstream, in the

following locations:

1. Each duct mounted coil and humidifier.

2. Each fire damper (for link service), smoke damper and automatic control damper.

3. Each duct mounted smoke detector.

4. For cleaning kitchen hood exhaust duct, locate access doors at 6 m (20 feet)

intervals and at each change in duct direction.

B. Openings shall be at large as feasible in small ducts, 300 mm (12 inch by 12 inch) minimum where possible. Access sections in insulated ducts shall be double-wall, insulated. Transparent shatterproof covers are preferred for uninsulated ducts.

1. For rectangular ducts: Refer to SMACNA Standards (Figure 2-12).

2. For round and flat oval duct: Access sections shall be not less than 1.0 mm

(20 gage) housing welded or riveted to a duct section.

C. For additional details, refer to item 2.24 – G.

2.5 FIRE DAMPERS

Curtain Type:

A. Description: Curtain type, UL labeled assembly with frame, interlocking blades, and 165 degrees F rated fusible link. Provide stainless steel closure springs and latches for horizontal installations. Configure with blades stored out of the airstream.

B. Provide assemblies rated to maintain the integrity of the rated construction in which the damper is to be installed.

C. Select thin-line dampers with nominal 2-inch-thick frame for installation in walls between or behind grilles.

D. A view port for damper and activating mechanism shall be provided. Blade Type: A. Galvanized steel, interlocking blade type, UL listing and label, 1 ½ hour rating, 70 ºC

(160 ºF), fusible link, 100 percent free opening with no part of the blade stack or damper frame in the air stream.

B. Fire dampers in fume hood exhaust or wet air exhaust shall be stainless steel

construction, all others may be galvanized steel.

1. The damper frame may be of design and length as to function as the mounting sleeve, thus eliminating the need for a separate sleeve, as allowed by UL 555. Otherwise provide sleeves and mounting angles, minimum 1.9



mm (14 gage), required to provide installation equivalent to the damper manufacturer’s UL test installation.

2. Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions conforming to UL rating test,

including certificate of origin.

3. Combination fire and smoke dampers: multi-louver or curtain type units meeting all requirements of both dampers shall be used where shown and may be used at the Contractor’s option where applicable.

2.6 SMOKE DAMPERS

A. Maximum air velocity, through free area of open damper, and pressure loss: low

pressure and medium pressure duct (supply, return, exhaust, outside air): 450 m/min (1500 fpm). Maximum static pressure loss: 32 Pa (0.13 inch WG).

B. Maximum air leakage, closed damper: 0.32 cubic meters/min/square meter (4.0 cfm

per square foot) at 750 Pa (3 inches wg) differential pressure.

C. Minimum requirements for dampers:

1. Meet requirements of Table 6-1 of UL 555S, except the Fire Endurance and Hose Stream test.

2. Frame: Galvanized steel channel with side, top and bottom stops or seals.

3. Blades: Galvanized steel, parallel type preferably, 300 mm (12 inch)

maximum width, edges sealed with neoprene, rubber or felt, if required to meet minimum leakage. Airfoil (streamlined) type for minimum noise generation and pressure drop are preferred for duct mounted dampers.

4. Shafts: Galvanized steel.

5. Bearing: Nylon, bronze sleeve or ball type.

6. Hardware: Zinc plated.

7. Operation: Automatic open/close. No smoke damper that requires manual

reset or link replacement after actuation is acceptable. See drawings for required control operation.

8. Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions conforming to UL rating test, including certificate of origin.

D. Motor operator (actuator): Provide pneumatic or electric as required by the automatic

control system, externally mounted on stand-offs to allow complete insulation coverage.

E. Combination Smoke/Fire Dampers 1. UL rated (UL555S) damper assembly rated to maintain the integrity of the

floor/ceiling (F/C) and roof/ceiling (R/C) assemblies, consisting of airfoil blades with silicone rubber blade seal and 250 degree F rated fusible link. Damper shall be class II.

2. For hard-ducted applications, supply standard damper frame, and for flex-ducted applications, supply extended frame damper box.



3. Provide electric actuator for smoke signal actuation. Damper shall be normally closed. Damper actuator shall be a rated part of the UL listed assembly.

2.7 FIRE DOORS

A. Galvanized steel, interlocking blade type, UL listing and label, 71 ºC (160 ºF) fusible

link, 3 hour rating and approved for openings in Class A fire walls with rating up to 4 hours, 100 percent free opening with no part of the blade stack or damper frame in the air stream.

B. Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions conforming to UL rating test, including certificate of origin.

2.8 FLEXIBLE AIR DUCT CONNECTORS

A. General: Factory fabricated, complying with NFPA 90A for connectors not passing

through floors of buildings. Flexible ducts shall not penetrate any fire or smoke barrier which is required to have a fire resistance rating of one hour or more. Flexible duct length shall not exceed 1.5 m (5 feet). Provide insulated acoustical air duct connectors in supply air duct systems and elsewhere as shown.

B. Flexible ducts shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., complying with UL

181. Ducts larger than 200 mm (8 inches) in diameter shall be Class 1. Ducts 200 mm (8 inches) in diameter and smaller may be Class 1 or Class 2.

C. Insulated Flexible Air Duct: Factory made including mineral fiber insulation with

maximum C factor of 0.25 at 24 ºC (75 ºF) mean temperature, encased with a low permeability moisture barrier outer jacket, having a puncture resistance of not less than 50 Beach Units.

Acoustic insertion loss shall not be less than 3 dB per 300 mm (foot) of straight duct, at 500 Hz, based on 150 mm (6 inch) duct, of 750 m/min (2500 fpm).

D. Application Criteria:

1. Temperature range: - 18 to 93 ºC (0 to 200 ºF) internal. 2. Maximum working velocity: 1200 m/min (4000 feet per minute). 3. Minimum working pressure, inches of water gage: 2500 Pa (10 inches)

positive, 500 Pa (2 inches) negative.

F. Duct Clamps: 100 percent nylon strap, 80 kg (175 pounds) minimum loop tensile strength manufactured for this purpose or stainless steel strap with cadmium plated worm gear tightening device. Apply clamps with sealant and as approved for UL 181, Class 1 installation.

2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

A. Where duct connections are made to fans and air handling units, install a non-

combustible flexible connection of 822 g (29 ounce) neoprene coated fiberglass fabric approximately 150 mm (6 inches) wide. For connections exposed to sun and weather provide hypalon coating in lieu of neoprene. Burning characteristics shall conform to NFPA 90A. Securely fasten flexible connections to round ducts with stainless steel or zinc-coated iron draw band with worm gear fastener. For rectangular connections, crimp fabric to sheet metal and fasten sheet metal to ducts by screws 50 mm (2 inches) on center. Fabric shall not be stressed other than by air pressure. Allow at least 25 mm (one inch) slack to insure that no vibration is transmitted.



2.10 SOUND ATTENUATING UNITS

General: In addition to those shown on the schematic diagrams, the Contractor shall provide duct-mounted sound attenuators where required to satisfy the Room Noise Criteria specified under Section 15071, without additional cost to the Owner. Adjustments of fan ESP shall be done accordingly.

Ordinary (Air Systems Having 85% Efficiency Air Filters)

A. Cleaning, not less than 1.0 mm (20 gage) galvanized sheet steel, or 1.3 mm (18 gage) aluminum fitted with suitable flanges to make clean airtight connections to ductwork. Sound-absorbent material faced with glass fiber cloth and covered with not less than 0.6 mm (24 gage) or heavier galvanized perforated sheet steel, or 0.85 mm (22 gage) or heavier perforated aluminum. Perforations shall not exceed 4 mm (5/32-inch) diameter, approximately 25 percent free area. Sound absorbent material shall be long glass fiber acoustic blanket meeting requirements of NFPA 90A.

B. Entire unit shall be completely air tight and free of vibration and buckling at internal

static pressures up to 2000 Pa (8 inch water gage) at operating velocities.

C. Pressure drop through each unit: Not to exceed indicated value at design air acoustical performance 80 Pascal maximum.

D. Cap open ends of attenuators at factory with plastic, heavy duty paper, cardboard, or other appropriate material to prevent entrance of dirt, water, or any other foreign matter to inside of attenuator. Caps shall not be removed until attenuator is installed in duct system.

2.11 GRAVITY TYPE AIR INTAKE/EXHAUST HOODS

A. Aluminum, ASTM B209, louvered, spun, or fabricated using panel sections with roll-

formed edges, 13 mm (1/2 inch) mesh aluminum or galvanized welded wire bird screen, with gravity or motorized dampers were shown, accessible interior, designed for 2200 km/h winds.

B. See hood schedule on the drawings. Sizes shown designate throat size. Area of hood perimeter opening shall be not less than the throat area.

C. Dampers for Gravity Ventilators without Duct Connection: Construct damper of the

same material as the ventilator and design to completely close opening or remain wide open. Hold damper in closed position by a brass chain and catch. Extend chains 300 mm (12 inches) below and engage catch when damper is closed.

2.12 PREFABRICATED ROOF CURBS

Galvanized steel or extruded aluminum 300 mm (12 inches) above finish roof service, continuous welded corner seams, treated wood nailer, 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) thick, 48 kg/cubic meter (3 pound/cubic feet) density rigid mineral fiberboard insulation with metal liner, built-in cant strip (except for gypsum or tectum decks). For surface insulated roof deck, provide raised cant strip (recessed mounting flange) to start at the upper surface of the insulation. Curbs shall be constructed for pitched roof or ridge mounting as required to keep top of curb level.

2.13 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

Section 15050.



2.14 FIRESTOPPING MATERIAL

Refer to Section 07841.

2.15 SEISMIC RESTRAINT FOR DUCTWORK

A. Ductwork shall be supported and braced to resist all directional (transverse,

longitudinal and vertical) forces.

B. Brace all duct branches, minimum of one brace per branch.

C. Provide required bracing material.

D. Provide one of the following options:

1. Design and installation to meet the criteria listed above, and meet requirements of the latest Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA), Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems for the prescribed Seismic Hazard Level (SHL).

2. Design and installation to meet the criteria listed above, and meet the most

current requirements of the National Uniform Seismic Installation Guidelines (NUSIG). Contractor shall submit all design tables and information for the design force levels, stamped and signed by a professional engineer registered in the place where project is located.

3. Where SMACNA or NUSIG requirements are not met completely, submit

proposed alternate details and calculations to completely address seismic bracing requirements. Such designs shall use more severe of the Local Code and the Uniform Building Code requirements for determining seismic forces, and be performed, stamped and signed by a professional engineer registered in the place where project is located. Revise if necessary any details shown on the contract drawings for vertical support and lateral bracing, and submit for the approval of the Consultant to meet the design criteria listed above.

2.16 SHEET METAL DUCT ISOLATION

A. All sheet metal ducts and air plenums within mechanical rooms or within a distance of

50 feet total duct length of connected vibration-isolated equipment (whichever is longer) shall be isolated from the building structure by either Unit SLRS or 30N isolators (whichever is applicable to the mounting condition). All isolators shall achieve 1.0-inch minimum static deflection.

B. Ducts within the specified limits which penetrate the building construction shall be

isolated from the building by using resilient penetration sleeve/seals. Resilient lateral guides shall be used wherever lateral support of vertical duct runs is required within the specified limits.

C. Flexible Duct Connections: Sheet metal ducts or plenum openings shall be squarely

aligned with the fan discharge, fan intake, or adjacent duct section prior to installation of the flexible connection, so that the clear length is approximately equal all the way around the perimeter. Flexible duct connections shall not be installed until this provision is met. The fan unit or adjacent duct section shall be able to move 1 inch in any direction without causing metal-to-metal contact or stretching taut the flexible connection.



2.17 THERMOMETER (AIR)

Section 15900 - HVAC Instrumentation and Controls.

2.18 INSTRUMENT TEST FITTINGS

A. Manufactured type with a minimum 50 mm (two inch) length for insulated duct, and a

minimum 25 mm (one inch) length for duct not insulated. Test hole shall have a flat gasket for rectangular ducts and a concave gasket for round ducts at the base, and a screw cap to prevent air leakage.

B. Provide instrument test holes at each duct or casing mounted temperature sensor or

transmitter, and at entering and leaving side of each heating coil, cooling coil, and heat recovery unit.

2.19 CONSTANT AIRFLOW REGULATOR (CAR)

Each regulator shall solely operate on duct pressure and require no external power supply. Each regulator shall be preset and factory calibrated requiring no field adjustment to the airflows as indicated on the design drawing, and shall be rated for use in air temperatures ranging from -25o to 140o F (-32o to 60o C). Constant airflow regulators shall be capable of maintaining constant airflow within +/- 10% of scheduled flow rates (15% for units 50 cfm or less), within the operating range of 0.2 to 0.8 in. w.g. differential pressure, or 0.6 to 2.4. in. w.g. on high-pressure models. Sound power levels shall not exceed those for each size and cfm rating as scheduled. Regulators shall be provided as an assembly consisting of a flame resistant plastic body with self-inflating silicon element housed within a .75mm galvanized steel sleeve or flanged plate for mounting in either round or rectangular duct. Each round sleeve must be fitted with a brush gasket to assure perimeter air tightness with the interior surface of the duct. All Constant Airflow Regulators will require no maintenance and must be warranted for a period of no less than five years. Constant Airflow Regulators shall be installed in tight ducting systems in accordance with all applicable codes and manufacturer’s instructions.

2.20 PERFORATED DISTRIBUTION PLATE (WHERE APPLICABLE)

A. Furnish under Section 15725 - Typical Air Handling Units

B. Material: 60 percent free area perforated plate made of 3.5 mm (10 gage) galvanized

steel with round openings equally spaced over entire face area. Maximum air pressure drop through distribution plate for air volumes scheduled shall be 25 Pa (0.10-inch WG). Bolt plate to a sturdy steel support frame.

C. Location: Where shown on the drawings.

2.21 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

A. Materials:

1. Steel or aluminum except that all units installed in operating rooms shall be aluminum or stainless steel. Provide manufacturer's standard gasket.

2. Exposed Fastenings: The same material as the respective inlet or outlet. Fasteners for aluminum may be stainless steel.

3. Contractor shall review all ceiling drawings and details and provide all ceiling mounted devices with appropriate dimensions and trim for the specific locations.



B. Performance Test Data: In accordance with Air Diffusion Council code 1062R4. Refer to Section 15071, for NC criteria.

C. Air Supply Outlets:

1. Ceiling Diffusers: Suitable for surface mounting, exposed T-bar or special tile ceilings, baked white powder coated finish, square or round neck connection as shown on the drawings. Provide plaster frame for units in plaster ceilings.

a. Square, louver, fully adjustable pattern: Round neck, surface mounting unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Provide equalizing or control grid and volume control damper.

b. Louver face type: Square or rectangular, removable core for 1, 2, 3, or 4 way directional pattern. Provide equalizing or control grid and opposed blade damper.

c. Perforated face type: Manual adjustment for 1, 2, 3, or 4 way horizontal air distribution pattern without change of air volume or pressure. Provide equalizing or control grid and opposed blade over overlapping blade damper. Perforated face diffusers for VAV systems shall have the pattern controller on the inner face, rather than in the neck and designed to discharge air horizontally at the ceiling maintaining a constant effect.

d. Slot diffuser/plenum:

1) Galvanized steel boot lined with 13 mm (1/2 inch) thick fiberglass conforming to NFPA 90A and complying to UL 181 for erosion. Form slots or use adjustable pattern controllers, to provide stable, horizontal air flow pattern over a wide range of operating conditions.

2) Provide inlet connection diameter equal to duct diameter shown on drawings or provide transition coupling if necessary.

3) Maximum pressure drop at design flow rate: 37 Pa (0.15 inch) wg.

2. Linear Grilles and Diffusers: Extruded aluminum, manufacturer's standard finish, positive holding concealed fasteners.

a. Margin: Flat, 20 mm (3/4 inch) wide.

b. Bars: Minimum 5 mm (3/16 inch) wide by 20 mm (3/4 inch) deep, zero deflection unless otherwise shown. Reinforce bars on 450 mm (18 inch) center for sidewall units and on 150 mm (6 inch) center for units installed in floor or sills.

c. Provide opposed blade damper and equalizing or control grid where shown.

D. Return and Exhaust Registers and Grilles: Provide opposed blade damper without removable key operator for registers.

1. Finish: Baked white powder coated for ceiling mounted units. Wall units shall have a prime coat for field painting, or shall be extruded aluminum with manufacturer's standard aluminum finish.



2. Standard Type: Fixed horizontal face bars set at 30 to 45 degrees, approximately 30 mm (1-1/4 inch) margin.

3. Perforated Face Type: To match supply units.

4. Grid Core Type: 20 mm by 20 mm (3/4 inch by 3/4 inch) core with 30 mm (1-1/4 inch) margin.

5. Linear Type: To match supply units.

6. Door Grilles: Are furnished with the doors.

7. Filter Grilles: Standard face hinged to a mounting frame with space for a 25 mm (one inch) throwaway filter. Hold face closed by a locking screw. Provide retaining clips to hold filter in place. Provide one inch thick fiberglass throwaway filter.

2.22 WIRE MESH GRILLE

A. Fabricate grille with 20 x 20mm mesh 13 mm (1/2 inch) galvanized steel or aluminum hardware cloth in a spot welded galvanized steel frame with approximately 30 mm (1-1/4 inch) margin.

B. Use grilles where shown in unfinished areas such as mechanical rooms.

2.23 MISCELLANEOUS DUCT ACCESSORIES

A. General: Fabricate duct accessories from the same material as the ductwork in which

the accessory will be installed, unless specified otherwise.

B. Manual Splitter Dampers: Fabricated from same material as the ductwork two gauges heavier than duct in which installed with splitters long enough to completely close the branch duct without flutter. In all cases, blade dimension in direction of airflow shall be 1-1/2 times width of branch duct not less than 12 inches. Provide a locking quadrant and align its operating handle with the damper blade.

C. Manual Single Blade Volume or Balancing Dampers (2 inches WC Construction):

1. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA standards, except as detailed on the Drawings and as specified.

1. Blade and fastener material shall be the same as the ductwork in which the

damper is to be installed. Rod shall be galvanized steel. Blade shall be riveted or bolted to rod.

2. Dampers shall be of a length suitable to shut off branch ducts without causing

damper flutter.

3. Cross break dampers and stiffen edges with two edge brakes for rigidity. Provide additional stiffening angles, as required.

4. Provide continuous rods and outside end bearings on all damper assemblies.

Additionally, provide inside end bearings on internally lined ducts. Mark the ends of damper rods with a saw cut to indicate blade position.

5. Maximum single blade balancing damper size shall be 12 by 48 inches.

Provide manual opposed-blade balancing dampers in ducts wider than 12 inches. Section damper blades over 48 inches wide horizontally.

6. Provide a specified regulator or locking quadrant for adjustment.



D. Manual Opposed-Blade Volume or Balancing Dampers (2 inches WC Construction)

1. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA standards, except as detailed on the Drawings and as specified.

2. Blade, rod, linkage, frame, and fastener material shall be the same as the

ductwork in which the damper is to be installed.

3. Blades shall be center crimped for stiffness and to receive pins and rods, and edge crimped to interlock with adjacent blades on full shutoff. Provide additional stiffening angles, as required.

4. Provide a prime coated or galvanized channel frame for mounting of

bearings, with angle stops on top and bottom.

5. Provide continuous rods on all drive damper assemblies. Mark the ends of the damper shaft extension with a saw cut to indicate blade position.

6. Linkage and hardware shall be SMACNA accepted as manufactured by

Ventlok, arranged for gang operation and opposed-blade action without jamming or racking.

7. Bushings for galvanized steel dampers shall be oil impregnated bronze, sized

to match with pins. Bushings for aluminum and stainless steel ductwork shall be nylon or other suitable thermoset plastic.

8. Blades shall be a minimum of 18-gauge steel or equal strength aluminum.

Maximum blade width shall be 12 inches. Provide multi-section dampers for dampers over 48 inches wide.

9. Provide specified locking quadrants for ductwork serving non-clean areas.

Provide specified dial regulators for ductwork serving cleanrooms.

E. Regulators and Quadrants:

1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Ventlok as specified.

b. Duro-Dyne Specline/Quadline equivalent.

2. Concealed Accessible Insulated Ductwork:

a. Ventlok Figure 635 dial regulator.

b. Ventlok Figure 555 locking quadrant.

3. Concealed Accessible Insulated Ductwork:

a. Ventline Figures 637 or 639 dial regulator to match insulation thickness.

b. Ventline Figure 555 locking quadrant with an elevated standoff of the

same height as the insulation thickness.

4. Concealed Inaccessible Ductwork: Ventlock Figure 677 concealed damper regulator with plain cover, extended rod, and universal joints and miter gears as required.



5. Exposed Uninsulated Ductwork in Finished Spaces: Hi-Vel Ventlok Figure 640 dial regulator with 609 end bearing.

6. Insulated Ductwork Serving Cleanrooms:

a. Ventlok Figure 644 dial regulator with Hi-Vel hardware, and Figure

609 end bearings. b. Locking quadrants as specified for non-cleanroom areas may be

furnished, providing that the damper hardware is airtight at duct penetrations without the use of additional sealants.

F. Turning Vanes:


a. Elgen All-Tight b. Duro-Dyne Type VR. c. Titus d. Tuttle and Bailey

2. Description: Hat channel or embossed vane side rails with shop-fabricated

double-blade turning vanes of the same material as the ductwork.

3. Provide factory fabricated, double thickness galvanized sheet metal turning vanes with air foil contour in all 90º square elbows and elsewhere as indicated on drawings. Shop fabricated turning vanes shall be submitted for approval prior to fabrication.

4. Acoustical Turning Vanes: Double thickness galvanized sheet steel or

aluminum, non-reflective air foil contour type vane with perforated surface, a core of sound absorbent material and nailing.

G. Duct Access Doors:


a. Ventlok b. Duro-Dyne c. Ruskin

2. Description:

a. Double wall access door with minimum 1-inch thick insulation between walls, angle or Z-frame, sealing gasket around the periphery, double layer Plexiglass vision panel with air space between, hinged with Ventlok No. 100 quick release latches. Access doors smaller than 12 inches square may be secured with sash locks.



3. Sizes shall be as follows:

Duct Size Frame Size No. of Hinge

Access Requirements

6” through 8” 6 x 8 2 Hand Hole

10” 10 x 12 2 One hand and sight

12” through 16” 12 x 16 2 Two hands and head sight

Greater than 16 x 24 3 Body entry 16”

a. Provide sufficient Ventlok No. 360 sealant for application between the

door frame and duct for installations in ductwork with seal Class A and B, and in ductwork serving cleanrooms.

b. Patch plates attached with screw fasteners are prohibited, except in

locations where they are specifically noted.

H. Spin-in Fittings – Description: Straight pattern sheet metal spin-in fitting with 45 degree scoop designed for connection to sheet metal ductwork. Assemble using spot welds or rivets. Button-punch fabrication is prohibited. Provide a specified balancing damper in the ductwork immediately downstream of each spin-in fitting.

I. Backdraft Dampers:


a. American Warning and Ventilating. b. Dowco c. Ruskin d. Field

2. Description a. Commercial quality, multiblade, parralel action, counterbalanced

backdraft dampers of 16-gauge galvanized steel, or extruded aluminum, with center pivoted blades of maximum 6 inches width with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in rattle-free manner with 90 degree stop, and plated steel pivot pin. Channel frame.

b. Gravity backdraft dampers smaller than 18 by 18 inches furnished

with air moving equipment, may be the air moving equipment manufacturers standard construction.

3. Ratings: 3,500 fpm maximum velocity, 1 inch WC backpressure, set to relieve

above 0.02 inch WC differential pressure.

J. Upblast Dampers for Smoke Exhaust:

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Ruskin

2. Description: Round upblast damper with two-piece design frame shall be 10-gauge galvanized steel with 1-1/2 inch flange. Blades shall be 20-gauge galvanized steel with ¾ inch axle and stainless steel bearing sleeve.

3. Damper shall have an 18-gauge galvanized wind screen to shield blades

from wind pressure.



4. Damper shall be Ruskin UBD100.


3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with provisions of Section 15050, particularly regarding coordination with other trades and work in existing buildings.

B. Fabricate, install and test ductwork and accessories in accordance with referenced SMACNA Standards:

1. Drawings show the general layout of ductwork and accessories but do not show all required fittings and offsets that may be necessary to connect ducts to equipment, boxes, diffusers, grilles, etc., and to coordinate with other trades. Fabricate ductwork based on field measurements. Provide all necessary fittings and offsets at no additional cost to the Owner. Coordinate with other trades for space available and relative location of HVAC equipment and accessories on ceiling grid. Duct sizes on the drawings are inside dimensions which shall be altered by Contractor to other dimensions with the same air handling characteristics where necessary to avoid interferences and clearance difficulties.

2. Provide duct transitions, offsets and connections to dampers, coils, and other equipment in accordance with SMACNA Standards, Section II. Provide streamliner, when an obstruction cannot be avoided and must be taken in by a duct. Repair galvanized areas with galvanizing repair compound.

3. Provide bolted construction and tie-rod reinforcement in accordance with SMACNA Standards, Section VI.

4. Construct casings, eliminators, and pipe penetrations in accordance with SMACNA Standards, Section VI. Design casing access doors to swing against air pressure so that pressure helps to maintain a tight seal.

C. Install duct hangers and supports in accordance with SMACNA Standards, Section IV.

D. Install fire dampers in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to conform to the installation used for the rating test.

E. Seal openings around duct penetrations of floors and fire rated partitions with fire stop material as required by NFPA 90A.

F. Flexible duct installation: Refer to SMACNA Standards, Section III. Ducts shall be continuous, single pieces not over 1.5 m (5 feet) long (NFPA 90A), as straight and short as feasible, adequately supported. Centerline radius of bends shall be not less than two duct diameters. Make connections with clamps as recommended by SMACNA. Clamp per SMACNA S3.33 and S3.34 with one clamp on the core duct and one on the insulation jacket. Flexible ducts shall not penetrate floors, or any chase or partition designated as a fire or smoke barrier, including corridor partitions fire rated one hour or two hour. Support ducts SMACNA Standards.

G. Where diffusers, registers and grilles cannot be installed to avoid seeing inside the duct, paint the inside of the duct with flat black paint to reduce visibility.

H. Control Damper Installation:



1. Provide necessary blank-off plates required to install dampers that are smaller than duct size. Provide necessary transitions required to install dampers larger than duct size.

2. Assemble multiple sections dampers with required interconnecting linkage and extend required number of shafts through duct for external mounting of damper motors.

3. Provide necessary sheet metal baffle plates to eliminate stratification and provide air volumes specified. Locate baffles by experimentation, and affix and seal permanently in place, only after stratification problem has been eliminated.

4. Install all damper control/adjustment devices on stand-offs to allow complete coverage of insulation.

I. Air Flow Measuring Devices (AFMD): Install units with minimum straight run distances, upstream and downstream as recommended by the manufacturer.

J. Low Pressure Duct Liner: Install in accordance with SMACNA, Duct Liner Application Standard.

K. Protection and Cleaning: Adequately protect equipment and materials against physical damage. Place equipment in first class operating condition, or return to source of supply for repair or replacement, as determined by Consultant. Protect equipment and ducts during construction against entry of foreign matter to the inside and clean both inside and outside before operation and painting. When new ducts are connected to existing ductwork, clean both new and existing ductwork by mopping and vacuum cleaning inside and outside before operation.

3.2 TESTING

A. Pressure Testing of HVAC Ductwork:

1. Description:

a. Prior to connection to equipment and before applying insulation, perform a dynamic pressure test on HVAC ductwork systems, using a high pressure blower with a calibrated orifice and manometer. Provide all necessary blowers, gauges, connections, and similar items required to perform the tests.

b. Repair all leaks and retest until stipulated results are achieved.

c. Advise the Contractor and Cypress 48 hours in advance of each test. Failure to do so will require test to be rescheduled.

B. Testing Requirements:

1. Mains and Risers: 1.25 times fan static pressure.

2. Horizontal Branches: 1.0 times fan static pressure.

3. Allowable Leakage: Total allowable leakage should not exceed 1 percent of the total system CFM. When partial sections of the duct system are tested, the summation of the leakage for all sections shall not exceed the total allowable leakage.

4. Test Failures: Duct systems shall be repaired at contractor’s cost if test leakage is more than 1%. All audible leaks shall be repaired regardless of whether the duct leakage test was successful.



3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Cleaning of General Service Ductwork: Remove debris from general-purpose ductwork and accessories, and then blow ductwork clean with air movement provided by the system fan or blower. Supply ductwork shall be blown clean before final branch connections are made to terminal units, or before terminal grilles, registers, or diffusers are installed.

B. Cleaning of Ductwork Serving Clean Spaces:

1. All the supply and return ductwork, directly or indirectly serving any cleanroom space or area from the make-up air handlers or the recirculation air handlers shall follow this outline.

2. Ductwork, accessories, and hardware serving cleanrooms, exposed to the room interior, or in the airstream, regardless of size or complexity, shall be visibly free or oil, grease, particulates, chips, fibers, dust, dirt, etc., prior to installation.

3. The general cleaning sequence prior to installation for ductwork serving the cleanrooms shall be:

a. Solvent wipe interior surfaces using the following products:

i. The acceptable cleaning agents for metal surfaces are isopropyl alcohol (IPA) or 50-50 mixture of IPA and distilled water.

ii. Acceptable low-shedding wipe materials are Texwipe cloths, Texwipe Company, Hillsdale, New Jersey.

iii. After rubbing with dry cloth leaves negligible material on cloth, cleanliness is satisfactory.

b. Visually inspect surfaces.

4. For ductwork located in cleanrooms, exterior surfaces to be cleaned following above procedure.

5. After duct sections have been cleaned and degreased and are ready for installation, enclose the sections in plastic if located in cleanrooms or seal the open ends to prevent contamination if located in non-clean areas. Section shall remain sealed until they are in position for final connection. Remove plastic as necessary for unconnected ends. Remove all plastic once the ductwork is completely assembled and the space has achieved Level 2 construction protocol. Promptly seal the ductwork joints airtight after the plastic is removed.

6. Exterior of ductwork located in clean areas to be cleaned again following above procedure, after installation.

C. General Cleaning: Clean up and remove refuse material, crates, and rubbish arising from work of this Section form the premises.

3.4 SCHEDULE

A. Fabricate portions of systems listed in the appendix following the end of this Section, HVAC ductwork schedule, form sheet metal with gauge and reinforcement in accordance with SMACNA duct construction tables.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Fans & Ventilations SECTION 15836


Fans & Ventilations.doc

PART 1 – GENERAL .............................................................................................................................. 1

1.1 DESCRIPTION .............................................................................................................................. 1 1.2 RELATED WORK ......................................................................................................................... 1 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................................................. 1 1.4 SUBMITTALS ............................................................................................................................... 2 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS ......................................................................................................... 3

PART 2 – PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................................... 3

2.1 FAN SECTION (CABINET FAN) ....................................................................................................... 3 2.2 CENTRIFUGAL FANS & VENTILATIONS ........................................................................................... 3 2.3 PREFABRICATED ROOF CURBS .................................................................................................... 4 2.4 ROOF OR WALL POWER VENTILATOR ........................................................................................... 4 2.5 PACKAGED HOOD MAKE-UP AIR UNITS ......................................................................................... 5 2.6 CENTRIFUGAL CEILING FANS & VENTILATIONS (SMALL CABINET FAN) .............................................. 5 2.7 PROPELLER FANS & VENTILATIONS .............................................................................................. 5 2.8 TUBE AXIAL FANS ........................................................................................................................ 6 2.9 VANEXIAL FANS .......................................................................................................................... 7 2.10 MIXED-FLOW FANS ..................................................................................................................... 9 2.11 CARPARK JET FANS .................................................................................................................. 10 2.12 AIR CURTAIN UNITS .................................................................................................................. 11 2.13 INITIAL PARTIAL CAPACITY OPERATION ....................................................................................... 11

PART 3 – EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................... 11

3.1 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................... 11 3.2 PRE-OPERATION MAINTENANCE .................................................................................................. 11 3.3 START-UP AND INSTRUCTIONS ................................................................................................... 12




SECTION 15836

FANS & VENTILATIONS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION A. FANS & VENTILATIONS for heating, ventilating and air conditioning. B. Product Definitions: AMCA Publication 99, Standard l-66.

1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 15010 – Mechanical General Requirements. B. Section l5050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods. C. Section l5071 – Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls.

D. Section l5725 – Modular Indoor Air Handling Units. E. Section 15055 - Motor Starters F. Section 15950 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing


A. Refer to paragraph, QUALITY ASSURANCE, in Section 15050.

B. FANS & VENTILATIONS and power ventilators shall be listed in the current edition of AMCA 26l, and shall bear the AMCA performance seal.

C. Operating Limits for Centrifugal FANS & VENTILATIONS: AMCA 99 (Class I, II, and

III).

D. FANS & VENTILATIONS and power ventilators shall comply with the following standards:

1. Testing and Rating: AMCA 2l0. 2. Sound Rating: AMCA 300.

E. Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls: Section 15071. F. Performance Criteria:

1. The fan schedule shows cubic liters per second (lps) and design static pressure. Scheduled fan motors, 0.37 kw (l/2 horsepower) and larger, are sized for design liters per second (lps) at ll0 percent design static pressure, but not to exceed 185 Pa (3/4-inch) additional pressure.

2. Provide FANS & VENTILATIONS and motors capable of stable operation at design conditions and at ll0 percent pressure as stated above.

3. Lower than design pressure drop of approved individual components may allow use of a smaller fan motor and still provide the safety factor. When submitted as a deviation a smaller motor may be approved in the interest of energy conservation.

4. Select fan operating point as follows:

a. Forward curved and axial FANS & VENTILATIONS: Right hand side of peak pressure point.

b. Airfoil, backward inclined or tubular: Near the peak of static efficiency.




G. Safety Criteria: Provide manufacturer's standard screen on fan inlet and discharge exposed to operating and maintenance personnel.

H. Corrosion Protection:

1. All steel shall be mill-galvanized, or phosphatized and coated with minimum two coats, corrosion resistant enamel paint. Manufacturers paint and paint system shall meet the minimum specifications of: ASTM D1735 water fog; ASTM B117 salt spray; ASTM D3359 adhesion; and ASTM G23 weathermeter.

I. Tab Procedures and Fan Motor Sizing / Selection: 1. Belt-driven fans: Fan drive and belts shall be factory mounted with final

alignment and belt adjustment to be made by the Contractor after installation. Drive and belts shall be as specified in Section 15050. Unit manufacturer shall provide additional drive(s) and / or speed up the blowers if required during balancing, to achieve desired airflow. Size the fan motor liberally to allow for speeding up; otherwise, replace the motor and associated electricals at no additional cost to the owner.

2. Direct-driven fan: Adjust volume dampers or VFD if applicable to attain the desired air flow.

3. For other TAB procedures and requirements, refer to Section 15950.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 15010. B. Manufacturers Literature and Data:

1. Fan sections, motors and drives. 2. Centrifugal FANS & VENTILATIONS, motors, drives, accessories and

coatings.

a. In-line centrifugal FANS & VENTILATIONS. b. Up-blast kitchen hood exhaust FANS & VENTILATIONS. c. Industrial FANS & VENTILATIONS. d. Utility FANS & VENTILATIONS and vent sets.

3. Prefabricated roof curbs. 4. Roof and wall power ventilators. 5. Centrifugal ceiling FANS & VENTILATIONS. 6. Propeller FANS & VENTILATIONS. 7. Packaged hood make-up air units. 8. Vane axial FANS & VENTILATIONS. 9. Air curtain units.

C. Sound power levels for each fan. D. Maintenance and operating manuals in accordance with Section 0l0l0. E. Fan curves for each fan showing liters per second (lps) versus static pressure,

efficiency, and horsepower for design point of operation and at ll0 percent of design static pressure. Include product application data to indicate the effect of capacity control devices such as inlet vane dampers on flow, pressure and Kw (horsepower).

F. For equipment and material submittals, provide certificate of origin to be included in the submittal and bill of lading before delivery to site.




1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.

A. AFBMA 9 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. B. Air Moving and Control Association (AMCA):

99 Standards Handbook 2l0 Laboratory Methods of Testing FANS & VENTILATIONS for

Aerodynamic Performance Rating 26l Directory of Products Licensed to use the AMCA Certified

Ratings Seal - Published Annually 300 Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of FANS &

VENTILATIONS

C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): B117- Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. D1735 Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings

Using Water Fog Apparatus D3359 Standard Test Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test G23 Standard Practice for Operating Light-Exposure Apparatus

(Carbon-Arc Type) with and without Water for Exposure of Non-Metallic Materials

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

NFPA 96 Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of

Commercial Cooking Operations.

E. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF):

37 Air Curtains for Entrance Ways in Food and Food Service Establishments.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 FAN SECTION (CABINET FAN) Refer to Section 15725, for specifications.

2.2 CENTRIFUGAL FANS & VENTILATIONS A. Standards and Performance Criteria: Refer to Paragraph, QUALITY ASSURANCE.

Record factory vibration test results on the fan or furnish to the Contractor. B. Fan arrangement, unless noted or approved otherwise:

1. DWDl FANS & VENTILATIONS: Arrangement 3. 2. SWSl FANS & VENTILATIONS: Arrangement l, 3, 9 or l0, except fume hood

(H7 or Hl3) exhaust FANS & VENTILATIONS shall not be arrangements 3.




C. Construction: Wheel diameters and outlet areas shall be in accordance with AMCA standards. 1. Housing: Low carbon steel, arc welded throughout, braced and supported by

structural channel or angle iron to prevent vibration or pulsation, flanged outlet, inlet fully streamlined. Provide lifting clips, and casing drain. Provide manufacturer's standard access door. Provide 12.5 mm (1/2") wire mesh screens for fan inlets without duct connections.

2. Wheel: Steel plate with die formed blades welded or riveted in place, factory balanced statically and dynamically.

3. Shaft: Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of the first critical speed at the top of the speed range of the FANS & VENTILATIONS class.

4. Bearings: Heavy duty ball or roller type sized to produce a Bl0 life of not less than 40,000 hours, and an average fatigue life of 200,000 hours. Extend lubrication tubes for interior bearings or ducted units to outside of housing.

5. Motor, adjustable motor base, drive and guard: Furnish from factory with fan. Refer to Section 15050, for specifications. Provide protective sheet metal enclosure for FANS & VENTILATIONS located outdoors.

6. Furnish variable speed fan motor controllers where shown on the drawings. Refer to Section 16155. Refer to Section 15050, for controller/motor combination requirements.

D. In-line Centrifugal FANS & VENTILATIONS: In addition to the requirements of

paragraphs A and C, provide inlet and outlet flanges, bolted access door and arrangement l, 4 or 9 supports as required.

E. Up-Blast Kitchen Hood Exhaust FANS & VENTILATIONS: In-line centrifugal,

arrangement 9, vertical up-blast, mounting bracket and curb cap, sheet metal weather cover for motor and drive, wind band discharge cap with gravity dampers, and bolted access door, in addition to requirements of paragraphs A and C.

F. Industrial FANS & VENTILATIONS: Use where scheduled or in lieu of centrifugal

FANS & VENTILATIONS for low volume high static service. Construction specifications paragraphs A and C for centrifugal FANS & VENTILATIONS shall apply. Provide air handling type wheel.

G. Utility FANS & VENTILATIONS, Vent Sets and Small Capacity FANS &

VENTILATIONS: Class l design, arc welded housing, spun intake cone. Applicable construction specifications, paragraphs A and C, for centrifugal FANS & VENTILATIONS shall apply for wheel diameters 300 mm (l2 inches) and larger. Requirement for AMCA seal is waived for wheel diameters less than 300 mm (l2 inches) and housings may be cast iron.

2.3 PREFABRICATED ROOF CURBS A. Construction: Galvanized steel, with continuous welded corner seams, two inch wall

thickness, treated wood nailer, 38 mm (l-l/2 inch) thick, 48 kg per cubic meter (3 pound) density rigid mineral fiberboard insulation with metal liner, built-in cant strip, (except for gypsum or tectum decks). For surface insulated roof deck provide raised cant strip to start at the upper surface of the insulation. Curbs shall be built for pitched roof or ridge mounting as required to keep top of curb level.

B. Curb Height: 300 mm (l2 inches) overall curb height, except curb height for up-blast

kitchen hood exhaust fan shall be 450 mm (l8 inches) above roof surface or as required to comply with NFPA 96.

2.4 ROOF OR WALL POWER VENTILATOR A. Standards and Performance Criteria: Refer to Paragraph, QUALITY ASSURANCE.




B. Type: Centrifugal fan, backward inclined blades. C. Construction: Steel or aluminum, completely weatherproof, for curb or wall mounting,

exhaust cowl or entire drive assembly readily removable for servicing, aluminum bird screen on discharge, UL approved safety disconnect switch, conduit for wiring, vibration isolators for wheel, motor and drive assembly. Provide self acting back draft damper.

D. Motor and Drive: Refer to Section 15050. Bearings shall be pillow block with B-l0

average life of 200,000 hours. E. Prefabricated Roof Curb: As specified in this section. F. TRV Unit: Top discharge exhauster, motor out of air stream, grease trough on base.

2.5 PACKAGED HOOD MAKE-UP AIR UNITS A. Curb mounted air supply unit complete with centrifugal blower and filters.

1. Housing: Galvanized steel with baffled air intake for weather protection and with duct adapter.

2. Blower: Ball bearing utility type with vibration mounts to isolate blower, motor and drive.

3. Prefabricated roof curb: As specified in this section. 4. Filters: 25 mm (One inch) thick, metal, washable. Provide four 300 mm by

300 mm (12 inches by 12 inches) filters. 5. Prefabricated roof curb: As specified in this section.

B. Provide easy access to motor and drive.

2.6 CENTRIFUGAL CEILING FANS & VENTILATIONS (SMALL CABINET FAN) A. Standards and Performance Criteria: Refer to Paragraph, QUALITY ASSURANCE. B. Steel housing, baked enamel finish, direct connected fan assembly, attached grille.

Provide back draft assembly, aluminum wall cap and insect screen. C. Acoustical Lining: 12.5 mm (One-half inch) thick mineral fiber, dark finish. D. Motor: Shaded pole or permanent split capacitor, sleeve bearings, supported by steel

brackets in combination with rubber isolators. E. Ceiling Grille, (Where indicated): White plastic egg crate design, 80 percent free area.

2.7 PROPELLER FANS & VENTILATIONS A. Standards and Performance Criteria: Refer to Paragraph, QUALITY ASSURANCE. B. Square steel panel, deep drawn venturi, arc welded to support arms and fan/motor

support brackets, baked enamel finish. Provide wall collar for thru-wall installations. C. Motor, Motor Base and Drive: Refer to Section 15050.

D. Wall Shutter: Fan manufacturer's standard, steel frame, aluminum blades. E. Wire Safety Guards: Provide on exposed inlet and outlet.




2.8 TUBE AXIAL FANS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, refer to Section 15007 Acceptable Equipment and Suppliers.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the

product indicated on the Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Greenheck 2. Niagara (The New York Blower Company) 3. Kruger

C. Description: Fan wheel and housing, factory-mounted motor with belt drive or direct drive, an inlet cone section, and accessories.

D. Housings: Galvanized steel with flanged inlet and outlet connections.

E. Wheel Assemblies: Cast or extruded aluminum with airfoil-shaped blades mounted

on cast-iron wheel plate keyed to shaft with solid-steel key. F. Wheel Assemblies: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic cured under pressure with airfoil-

shaped blades keyed to stainless steel shaft.

G. Wheel Assemblies: Cast aluminum, machined and fitted to shaft.

H. Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.

1. Service Factor Based On Fan Motor Size: 1.15. 2. Fan Shaft: Turned, Ground, And Polished Steel Designed To Operate At No

More Than 70 Percent Of First Critical Speed At Top Of Fan's Speed Range. 3. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at

factory. 4. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch

for use with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions.

5. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives.

6. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on outside of fan cabinet. 7. Motor Mount: Adjustable base. 8. Shaft Bearings: Radial, self-aligning ball or roller bearings.

a. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L10 of 100,000 hours. b. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, L10 of 100,000 hours. c. Extend lubrication lines to outside of casing and terminate with

grease fittings.

I. Accessories:

1. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges of same material as housing. 2. Inspection Door: Bolted door allowing limited access to internal parts of fan,

of same material as housing. 3. Propeller Access Section Door: Short duct section bolted to fan outlet

allowing access to internal parts of fan for inspection and cleaning, of same material as housing.

4. Swingout Construction: Assembly allowing entire fan section to swing out from duct for cleaning and servicing, of same material as housing.

5. Mounting Clips: Horizontal ceiling clips welded to fan housing, of same material as housing.




6. Horizontal Support: Pair of supports bolted to fan housing, of same material as housing.

7. Vertical Support: Short duct section with welded brackets bolted to fan housing, of same material as housing.

8. Inlet and Outlet Screens: Wire-mesh screen on fans not connected to ductwork, of same material as housing.

9. Backdraft Dampers: Butterfly style, for bolting to the discharge of fan or outlet cone, of same material as housing.

10. Shaft Seal: Elastomeric seal and Teflon wear plate, suitable for up to 300 deg F (149 deg C).

11. Motor Cover: Cover with side vents to dissipate motor heat, of same material as housing.

12. Inlet Vanes: Adjustable; with peripheral control linkage operated from outside of airstream, bronze sleeve bearings on each end of vane support, and provision for manual or automatic operation of same material as housing.

13. Inlet Bell: Curved inlet for when fan is not attached to duct, aluminum. 14. Inlet Cones: Round-to-rectangular transition of same material as housing. 15. Outlet Cones: Round-to-rectangular transition of same material as housing. 16. Stack Cap: Vertical discharge assembly with backdraft dampers, of same

material as housing.

J. Motors: Comply with requirements in Section 15055 Motors, Starters, Control Centers and Wiring. 1. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. 2. Direct-Driven Units: Encase motor in housing outside of airstream, factory

wired to disconnect switch located on outside of fan housing.

K. Factory Finishes: 1. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly. 2. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly. 3. Coatings: Powder-baked enamel.

a. Apply to finished housings. b. Apply to fan wheels.

L. Isolators: Restrained spring isolators having a static deflection of 1 inch (25 mm).

2.9 VANEXIAL FANS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, refer to Section 15007

Acceptable Equipment and Suppliers.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:


C. Description: Fan wheel and housing, straightening vane section, factory-mounted motor with belt drive or direct drive, an inlet cone section, and accessories. 1. Variable-Pitch Fans: Internally mounted electronic actuator, externally

mounted positive positioner, and mechanical-blade-pitch indicator.

D. Housings: Galvanized steel. 1. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Flanges.




2. Guide Vane Section: Integral guide vanes downstream from fan wheel designed to straighten airflow.

E. Wheel Assemblies: Cast aluminum with airfoil-shaped blades mounted on cast-iron

wheel plate keyed to shaft with solid-steel key.

F. Wheel Assemblies: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic cured under pressure with airfoil-shaped blades keyed to stainless steel shaft.

G. Wheel Assemblies: Cast-aluminum hub assembly, machined and fitted with threaded bearing wells to receive blade-bearing assemblies with replaceable, cast-aluminum blades; factory mounted and balanced.

H. Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation. 1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.15. 2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel designed to operate at no

more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's speed range. 3. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at




6. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on outside of fan cabinet. 7. Motor Mount: Adjustable base. 8. Shaft Bearings: Radial, self-aligning ball or roller bearings.


grease fittings.

I. Accessories

1. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges of same material as housing. 2. Inspection Door: Bolted door allowing limited access to internal parts of fan,

of same material as housing. 3. Propeller Access Section Door: Short duct section bolted to fan outlet

allowing access to internal parts of fan for inspection and cleaning, of same material as housing.

4. Swingout Construction: Assembly allowing entire fan section to swing out from duct for cleaning and servicing, of same material as housing.


6. Horizontal Support: Pair of supports bolted to fan housing, of same material as housing.

7. Vertical Support: Short duct section with welded brackets bolted to fan housing, of same material as housing.

8. Inlet and Outlet Screens: Wire-mesh screen on fans not connected to ductwork of same material as housing.

9. Backdraft Dampers: Butterfly style, for mounting with flexible connection to the discharge of fan or direct mounted to the discharge diffuser section of same material as housing.

10. Stall Alarm Probe: Sensing probe capable of detecting fan operation in stall and signaling control devices. Control devices and sequence of operation are specified in Division 15 Sections "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" and "Sequence of Operation."




11. Flow Measurement Port: Pressure measurement taps installed in the inlet of fan to detect and signal airflow readings to temperature-control systems. Control devices and sequence of operation are specified in Division 15 Sections "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" and "Sequence of Operation."

12. Shaft Seal: Elastomeric seal and Teflon wear plate, suitable for up to 300 deg F (148 deg C).


14. Inlet Vanes: Adjustable; with peripheral control linkage operated from outside of airstream, bronze sleeve bearings on each end of vane support, and provision for manual or automatic operation of same material as housing.

15. Inlet Bell: Curved inlet for when fan is not attached to duct, of same material as housing.

16. Inlet Cones: Round-to-rectangular transition of same material as housing. 17. Outlet Cones: Round-to-rectangular transition of same material as housing. 18. Stack Cap: Vertical discharge assembly with backdraft dampers, of same


J. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors, Starters, Control Centers and Wiring."

1. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. 2. Direct-Driven Units: Encase motor in housing outside of airstream, factory


K. Factory Finishes:

1. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly. 2. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.

3. Coatings: Powder-baked enamel.


2.10 MIXED-FLOW FANS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, refer to Section 15007 Acceptable Equipment and Suppliers.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the

product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:


C. Description: Fan wheel and housing, factory-mounted motor with belt drive, and

accessories. D. Housings: Galvanized steel.

1. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Outer mounting frame and companion flanges. 2. Guide Vane Section: Integral guide vanes downstream from fan wheel

designed to straighten airflow. 3. Mixed-Flow Outlet Connection: Two flanged discharge(s) perpendicular to

fan inlet.

E. Wheel Assemblies: Cast aluminum with airfoil-shaped blades mounted on cast-iron wheel plate keyed to shaft with solid-steel key.




F. Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.

1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.15. 2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel designed to operate at no

more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's speed range. 3. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at




6. Motor Mount: Adjustable base. 7. Shaft Bearings: Radial, self-aligning ball or roller bearings.


grease fittings.

G. Accessories:


2. Inlet and Outlet Screens: Wire-mesh screen on fans not connected to ductwork of same material as housing.

3. Backdraft Dampers: Butterfly style, for mounting with flexible connection to the discharge of fan or direct mounted to the discharge diffuser section of same material as housing.


5. Inlet Bell: Curved inlet for when fan is not attached to duct, of same material as housing.

6. Inlet Cones: Round-to-rectangular transition of same material as housing. 7. Outlet Cones: Round-to-rectangular transition of same material as housing. 8. Stack Cap: Vertical discharge assembly with backdraft dampers, of same


H. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section Motors, Starters, Control Centers and Wiring.

1. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. 2. Direct-Driven Units: Encase motor in housing outside of airstream, factory


I. Factory Finishes:

1. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly. 2. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly. 3. Coatings: Powder-baked enamel.


2.11 CARPARK JET FANS

A. Standards and Performance Criteria: Refer to Paragraph, Quality Assurance. B. Motor, Motor Base and Drive: Refer to Section 15050.




C. Fully certified meeting or Exceeding AMCA 250. D. Fully comply with the fire regulation fire rating tested by Warrington Fire with clause B,

C, D.

2.12 AIR CURTAIN UNITS A. Manufacturer's standard, high velocity, non-recirculating type with demonstrated

performance in effectively preventing entry of dust and insects and effectively stopping inflow of air due to winds of 24 km/h (l5 mph) velocity. AMCA seal is waived. Units for kitchens or food storage shall comply with NSF 37.

B. Casing: Sheet metal or polycarbonate plastic. Provide, internal or external vibration

isolation to effectively prevent transmission of vibration and noise from units to building structure. Units shall completely house all parts and have manufacturer's standard finish coating.

C. FANS & VENTILATIONS: Ruggedly constructed, statically and dynamically balanced.

Noise level shall not exceed 77 dBA measured at 1.5 m (5 feet) distance. E. Air Discharge Outlet Nozzle: Cover full width of door opening. Fan discharge ducts,

plenum, flow control vanes and nozzles shall provide a uniform distribution of air over entire length of door. Provide adjustable volume and directional control.

F. Controls: Provide on-off door operated switch. The "on-off" switch circuit shall close to start fan motors when door starts to open and open when the door reaches closed position. A local disconnect switch for each fan motor shall be provided and shall be mounted to be accessible without use of ladder.

G. Motors: Fan motors shall be of type suitable for service conditions, sealed ball

bearings, resilient mounting, automatic thermal overload switch.

2.13 INITIAL PARTIAL CAPACITY OPERATION

Some fans may initially be operated at partial capacity as indicated on the equipment schedule. In these cases, the pulleys/sheaves shall be sized at the reduced capacity subject for future replacement, and the fans shall have satisfactory and stable operation at the specified initial partial capacity although shall be sized at full capacity.


3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install fan, motor and drive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Align fan and motor sheaves to allow belts to run true and straight. C. Bolt equipment to curbs with galvanized lag bolts.

3.2 PRE-OPERATION MAINTENANCE A. Grease bearings. B. Rotate impeller by hand and check for shifting during shipment and check all bolts,

collars, and other parts for tightness.




3.3 START-UP AND INSTRUCTIONS

A. Check vibration and correct as necessary for air balance work.

B. After air balancing is complete and permanent sheaves are in place perform necessary field mechanical balancing to meet vibration tolerance in Section 15071.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Air Terminal Units SECTION 15840


Air Terminal Units.DOC

PART 1 - GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................................................... 1 1.2 RELATED WORK ..................................................................................................................................... 1 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................................................. 1 1.4 SUBMITTALS ............................................................................................................................................ 1 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS .................................................................................................................... 2 1.6 GUARANTY .............................................................................................................................................. 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................................................ 2

2.1 AIR TERMINAL UNITS (BOXES) ................................................................................................................ 2 2.2 AIR FLOW CONTROL VALVE (AFCV) ........................................................................................................ 4 2.3 ROOM FAN COIL UNITS .......................................................................................................................... 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION ....................................................................................................................................... 5

3.1 INSTALLATION.......................................................................................................................................... 5 3.2 OPERATIONAL TEST ................................................................................................................................ 5




SECTION 15840

AIR TERMINAL UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION Air terminal units, air flow control valves, and fan-coil units.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 15010 Mechanical General Provisions.

B. Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods: General mechanical requirements and items, which are common to more than one section of Division 15.

C. Section 15071 Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Control: Noise requirements.

D. Section 15840 Air Terminal Units.

E. Section 15900 HVAC Instrumentation and Controls

F. Section 15950 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing: Flow rates adjusting and balancing


Refer to Paragraph, QUALITY ASSURANCE, in Section 15010.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:

1. Air Terminal Units: Submit test data.

2. Air flow control valves.

3. Fan Coil units.

C. Samples: Provide one typical air terminal unit for approval by the Consultant. This unit will be returned to the Contractor after all similar units have been shipped and deemed acceptable at the job site.

D. Certificates:

1. Compliance with paragraph, QUALITY ASSURANCE.

2. Compliance with specified standards.

E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit in accordance with paragraph, INSTRUCTIONS, in Section 0l0l0.

F. For equipment and material submittals, provide certificate of origin to be included in the submittal and bill of lading before delivery to site.






A. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI):

440R Room Fan Coils

880 Air Terminals

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

90A Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems


181 Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors

883 Fan Coil Units and Room-Fan Heater Units

1.6 GUARANTY

In accordance with Section 01001.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AIR TERMINAL UNITS (BOXES)

A. General: Factory built, pressure independent units, factory set-field adjustable volume, suitable for single or dual duct applications, as indicated. Clearly show on each unit the unit number and factory set air volumes corresponding to the contract drawings. Section 15950. Testing, adjusting and balancing work assume factory set air volumes. Coordinate flow controller sequence and damper operation details with the drawings and Section 15900.

B. Rating and Performance Certification: ARI Industry Standard 880.

1. Maximum pressure drop: As shown on the drawings.

2. Maximum room sound levels: Not to exceed criteria stated in Section 15071. (Low-pressure duct is usually unlined. The inlet pressure should not be less than 374 Pa (1-1/2 inches water gage), unless shown otherwise on drawings. Provide terminal sound attenuators where necessary to comply with the noise criteria. Sound tests and correction of deficiencies is specified in Section 15950.

C. Casing: Unit casing shall be constructed of galvanized steel not lighter than 0.85 mm (22 gage) or aluminum sheet not lighter than 1.3 mm (18 gage). Casing of units serving surgery area (where applicable) shall be of aluminum. Provide hanger brackets for attachment of supports.

1. Lining material: Suitable to provide required acoustic performance, thermal insulation and prevent sweating. Meet the requirements of NFPA 90A and comply with UL 181 for erosion, 13 mm (one-half inch) minimum thickness,




secured to supporting surfaces in such a manner that it will not sag, delaminate, or settle.

Comply with UL Standard l8l for erosion. Surfaces, including all edges, shall be faced with perforated metal or coated so that the air stream will not detach material. No lining material is permitted in the boxes serving surgery areas.

2. Access panels (or doors): Provide panels large enough for inspection, adjustment and maintenance without disconnecting ducts, and for cleaning heating coils attached to unit, even if there are no moving parts. Panels shall be flushed, gasketed airtight, and shall require no tool other than a screwdriver to remove. Access panels on low-pressure side, i.e., downstream of volume damper, do not require gasket if tightly fitted.

3. Total leakage from casing: Not to exceed 2 percent of the nominal capacity of the unit when subjected to a static pressure of 747 pa (3 inch water gage), with all outlets sealed shut and inlets fully open.

4. Octopus connector: Factory installed, lined air distribution terminal. Provide where flexible duct connections to terminals are shown on the drawings. Provide butterfly-balancing damper, with locking means, in connectors with more than one outlet. No lining material is permitted in the boxes serving surgery areas.

D. Construct dampers and other internal devices of corrosion resisting materials which do not require lubrication or other periodic maintenance. The dampers and other internal or external devices for boxes serving surgery area shall be of stainless steel or aluminum.

E. Single Duct Terminals: Provide manufacturer's standard catalogue.

1. Variable Air Volume Units (VAV): Externally powered electronic DDC control capable of BMS interface, variable air volume, with field adjustable maximum and minimum set points.

a. Volume damper or air valve with actuator and relays.

b. Variable Air volume electronic controller: Provide pressure independent electronic controls, which can be reset to modulate airflow between, zero and the maximum cataloged CFM or L/s. Provide multi-point, center-averaging velocity sensor, with a minimum of four measuring ports. Provide a minimum differential pressure signal of 7.5 Pa (0.03 inch water gage) at inlet velocity of 2.6 m/s (500 fpm). Provide control signal accuracy of plus or minus 5 percent with the same inlet size at any inlet condition. The velocity controller shall have a constant 2 degrees temperature reset span regardless of the minimum and maximum airflow limit. Provide 24 volt reversible actuator, class II 24 volt transformer, and disconnect switch. Actuator shall be direct connection shaft mount type without linkage, and be equipped with magnetic clutch. All controls shall be installed in approved NEMA 1 enclosure.

2. Constant volume single duct. The unit shall contain within the casing, a mechanical constant volume regulator. Volume regulator shall control air delivery to within plus or minus 5 percent of specified air flow subjected to inlet pressure up to 1500 pa (6 inches water gage). Controls will be designed to provide required sequence of operation.

F. Terminal Sound Attenuators: Construction shall be similar to sound attenuators in Section 15840.




2.2 AIR FLOW CONTROL VALVE (AFCV)

A.. Units shall be normally closed, constant volume, DDC control type with attenuators and/or lined duct required to meet room NC criteria. Air terminal units (boxes) may be used for this service.

2.3 ROOM FAN COIL UNITS

A. Capacity Certification: ARI 440.

B. Safety Compliance: NEC and UL 883.

C. Noise Levels: Operating at full cooling capacity, sound power level shall not exceed by more than 5 dB the numerical value of sound pressure levels associated with noise criteria specified in Section 15071. Select units at intermediate speed, for compliance with the noise criteria.

D. Chassis: Galvanized steel, acoustically and thermally insulated to attenuate noise and prevent condensation.

E. Cabinet Type: Not lighter than 1.3 mm (l8 gage) steel, reinforced and braced. Arrange components and provide adequate space for installation of piping package and control valves. Finish shall be factory-baked enamel in manufacturer's standard color as selected by the architect. Provide synthetic rubber or polyurethane gasket for air-tight installation to the wall for outside air to vertical units and return air to horizontal units.

l. Vertical Unit: Provide 1.6 mm (l6 gage) steel front panel with 13 mm (l/2-inch) thick fiberglass insulation and provide screw-type levelers.

a. Air outlet grilles: Adjustable four-way air deflection located in the top panel.

b. Provide two hinged access doors (one each side) equipped with key operated cam-lock fasteners in the unit top panel located to provide access to the unit controls.

2. Horizontal Unit: Hinged bottom access panel with cam-lock fasteners. Provide stamped integral discharged grilles in front of cabinet.

F. Concealed Units: Enclosed type with inlet and outlet duct collars.

G. Fans: Centrifugal, direct drive, galvanized steel or polyester resin.

l. Motors: 3-speed permanent split capacitor type with integral thermal overload protection, for operation at not more than l200 RPM.

2. Provide a fan speed selector switch, with off position, mounted in a junction box in the cabinet of each unit. Switch shall have a set of auxiliary contacts which are open when the switch is in the "off" position and closed when the switch in either of the other positions.

H. Cooling and Electric Heating Coils (where applicable):

1. Cooling Coils: Copper tubes, 10 mm (three-eighths inch) minimum inside diameter, not less than 4.3 mm (0.0l7 inch) thick with copper of aluminum fins. Coils shall be pressure tested for bursting and strength in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., requirements for pressure tested coils, and shall be designed to provide adequate heat transfer capacity. Provide manual air vent at high point of coil.




2. Electrical heating coils: Spiral sheath or finned-tube construction with Cal-rod resistance elements in aluminum tubes. Units shall be UL listed and factory wired with unit mounted heat switch, magnetic contactors, high temperature cutout safety control, and fan override thermostat.

I. Piping Package: Furnished with unit by the manufacturer to fit control valves provided by the controls supplier. Submit manufacturer's detailed drawings of the piping in the end compartments, for approval, prior to fabrication of the piping packages. Provide gate valves on the supply and return pipes and balancing fittings on the return pipes.

J. Drain Pan: Galvanized steel or carbon steel bonderized and finished with not less than two coats of baked enamel or equally durable finish, and of strength to requirement of function it performs in unit. Inside or outside surfaces of drain pan shall be coated with mastic type insulation or closed cell polyurethane. Provide a similar secondary drain pan, which may be steel or PVC, provided with a drain connection to catch condensation from all piping, coils and primary drain pan.

K. Air Filter: Manufacturer's standard throwaway type, not less than one inch thick, supported to be concealed from sight and be tight fitting to prevent air by-pass. Filters shall have slide out frames and be easily replaced without removing enclosure or any part thereof.

L. Control valves and unit mounted return air thermostats are to be field installed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Work shall be installed as shown and according to the manufacturer’s diagrams and recommendations.

B. Handle and install units in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Support units rigidly so they remain stationary at all times. Cross-bracing or other means of stiffening shall be provided as necessary. Method of support shall be such that distortion and malfunction of units cannot occur.

D. Locate air terminal units to provide a straight section of inlet duct for proper functioning of volume controls.

3.2 OPERATIONAL TEST

Refer to Section 15050.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Air Filters SECTION 15861


Air Filters.doc

PART 1 - GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................................................... 1 1.2 RELATED WORK ..................................................................................................................................... 1 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................................................. 1 1.4 SUBMITTALS ............................................................................................................................................ 1 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS .................................................................................................................... 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................................................ 2

2.1 REPLACEMENT FILTER ELEMENTS TO BE FURNISHED ........................................................................... 2 2.2 EXTENDED SURFACE AIR FILTERS ......................................................................................................... 2 2.3 HEPA FILTERS .......................................................................................................................................... 5 2.4 HEPA FILTER CEILING MODULE ................................................................................................................ 6

PART 3 – EXECUTION....................................................................................................................................... 7

3.1 INSTALLATION.......................................................................................................................................... 7 3.2 START-UP AND TEMPORARY USE ........................................................................................................... 7



Air Filters.doc

SECTION 15861

AIR FILTERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Air filters for heating, ventilating and air conditioning.

B. Definitions: Refer to ASHRAE 52.1 for definitions of face velocity, net effective filtering area, media velocity, resistance (pressure drop), atmospheric dust spot efficiency and dust-holding capacity.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 15050 -Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.

B. Section 15725 - Air Handling Units.


A. Air Filter Performance Report for Extended Surface Filters:

1. Submit a test report for each Grade of filter being offered. The report shall be less than five years old and will have been prepared by an independent testing laboratory using test equipment, method and duct section as specified by ASHRAE Standard 52.1 for type filter under test and acceptable to Consultant, indicating that filters comply with the requirements of this specification. Test for 150 m/min (500 fpm) will be accepted for lower velocity rated filters provided the test report of an independent testing laboratory complies with all the requirements of this specification.

2. Selection procedures: All filters tested shall have been procured by the independent testing laboratory from the open market independent of manufacturer of these filters and a statement to this effect must accompany test report.

3. Owner’s Option: The Owner at its option may take one of the filters for each different type submitted and run an independent test to determine if the filter meets the requirements of this specification. When the filter meets the requirements, the Owner will pay for the test. When the filter does not meet the specification requirements, the manufacturer will be required to pay for the test and replace the filters with filters that will perform as required by the specifications.

B. Filter Supplier Warranty for Extended Surface Filters: Guarantee the filters against leak, blow-outs, and other deficiencies during their normal useful life. Defective filters shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner.

C. Nameplates: Each filter shall bear a label or name plate indicating manufacturer's name, filter size, rated efficiency, UL classification, and file number.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:

1. Extended surface filters.

2. Holding frames. Identify locations.



Air Filters.doc

3. Side access housings. Identify locations, verify insulated doors.

4. HEPA filters.

5. Magnehelic gages.

C. Air filter performance reports.

D. Suppliers warranty.

E. For equipment and material submittals, provide certificate of origin to be included in the submittal and bill of lading before delivery to site.


The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only.

A. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE):

52.1.1 Methods of Testing Air Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation For Removing Particulate Matter

B. American national Standards Institute (ANSI):

ANSI N45.2 Quality Assurance Requirements for Nuclear Power Plants


900 UL Standard for Safety Test Performance of Air Filter Units

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 REPLACEMENT FILTER ELEMENTS TO BE FURNISHED

A. To allow temporary use of HVAC systems for testing and in accordance with Paragraph, TEMPORARY USE OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS in Section 15010, provide one complete set of additional (replacement) filter elements.

B. The Consultant will direct whether these additional filters will either be installed as replacements for dirty units or turned over to the Owner for future use as replacements.

2.2 EXTENDED SURFACE AIR FILTERS

A. Use factory assembled air filters of the extended surface type with supported or non-supported cartridges for removal of particulate matter in air conditioning, heating and ventilating systems. Filter units shall be of the extended surface type fabricated for disposal when the dust-load limit is reached as indicated by maximum (final) pressure drop.

B. Filter Classification: UL approved Class 1 or Class 2 conforming to UL Standard 900.

C. Filter Grades, Percent, Nominal Efficiency and Application:

1. Grade A: 90-95 after-filter.

2. Grade B: 80-85 after-filter.



Air Filters.doc

3. Grade C: 50-60 pre-filter.

4. Grade D: 25-30 pre-filter.

D. Filter Media:

1. Grade A, B and C Non-supported (Bag) Type: Construct media of high density glass fibers or other suitable fibers. Enclose or pocket each pleat in woven or non-woven backing material. Seal and fasten (stitch) to maintain pleat shape in a proper frame to insure no air leakage for life of filter. Staples and stays are prohibited.

2. Grade A, B and C Supported (Rigid Pleated) Type: Media shall be composed of high density glass fibers or other suitable fibers. Fastening methods used to maintain pleat shape, (metal backing or aluminum separators) shall be sealed in a proper enclosing frame to insure no air leakage for life of filter. Staples and stays are prohibited.

3. Grade D (Pleated) Type: Media shall be composed of synthetic/natural fibers. A metal grid backing shall be bonded to the air leaving side of the media to maintain uniform pleat shape and stability for proper air flow and maximum dust loading. The media frame shall be constructed of high strength moisture resistant fiber or beverage board. Bond the pleated media pack on all four edges to insure no air leakage for the life of the filter. Staples and stays are prohibited.

E. Filter Efficiency and Arrestance: Efficiency and arrestance of filters shall be determined in accordance with ASHRAE 52.1-92. Atmospheric dust spot efficiency and synthetic dust weight arrestance shall not be less than the following:

Percentage of Initial Efficiency

Percentage of Average Efficiency

Percentage of Average Arrestance

Grade A 75.4 86.4 99.0

Grade B 58.0 79.0 98.0

Grade C 25.0 53.0 97.0

Grade D Less than 20.0 22.0 89.0

F. Maximum initial and final resistance, Pa (inches of water), for each filter cartridge when operated at 150 m/min (500 feet per minute) face velocity:

Initial Resistance Final Resistance

Grade A (Bag) 130 (0.52) 250 (1.00)

Grade A (Rigid Pleated) 185 (0.74) 250 (l.00)

Grade B (Bag) 100 (0.40) 250 (l.00)

Grade B (Rigid Pleated) 150 (0.60) 250 (l.00)

Grade C (Bag) 70 (0.28) 200 (0.80)

Grade C (Rigid Pleated) 85 (0.35) 200 (0.80)

Grade D (2-inch deep) 80 (0.32) 175 (0.70)

Grade D (4-inch deep) 65 (0.27) 175 (0.70)



Air Filters.doc

G. Dust Holding Capacity: When tested to 250 Pa (l.00-inch water) at 150 m/min (500 fpm) face velocity, the dust holding capacity for each 600 mm by 600 mm (24 inches by 24 inches) (face area) filter shall be at least the values listed below. For other filter sizes the dust holding capacity shall be proportionally higher or lower to the face area.

Grade A (Bag) 300 grams

Grade A (Rigid Pleated) 90 grams

Grade B (Bag) 430 grams

Grade B (Rigid Pleated) 175 grams

Grade C (Bag) 910 grams

Grade C (Rigid Pleated) 250 grams

Grade D (2 inch deep) 150 grams

Grade D (4 inch deep) 300 grams

H. Minimum Media Area: The minimum net effective media area in square meter (square feet) for each 600 mm by 600 mm (24 inches by 24 inches) (face area) filter at 150 m/min (500 fpm) face velocity shall be at least the values listed below. For other filter sizes the net effective media area shall be proportionally higher or lower.

Grade A (Bag) 8.5 (9l.0)

Grade A (Rigid Pleated) 5.3 (57.0)

Grade B (Bag) 8.5 (9l.0)

Grade B (Rigid Pleated) 5.3 (57.0)

Grade C (Bag) 8.5 (9l.0)

Grade C (Rigid Pleated) 5.3 (57.0)

Grade D (2-inch deep) 1.4 (l4.8)

Grade D (4-inch deep) 2.1 (23.0)

I. Side Servicing Housings (Where Applicable):

1. Minimum 1.6 mm (l6 gage galvanized steel, or aluminum, completely factory assembled with upstream and downstream flanges for connection into the duct system. Furnish housing length sufficient to provide for fully extended operating filter elements.

2. Access doors: Double skin insulated, at each end of the housing with continuous gasketing on the perimeter and positive locking devices. Design doors to withstand a minimum positive/negative 1.0 kPa (four inches of water) static pressure.

3. Filter slide channels: Channels shall incorporate a positive-sealing gasket material to seal the top and bottom of the filter cartridge frames to prevent bypass. Provide factory installed gasketing to prevent leakage between cartridges, and between cartridges and doors.



Air Filters.doc

J. Holding Frame System (Where Applicable):

1. Minimum 1.6 mm (l6 gage) galvanized steel, 100 mm (4 inches) deep, factory complete with hardware necessary for field assembly, suitable for either upstream or downstream filter servicing. All members shall be cut to size and prepunched for easy assembly into modules of the size and capacity noted in the schedules.

2. The framing members shall be permanently gasketed to prevent the bypass of unfiltered air. If required, furnish suitable vertical support members to prevent deflection of horizontal members. The vertical support members shall not interfere with either the installation or operation of the filters.

3. The framing system shall incorporate a factory installed positive sealing device for each row of filters. This device shall allow for easy installation and removal of cartridges and shall insure the seal between the gasketed filter elements while the building is in operation.

K. Magnehelic Differential Pressure Filter Gages: Nominal 100 mm (four inch) diameter, zero to 500 Pa (zero to two inch water gage) range, flush mounted in aluminum panel board, complete with static tips, copper or aluminum tubing, and accessory items to provide zero adjustment. Provide one gage for each extended surface filter section. Provide Petcocks for each gauge.

L. Equipment Identification: Section 15050.

2.3 HEPA FILTERS

A. High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) filters shall be individually tested and certified to be 99.97 percent minimum efficient when handling 0.3 micron particles in accordance with DOP test method. Filters shall be factory scanned. The DOP efficiency along with filter serial number and name of manufacturer shall be marked on the filter. HEPA filter shall have maximum pressure drop of 250 Pa (1” WG) when clean at rated flow with a final pressure drop of 500 Pa (2” WG).

B. Filter media: Factory constructed by pleating a continuous sheet of media into closely spaced pleats with kraft or aluminum separators. Sealer shall be self-extinguishing.

C. Enclosing frame shall be 16 gauge galvanized steel. Provide pre-filters in the same housing with a separate removal assembly that operates independently from the HEPA filters.

D. Pre-filter: Type D, 2 inches deep. See paragraph 2.2

E. Bag-In/Bag-Out Housing for HEPA Filters:

1. Housing shall be fabricated of 15 gauge type 304 stainless steel.

2. Housing shall be equipped with weather covers, drilled face flanges and factory mounted Magnehelic gauges with Petcocks housed in stainless steel brackets.

3. Housing shall be pressure tested in factory for high quality to withstand a positive or negative pressure of 10” WG. If HEPA filters are specified for TB Isolation Rooms, perform a quantitative leakage and filter performance DOP (Dioctyl Phthalate Penetration) field test in addition to factory test at the initial installation recommended by the Center for Disease Control (CDC).

4. Housing shall incorporate a spring loaded clamping mechanism that is operated from outside and which is capable of exerting a 5340 N (1,200 lb.) sealing force across the top and bottom of each filter.



Air Filters.doc

5. Each housing shall have a bagging ring around the access port that is sealed by a removable, gasketed access door. The bagging ring shall have two (2) continuous ribs to secure the plastic change-out bag and be hemmed on its outer edge to prevent the bag from tearing.

6. One 87 mil thick PVC change-out bag shall be supplied for each access door. The bag shall include approximately 300 mm (12 inches) of transparent PVC at the open end and three glove sleeves built into the body to assist in filter change-out. Bag-In/Bag-Out housings shall be manufactured under a quality assurance program that addresses the requirements of ANSI N45.2, “Quality Assurance Requirements for Nuclear Power Plants.”

2.4 HEPA FILTER CEILING MODULE

1. Design for optimum filter performance with an individually ducted system for use in

laminar and non-laminar flow cleanroom Class 1000,000 to 10. 2. Hermetically sealed to prevent voids and leaks to meet stringent air quality

requirements of cleanrooms. It is typically installed in a T-Bar grid system suspended from the ceiling or installed in a modular ceiling grid. Hold-down clamping is not required.

Its low profile, lightweight, and disposable design makes it deal for use in hospital operating theatres and laboratories, pharmaceutical, microelectric, film and optical fiber facilities, food processing plants and other applications where airborne contaminants must be carefully controlled.

3. Hermetically sealed and tested to prevent leakage between hood inlet and air leaving side. All metal to metal joints are bonded to eliminate bypass leakage.

4. The standard module comes with a 250mm (10”) diameter inlet, a fixed distribution

plate, an integral round duct connection and a white epoxy coated faceguard on the downstream side to protect the HEPA mini-pleat pack.

5. Lightweight anodised extruded aluminium. The low profile and lightweight of the

Disposable Ceiling Module helps to reduce handling and installation time.

6. Filter is made of water-resistant and fire retardant glass fiber media, as follows:

H14 HEPA filter – 99.999% minimum efficiency on 0.3 m particles.

7. All HEPA filers are leak tested. ULPA filters are scanned with a laser spectometer with PSL particles for leaks, and tested for efficiency and air distribution.

8. Standard Specifications:

a. Operating Temperature : 70 ºC (158 ºF) b. Housing : Anodized aluminium extrusion, standard

profile c. Gasket : Neoprene d. Faceguard Location : Air leaving side e. Media : H14 HEPA Filter (99.999% efficiency on 0.3

m particles) f. Accessories:



Air Filters.doc

- Flat profile, closed cell neoprene gasket on air leaving side - Divider and volume control damper - Adjustable distribution plate with divider.


3.1 INSTALLATION

Install supports, filters and gages in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.2 START-UP AND TEMPORARY USE

A. Clean and vacuum air handling units and plenums to the satisfaction of the Consultant prior to starting air handling systems.

B. Install or deliver replacement filter units as directed by the Consultant.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL HVAC Instrumentation and Controls SECTION 15900


HVAC Instrumentation and Controls.doc

PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 WORK INCLUDED ....................................................................................................................... 1 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE................................................................................................................. 1 1.3 RELATED WORK ........................................................................................................................ 1 1.4 SENSORS .................................................................................................................................. 1 1.5 THERMOSTATS AND HUMIDISTATS ............................................................................................... 6 1.6 FINAL CONTROL ELEMENTS AND OPERATORS.............................................................................. 6 1.7 AIR FLOW CONTROL AND MONITORING ....................................................................................... 9 1.8 ULTRASONIC, THERMAL, THERMAL-ENERGY METERS: ............................................................... 10 1.9 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION / CONTROL SEQUENCE .................................................................... 10

PART 2 PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................ 15

NOT USED ........................................................................................................................................ 15

PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................... 15

3.1 INSTALLATION .......................................................................................................................... 15 3.2 IDENTIFICATION........................................................................................................................ 15 3.3 WIRING ................................................................................................................................... 16 3.4 FACTORY BUILT EQUIPMENT ..................................................................................................... 16 3.5 WARNING NOTICES .................................................................................................................. 16




SECTION 15900

HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL


B. Provide all labour, materials, products, equipment and services to supply, install, wire,

calibrate and commission the electronic control and monitoring system instrumentation as specified in the point schedules, in this Specification and as required to make a complete and functional system.

C. Coordinate instrumentation provisions with Division 16, Section 16965 Building

Management System (Controller & Software).

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Instrumentation work shall be performed by one firm specializing in the installation of

control systems for building facilities control.

B. Products referenced under this Section establish the minimum acceptable standards of product quality, features and performance. Products provided under this Section shall be coordinated with the supplier of the BMS system.

1.3 RELATED WORK A. Where the application of any special software package requires additional

instrumentation to meet the requirements specified, provide the necessary instrumentation at no additional cost whether or not such instrumentation is identified.

B. Any required additional instrumentation shall meet the requirements of this Section.

Submit details for review prior to installation.

C. Provide actuators and terminal unit controller for all VAV, constant volume controllers, fan coil units and other terminal devices. Where possible, have actuators and controls installed in the terminal unit manufacturer’s factory.

1.4 SENSORS

1.4.1 Electronic Sensors: Provide all remote sensors as required for the systems. All

sensors shall be vibration and corrosion resistant for wall, immersion, and/or duct mounting.

a. Temperature Sensors: Thermistor type for terminal units and Resistance

Temperature Device (RTD) with an integral transmitter for all other sensors.

1. Duct sensors shall be rigid or averaging type as shown on drawings. Averaging sensor shall be a minimum of 1 linear ft of sensing element for each sq. ft. of cooling coil face area.

2. Immersion sensors shall be provided with a separable well made of stainless steel or bronze or monel materials. Pressure rating of well is to be consistent with the system pressure in which it is to be installed.

3. Space sensors shall be equipped with set-point adjustment, override switch, display, and/or communication port as shown on the drawings. Match room thermostats, locking cover.

4. Outdoor air temperature sensors shall have watertight inlet fittings and shielded from direct sunlight.




5. Room security sensors shall have stainless steel cover plate with insulated back and security screws.

6. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable. 7. Output Signal: 4-20 ma.

b. Humidity Sensors: Bulk polymer sensing element type.

1. Duct and room sensors shall be a sensing range of 20 to 80 percent

with accuracy of + 2 to + 5 percent RH, including hysteresis, linearity, and repeatability.

2. Duct and outdoor humidity sensors shall be furnished with element guard and mounting plate and have a sensing range of 0 to 100 percent RH.

3. 4-20 ma continuous output signal.

c. Static Pressure Sensors: Non-directional, temperature compensated.

1. 4-20 ma output signal. 2. 0 to5 inches wg for duct static pressure range. 3. 0 to 0.25 inch wg for Building static pressure range.

1.4.2 Water Flow Sensors:

a. Sensor shall be insertion turbine type with turbine element, retractor and

preamplifier/transmitter mounted on a two-inch full port isolation valve; assembly easily removed or installed as a single unit under line pressure through the isolation valve without interference with process flow; calibrated scale shall allow precise positioning of the flow element to the required insertion depth within plus or minus 1 mm (0.05 inch); wetted parts shall be constructed of stainless steel. Operating power shall be nominal 24 VDC. Local instantaneous flow indicator shall be LED type in NEMA 4 enclosure with 3-1/2 digit display, for wall or panel mounting.

b. Performance characteristics:

1. Ambient conditions: - 40 to 60 degrees C (-40 to 140 degrees F, 5 to

100 percent humidity. 2. Operating conditions: 850 kPa (125 psig), 0 to 120 degrees C (30 to

250 degrees F), 0.15 to 12m per second (0.5 to 40 feet per second) velocity.

3. Nominal range (turn down ratio) L 10 to 1. 4. Overall accuracy plus or minus one percent of reading. 5. Repeatability: plus or minus 0.25 percent of reading. 6. Preamplifier mounted on meter shall provide a 4-20 ma divided pulse

output or switch closure signal for units of volume or mass per a time base. Signal transmission distance shall be a minimum of 1,800 meters (6,000 feet). Preamplifier for bi-directional contact closure from a relay mounted in the preamplifier.

7. Pressure Loss: Maximum 1 percent of the line pressure in line sizes above 100 mm (4 inches).

8. Ambient temperature effects, less than 0.005 percent calibrated span per degree C (degree F) temperature change.

9. RFI effect – flow meter shall not be affected by RFI. 10. Power supply effect less than 0.02 percent of span for a variation of

plus or minus 10 percent power supply.




1.4.3 Flow switches shall be either paddle or differential pressure type.

a. Paddle-type switches (liquid service only) shall be UL listed, SPDT snap-acting. Adjustable sensitivity with NEMA 4 enclosure.

b. Differential pressure type switches (air or water service) shall be UL listed,

SPDT snap acting, NEMA 4 enclosure, with scale range and differential suitable for specified application.

1.4.4 Current Switches: Current operated switches shall be self-powered, solid state with

adjustable trip current as well as status, power, and relay command status LED indication. The switches shall be selected to match the current of the application and output requirements of the DDC systems.

1.4.5 Pressure to Current Transmitters:

A. Provide pressure to current transmitters, Instrument Code C1 having the following minimum specifications:

1. Internal materials of the transducer suitable for continuous contact

with the applicable media. 2. Output signal of 4-20 mA. 3. Output variation of less than 0.2% full scale for supply voltage

variations of 10%. 4. Combined non-linearity, repeatability and hysteresis effects not to

exceed 0.5% of full scale output over entire range. 5. Integral, accessible zero and span adjustments. 6. Operating temperature range of -10 to 50 deg C with 5% to 90% RH

non-condensing. 7. Temperature effect of 1.5% full scale 50 deg C or less. 8. Over pressure input protection to a minimum of twice maximum

working input pressure. 9. Output short circuit and open circuit protection. 10. Dustproof housing. 11. Shock and vibration protection.

1.4.6 Pressure Electric Switches

A. Provide SPDT snap acting switch rated for 8 amperes at 220V.

B. The pressure range shall be 0 to 130 kPa.

C. Provide adjustable setpoint from 20.6 to 130 kPa and the differential adjustable between 12.7 and 41.1 kPa.

1.4.7 Motor Control Relays

A. Provide motor start/stop control relays in dustproof housing.

B. Provide pick up rating and time and hold rating as required for individual applications.

C. Provide motor control relays from one manufacturer.

D. Provide input operating voltage to be compatible with the BMS digital output

(246 DC) equipment. E. Where hand/off/auto (HOA) switches are provided on the MCC, the BMS

digital output shall control the motor only in the auto position.




F. Do not override other interlocks providing safety control.

G. Provide shock and vibration protection.

H. Provide required wiring interconnections between the motor control relays and the motor starters.

1.4.8 Current Transformers and Relays

A. Provide current transformers and relays, to indicate motor status.

B. Provide SPDT output relay suitable for sensing by the BMS digital input subsystem.

C. Provide output relay with trip adjustment, field accessible, over 0-100% of

range. Deadband adjustment shall be to, at maximum, 10% of range.

D. Long term setting drift of current transformer and relay combination not to exceed 5% full range/6 months.

E. Provide current transformer and relay with over current and over voltage

protection.

F. Operating ambient temperature range of -10 deg C to plus 50 deg C with 5% to 90% RH non-condensing.

1.4.9 Motor Status Contacts

A. Provide status inputs, for all motors using auxiliary contacts from motor

starters where available or from auxiliary relays wired into the motor starter circuit.

1.4.10 Differential Pressure Switches

A. Select the differential pressure range of the switch to suit the application.

B. Provide switch with adjustable set point.

C. Provide switch with SPDT contacts rated at 5 amperes at 220V AC.

D. Mount the switch with diaphragm in a vertical plane.

E. Indicate flow for pumps and fans by means of a current sensitive relay which opens an electrical contact as differential pressure falls below pre-adjusted pressure range setting.

1.4.11 Damper Status Switch

A. Provide magnetic reed switch type damper status switches activated by damper blade. Mount securely on damper frames.

B. Provide SPDT switches with contact rating of not less than 5 amperes at

220V AC.

1.4.12 Filter Gauges

A. Filter gauges are provided by Division 15, Air Filters.




1.4.13 Level Switches

A. Float type, tank mounted SPDT switch action, suitable for water up to 100 deg C.

B. Float type, pit mounted SPDT switch action, suitable for water up to 100 deg

C.

1.4.14 Level Sensor

A. Capacitive level sensor, equal to Magnatrol, complete with sensor rods, water tight enclosure, continuous 2-10V or 4-20 mA output.

1.4.15 Gas Detectors

A. Provide detectors suitable for carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, refrigerant and ammonia detection. Instrument Code K6.

B. Provide electronic detectors, with scale range and set points suitable for the

gas being detected and in compliance with legislation for hazardous gasses.

C. Provide digital or continuous 2-10 VDC or 4-20mA input to BMS as appropriate for detection and control.

D. Carbon Monoxide Detectors: Single or multichannel, dual-level detectors

using solid-state plug-in sensors with a 3-year minimum life; suitable over a temperature range of 0 to 40 degree C (32 to 104 degree F); with 2 factory-calibrated alarm levels at 50 and 100 ppm.

E. Carbon Dioxide Sensor and Transmitter: Single detectors using solid-state

infrared sensors; suitable over a temperature range of minus 5 to 55 degree C (23 to 130 degree F) and calibrated for 0 to 2 percent, with continuous or averaged reading; for wall mounting and duct mounting. Provide one (1) sensor suitable for outdoor installation located near the fresh air intake of the FAHU to measure the outdoor air carbon dioxide level. The measured value here will serve as the base level for comparison with the space carbon dioxide level. Provide and locate the other Carbon Dioxide sensors as indicated in the Drawings.

1.4.16 High Level Interface

All independent control/monitoring system for chiller plant, VFD, and other equipment with electronic interface panels/system shall have Lon Works Protocol Communications or BACnet capability.

1.4.17 Interface Contacts

A. Snap acting switch, rated for 5 amps at 220 VAC, or digital input.

B. Ensure contacts and signals are compatible with BMS and other systems being interfaced.

C. Provide 2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA output from BMS to air flow volume control

devices.

D. Provide pulse totalizing and conversion from building power meters.

1. Power meter consists of CT’s and PT’s. Provide accuracy equal to that of the utility meter.




2. Provide time based measurement with intervals of, at minimum 1 minute, for power demand control.

1.5 THERMOSTATS AND HUMIDISTATS

A. Room thermostats controlling heating and cooling devices shall have three modes of operation (heating – null or dead band – cooling). Wall-mounted thermostats shall have setpoint and temperature display, and external adjustment:

1. Pneumatic thermostats shall be 2-pipe, non-bleed or relay type design fully

proportional with adjustable throttling range, direct or reverse acting as required. Factory calibrated at 17.2 kPa per degree C (2.5 psig per degree F0 setpoint dial stops, adjustable sensitivity setting of 7 to 30 kPa per degree C (1 to 4 psig per degree F), and a test port to measure the output to controlled devices. Range as required.

2. Electronic Thermostats: Soild-state, microprocessor based, programmable to

daily, weekend, and holiday schedules. Battery replacement without program loss.

B. Strap-on thermostat shall be enclosed in a dirt-and-moisture proof housing with fixed

temperature switching point and single pole, double throw switch. C. Freezestat shall have a minimum of 300 mm (one linear foot) of sensing element for

each 0.093 square meter (one square foot) of coil area. A freezing condition at any increment of 300 mm (one foot) anywhere along the sensing element shall be sufficient to operate the thermostatic element.

D. Room Humidistats: Provide fully proportioning humidistats with adjustable throttling

range for accuracy of settings and conservation. The humidistats shall have set point scales shown in percent of relative humidity located on the instrument. Systems showing moist/dry or high/low are not acceptable.

1.6 FINAL CONTROL ELEMENTS AND OPERATORS

A. Fail Safe Operation: Control valve and dampers shall provide “fail safe” operation in either the normally open or normally closed position as required for freeze, moisture, smoke or fire protection.

B. Spring Ranges: Range as required for system sequencing and to provide tight shut-

off. C. Power Operated Control Dampers (other than VAV Boxes): Factory fabricated,

balanced type dampers. All modulating dampers shall be opposed blade type. Blades for two-position, duct-mounted dampers shall be parallel, airfoil (streamlined) type for minimum noise generation and pressure drop.

1. Leakage: Maximum leakage in closed position shall not exceed 7 L/S (15

CFMs) differential pressure for outside air and exhaust dampers and 200 L/S. 1 square meter (40 CFM/sq.ft.) at 50 mm (2 inches) differential pressure for other dampers.

2. Frame shall be galvanized steel channel with seals as required to meet leakage criteria.

3. Blades shall be galvanized steel or aluminum, 200mm (8 inch) maximum width, with edges sealed as required.

4. Bearing shall be nylon, bronze sleeve or ball type. 5. Hardware shall be zinc-plated steel. Connected rods and linkage shall be

non-slip. Working parts of joints shall be brass, bronze, nylon or stainless steel.




D. Smoke Dampers and Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers: These dampers shall be classified as a Class II/III leakage rated damper for use in smoke control systems under the latest version of UL 555S, and shall bear a UL Label attesting to same. Smoke dampers shall be suitable for 120 degrees c (250 degrees F).

E. Operators shall be electric or pneumatic type operating at 140 kPa (20 psig) as

required for proper operation.

1. Dampers that requires manual reset or link replacement after actuation shall not be acceptable. See drawings for required control operation.

2. Metal parts shall be aluminum, mill finish galvanized steel, or zinc plated steel or stainless steel.

3. Maximum air velocity and pressure drop through free area the dampers:

a. Smoke damper in air handling unit; 210 meter per minute (700 fpm). b. Duct mounted damper; 600 meter per minute (2000 fpm).

F. Control Valves F1. Control Valves (Standard)

1. Valves shall be rated for a minimum of 150 percent of system operating

pressure at the valve location but not less than 900 kPa (125 psi). 2. Valves 50 mm (2inches) and smaller shall be bronze body with threaded or

flare connections. 3. Valves 60 mm (2 ½ inches) and larger shall be bronze or iron body with

flanged connections. 4. Brass or bronze seats except for valves controlling media above 100 degrees

C (210 degrees F), which shall have stainless steel seats. 5. Flow characteristics: a. Three way valves shall have a linear relation or equal percentage

relation of flow versus value position. b. Two-way valves position versus flow relation shall be linear for steam

and equal percentage for water flow control. 6. Maximum pressure drop:

a. Two position steam control, 20 percent of inlet gauge pressure. b. Modulating Steam Control, 80 percent of inlet gauge pressure

(acoustic velocity limitation). c. Modulating water flow control, greater of 3 meters (10 feet) of water

or the pressure drop through the apparatus. d. Two position water valves shall be line size.

F2. Control Valves (Pressure Independent Dynamic Control Valve) 1. General

1.1 Contractor shall install Dynamic Control Valves where indicated in

drawings. 1.2 Valve shall be electronic, dynamic, modulating, 2-way, control device. 1.3 Dynamic control valve shall accurately control flow, independent of

System pressure fluctuation, at minimum 250 points between maximum flow setting and 0.

1.4 Maximum flow setting shall be adjustable to a minimum 50 different settings within the range of valve size.




2. Valve Actuator

2.1 Valve actuator housing shall be rated to IP 44 insulation. 2.2 Actuator shall be driven by brushes 24 VDC motor, and shall accept

2-10 VDC, 4-20mA, or 3-point floating electric signal and shall include resister to facilitate any of these signals.

2.3 Actuator shall be capable of providing 4-20mA or 2-10vDC feedback signal to the control System.

2.4 Actuator shall be capable of minimum 250 points of control between maximum and minimum signal.

2.5 Provide fail safe, super capacitor system to power valve to either open or closed position from any position in case of power failure shall be available.

2.6 Provide External LED read-out of current valve position and maximum valve position setting shall be available.

3. Valve Housing

3.1 Housing shall be constructed of forged ASTM (CuZn39Pb2) brass rated at no less than 25 Bar static pressure and 120oC ( for 15mm-40mm size) and ductile iron ASTM A536-65T, Class 60-45-18 rated at no less than 400 KPA static pressure and 120oC ( for 50mm-80mm size).

3.2 Valve housing shall be double union construction with a range of pipe connections available for the appropriate pipe size (15mm-40mm).

4. Flow Regulation Unit

4.1 Flow regulation unit shall consist of; Poly-Oxy methaline and

hydrogenated acrylonitrile butadiene rubber (for 15mm-40mm size), and 316 stainless steel and hydrogenated acrylonitrile butadiene rubber (for 50mm-80mm size), and both shall be capable of controlling flow within +/-5% of each rated flow.

4.2 Flow regulation unit shall be accessible, for maintenance. 4.3 Provide dual pressure/temperature test valves for verifying accuracy

of flow performance shall be available for all valve sizes.

5. Accessories 5.1 Digital manometer / thermometer shall be provided as a dual hose

portable kit, shall be capable of measuring pressure in Pascal, Bar, PSI, Atmospheres, Millimeters of mercury, or Meters of water, shall have a pressure range of 0 to 20,000 bar in seven scales with automatic change of scale within +/-0.5% tolerance; and a temperature range of -200oC to 400oC in two scales with automatic change of scale within 0.2% tolerance; all kits shall include flow rate chart for determining flow rate.

G. Dampers and Valve Operators and Relays: 1. Pneumatic operators, spring return type with non-ferrous metal bellows or

diaphragm of neoprene or other elastomer location. Bellows or diaphragm shall be of sufficient size so that a change in operating pressure of not more than 2 percent of the total motor operating pressure range will be required to start the valve or damper moving. Provide positive positioning or sequencing relays with adjustable operating range and starting point for operators sequenced with other operators to permit adjustment of control sequences, except for control valves in confined spaces in terminal units, which may use springs with range selected to provide necessary sequencing.




2. Electric damper operator shall provide full modulating control of dampers. A linkage and pushrod shall be furnished for mounting the actuator on the damper frame internally in the duct or externally on the duct wall, or shall be furnished with a direct-coupled design.

3. Electronic damper operators: VAV Box actuator shall be mounted on the damper axle or shall be of the air valve design, and shall provide complete modulating control of the dampers. The motor shall have a closure torque of 35-inch pounds minimum with full torque applied at close off to attain minimum leakage.

4. Relays shall be of the following type: a. Pneumatic: Diverting, selector, proportional, sequencing, ratio,

positive positioning, biasing, repeating. b. Electrical Interlocking Relays: Electric-pneumatic (EP) or pneumatic-

electric (PE) types. c. Electrical pilot duty of contactor types. Provide inductive rated

contacts for circuits with coils, motors or other inductive devices.

1.7 AIR FLOW CONTROL AND MONITORING

A. Airflow and static pressure shall be controlled via digital controller (CUs) with inputs from airflow control measuring stations and static pressure inputs as specified. Controller outputs shall be true analog output signals to pneumatic positioners or variable frequency drives. Pulse width modulation outputs are not acceptable. The CUs shall include the capability to control via simple proportional (P) control, proportional plus integral (PI), proportional plus integral plus derivative (PID), and on-off. The airflow control programs shall be factory-tested programs that are documented in the literature of the control manufacturer.

B. Air Flow Measuring Station 1. Airflow measuring stations shall measure airflow by the Pitot tube traverse

method. Each unit shall consist of a network of static and total pressure sensors, factory positioned and connected in parallel, to produce and equalized velocity pressure. The measured velocity pressure converted to airflow (cfm) shall have accuracy within 2 percent of the full scale throughout the velocity range from 200 to 1,200 meter per minute (700 to 4,000 fpm).

2. Airflow measuring stations shall consist of 16-gauge sheet metal casing, an aluminium air velocity treatment and air straightening section with an open face area not less than 97 percent and a total and static pressure sensing manifold made of copper. Each station shall contain non-combustible sensors, which shall be incapable of producing toxic gases of fumes in the event of elevated duct temperatures. All interconnecting tubing shall be internal to the unit with the exception of one total pressure and one static pressure meter connection.

3. Each airflow measuring station shall be installed to meet at least the manufacturer’s minimum installation conditions and shall not amplify the sound level within the duct. The maximum resistance to airflow shall not exceed 0.3 times the velocity head for the duct stations and 0.6 time the velocity head for the fan stations. The unit shall be suitable for continuous operation up to a temperature of 120 degree C (250 degrees F).

4. Differential pressure transducers shall measure and transmit pressure signals to the direct digital controller CU. The differential pressure transducers shall operate in one of four ranges of the total span.




1.8 ULTRASONIC, THERMAL, THERMAL-ENERGY METERS:

1. Basis-of-Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Honeywell or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Dynasonics b. Siemens Energy and Automation, Inc. c. Tangshan Huizhong Instrumentation Co., Ltd.

2. Description: Meter with flow sensor, temperature sensors, transmitter, indicator, and connecting wiring.

3. Flow Sensor: Transit-time ultrasonic type with transmitter. 4. Temperature Sensors: Insertion-type or strap-on transducer. 5. Indicator: Solid-state, integrating-type meter with integral battery pack.

a. Data Output: Six-digit electromechanical counter with readout in kilowatts per hour or British thermal units (joules)

b. Battery Pack: Five-year lithium battery. 6. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent. 7. Display: Visually indicates total fluid volume in gallons (liters) and thermal-

energy flow in kilowatts per hour or British thermal units (joules). 8. Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each thermal-

energy meter system. 9. Mount thermal-energy meters on wall if accessible; if not provide brackets to

support meters.

1.9 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION / CONTROL SEQUENCE I. Chiller Plant Control System

General System Capabilities

1. The chiller plant control software shall have the ability to control a maximum of 3 chillers of any type running on Lon Works Protocol Communication or BACnet.

2. The software shall be able to control both constant and variable flow systems as well as parallel, series and decoupled piping configurations.

3. This program shall have the ability to sequence the multiple chillers to minimize energy consumption. The program shall provide sequence of operation as described on the drawings and include the following as a minimum:

a. Automatic start/stop of chillers and auxiliaries in accordance

with the sequence of operation shown on the drawings, while incorporating requirements and restraints, such as starting frequency of the equipment imposed by equipment manufacturers.

b. Generate chilled water plant load profiles for different seasons for use in forecasting efficient operating schedule.

II. AHU (CAV)

A. Normal Mode

1. The system shall be provided with Manual-Off Auto (H-0-A) selector

switch. In the Manual mode, each individual component can be operated manually while automatic operation is disabled. In system off mode, neither manual nor automatic operation is possible.

2. In the auto mode, the system is started or stopped remotely thru the BMS or the local motor control panel at the AHU Room.




3. Upon start of the AHU, AC control system is energized, fresh/outdoor air damper opens to its pre-set position, control valve opens and modulates based on the average return air temperature (or room temperature for zones with single space) being sensed.

4. The fresh/outdoor air damper throttles based on the CO2 level difference between the outdoor air and as sensed by the CO2 sensor located at the return of the AHU and/or at the space/room. A 700 ppm difference is maintained by the System. The minimum quantity of fresh/outdoor air supplied by the FAHU to each floor should be enough to maintain building pressurization at all times.

5. Dirty filter status and alarm for each of the filters shown shall be indicated in the BMS.

6. Alarm is indicated in the BMS when the preset CO2 differential is exceeded by more than 10% ppm when the motorized damper is fully open.

7. The other parameters monitored by the BMS are as shown in the BMS points list and control schematic diagrams.

B. Emergency Mode

1. On fire mode as sensed by the smoke detector located in the return duct/return of the AHU or upon receipt of fire signal from Fire Alarm Panel, the AC system shall shutdown automatically.

2. The fresh/outdoor air damper opens to a preset level to admit supply/make-up air from the FAHU supply fan.

3. Visual and Audible Alarm mode shall be indicated in the BMS and the MCP at the AHU Room. Mute switch shall be provided to silence the alarm

4. After the emergency condition is over, the system shall be restored to normal mode thru a “System Restore” switch.

III. AHU (VAV)

A. Normal Mode

1. The system shall be provided with Manual-Off Auto (H-0-A) selector switch. In

the Manual mode, each individual component can be operated manually while automatic operation is disabled. In system off mode, neither manual nor automatic operation is possible.


3. Upon start of the AHU, AC control system is energized, fresh/outdoor air damper opens to its pre-set position, control valve opens and modulates in response to discharge air temperature as sensed by say by the thermostat which is resettable thru the BMS.

4. Variable air volume (VAV) terminals throttle to maintain the desired room temperatures. Based on the resulting increase in duct static pressure as sensed by the static pressure transmitter, the variable speed drive (VSD) slows down the AHU fan to maintain the desired static pressure setting. Upon increase in demand for cooling, the VAV terminals modulates to open position, thereby decreasing the duct static pressure and causes the VSD to speed up the AHU fan.

5. The fresh/outdoor air damper throttles based on the CO2 level difference between the outdoor air and as sensed by the CO2 sensor located at the return of the AHU and/or at the space/room. A 700 ppm difference is maintained by the System. The minimum quantity of fresh/outdoor air supplied by the FAHU to each floor should be enough to maintain building pressurization at all times.





7. Alarm is indicated in the BMS when the preset CO2 differential is exceeded by more than 10% ppm when the motorized damper is fully open.


B. Emergency Mode

1. On fire mode as sensed by the smoke detector located in the return duct/return of the AHU or upon receipt of fire signal from Fire Alarm Panel, the AC system shall shutdown automatically.

2. The fresh/outdoor air damper opens to a preset level to admit supply/make-up air from the FAHU supply fan.

3. Visual and Audible Alarm mode shall be indicated in the BMS and the MCP at the AHU Room. Mute switch shall be provided to silence the alarm.

4. After the emergency condition is over, the system shall be restored to normal mode thru a “System Restore” switch.

IV. Pressurization Fans

A. Normal Mode 1. The system shall be provided with the Manual-Off Auto (H-0-A) selector

switch. In the Manual mode, each individual component can be operated manually while automatic operation is disabled. In system off mode, neither manual nor automatic operation is possible.

B. Fire Mode

1. The H-0-A is set in the auto mode, the system is started or stopped remotely

thru the BMS. 2. Upon receipt of Fire Signal from Fire Alarm Panel, the control program will

energize the variable frequency drive. 3. The variable frequency drive will vary the fan motor speed thru its space

differential pressure sensor/transmitter to maintain a pressure differential of 25 Pa to 50 Pa between the stairway and adjacent corridor.

4. On/off status and trip alarm points shall be indicated in the BMS for monitoring.

C. Other Monitoring Points

1. The other points monitored by the BMS are shown in the BMS points list. V. Exhaust Fans

A. Normal Mode

1. The system shall be provided with Manual-Off Auto (H-0-A) selector switch. In the Manual mode, each individual component can be operated manually while automatic operation is disabled. In system off mode, neither manual nor automatic operation is possible.

B. Auto Mode

1. The H-0-A is set in the auto mode, the system is started or stopped remotely

thru the BMS. 2. When the fan is running, indication is monitored thru its air flow by means of

air flow sensor/transmitter. 3. On/off status and trip alarm points shall be indicated in the BMS for

monitoring.




VI. Supply Fans

A. Normal Mode 1. The system shall be provided with Manual –Off Auto (H-O-A) selector switch.

In the Manual mode, each individual component can be operated manually while automatic operation is disabled. In the system off mode, neither manual nor automatic operation is possible.

B. Auto Mode

1. The H-O-A is set in the auto mode, the system is started or stopped remotely thru the BMS.

2. When the fan is running, indication is monitored thru its flow by means of air flow sensor transmitter.


VII. Carpark Supply and Exhaust Fans

A. Normal Mode 1. The system shall be provided with Manual-Off Auto (H-O-A) selector switch.


B. Auto Mode (Supply)

1. The H-O-A is set in the auto mode, the system is started or stopped remotely

thru the BMS. 2. The control program will start fans and/or cycle between high & low speed

based on control matrix to be specified later. 3. Confirmation of the air flow will be determined by air flow switch mounted at

the supply duct and will indicate in the BMS that the system is running. 4. On/off status and trip alarm points shall be indicated in the BMS for

monitoring.

C. Auto Mode (Exhaust Fan) 1. The H-O-A is set in the auto mode, the system is started (and/or cycle

between high & low speed) and stopped remotely thru the BMS. 2. The control program will start when either the space temperature sensor or

the carbon monoxide sensor value has reached its preset value, which is user adjustable in the BMS, the control will start the exhaust fan or fans and induction fans per zoning as shown on the drawings based on control matrix to be specified later. This control will complement the supply fans to have continuous flow of clean air in the carpark


D. Emergency Mode (Exhaust)

1. On fire mode, upon receipt of fire signal from the fire alarm panel, the exhaust

fans of the floor on fire are energized and operated on high speed. Supply fans on this floor shall shutdown automatically.

2. Fans on all other parking floors shall also shutdown automatically. 3. After emergency condition is over, the system shall be restored to normal

mode thru a “system restore” switch.




VIII. Fan Coil Unit

A. Normal Mode 1. The system shall be provided with Manual-Off Auto (H-O-A) selector switch.


B. Auto Mode

1. The H-O-A is set in the auto mode, the system is started or stopped remotely thru the BMS. Time schedule and user input will start the auto mode.

2. The temperature control will be determined by the temperature sensor mounted inside the room. The control program will maintain the room temperature by modulating the cooling valve.


4. For fan coil units serving common areas, fan shall automatically switch to low speed when rooms are unoccupied.

IX. Fresh Air Handling Unit (FAHU) With Integrated Heat Recovery Wheel

A. Normal Mode

1. The system shall be provided with the Manual-Off Auto (H-0-A) selector switch. In the Manual mode, each individual component can be operated manually while automatic operation is disabled. In system off mode, neither manual nor automatic operation is possible.


3. The system is composed of air handling unit, one exhaust fan for toilet exhaust and electrical exhaust, one exhaust fan for general exhaust, and the integrated Heat Recovery Wheel.

4. The FAHU pre-cools the fresh air supplied to AHUs located at each floor. Exhaust air from toilets, and electrical/communication rooms, and building general exhaust pass through one side of the Heat Recovery Wheel (HRW) before being discharged outside of the building. Fresh air from the outside pass through the other side of HRW. As the HRW rotates, the ambient fresh air is pre-cooled by the exhaust air before passing through the coil.

5. The motorized dampers at the fresh/outdoor air ducts of the AHU at every floor throttle depending on the required fresh/outdoor air as dictated through the BMS and as sensed by the CO2 sensor. Based on the resulting increase in duct static pressure as sensed by the Static Pressure Transmitter (SPT), the Variable Speed Drive (VSD) slows down the supply fan of the FAHU. This VSD is interlocked with the VSD of the General Exhaust Fan to maintain building pressurization. The VSD slows down the General Exhaust Fan.



B. Emergency Mode

1. On fire mode, upon receipt of fire signal from the fire alarm panel, the AC system shall shutdown automatically.

2. The Normally Open (N.O.) motorized damper at the general exhaust duct of the floor on fire remains open while the normally closed (N.C.) motorized damper automatically opens. All motorized dampers at other floors automatically close.




3. The general exhaust fan is energized and extracts smoke from the floor on fire. The N.O. motorized damper located at the discharge duct of the fan closes, the N.C. motorized damper opens, and the smoke/extracted air is discharged outside of the building without passing through the HRW. The other exhaust fan remains off.

4. The supply fan at the FAHU is energized and supplies make-up air/supply air to the building.

5. Visual and audible alarm mode shall be indicated in the BMS and the MCP at the AHU room. Mute switch shall be provided to silence the alarm.

6. After the emergency condition is over, the system shall be restored to normal mode thru a “system restore” switch.

Note: Refer to AHU (CAV) / AHU (VAV) sequence of operations for interfacing with FAHU.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION A. Meet applicable codes, each manufacturer's recommended installation procedures

and Division 16 requirements.

B. Install all equipment so as to be mechanically stable and to allow easy access. Fix as necessary to wall or floor. Provide anti-vibration mounting where required to properly isolate the equipment.

C. Install all equipment in locations providing adequate ambient conditions for its

specified functioning, allowing for adequate ventilation.

D. Provide complete shop drawings for review.

E. Review proposed location of any equipment with Owner prior to its installation. F. Where the point schedules indicate auxiliary contact provision, provide all

instrumentation, wiring, conduit, power supplies and services as required to integrate these points into the BMS.

G. Provide interposing and motor control relays at the local item of equipment or at the

associated MCC as applicable. Provide all relays, wiring, conduit, power supplies and services as required to integrate these points into the BMS.

H. Wire all equipment which is part of the same control loop to the same field panel.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Provide for each piece of instrumentation and end device, a 50 mm x 75 mm plastic

nameplate embossed to indicate the following:

1. Mnemonic for point 2. Remote field panel and termination 3. English language description 4. Field panel




B. Affix the nameplate to the equipment with self-tapping screws or bead chain or similar

device. C. Submit specimen nameplate and a complete list of descriptive titles for approval prior

to installation.

3.3 WIRING A. Provide all wiring required for Instrumentation. Install in IMC conduit, and otherwise

comply with Division 16 requirements. Approved plenum cable wire may be used where allowed by code.

B. Provide power wiring from nearest emergency powered panel to each field device as

required.

C. Provide necessary relays required to interconnect equipment.

D. Install wiring parallel and perpendicular to building planes.

3.4 FACTORY BUILT EQUIPMENT A. Factory built equipment such as roof top air conditioners, gas fired make up air units,

VAV terminals, water source heat pumps, etc., require control devices supplied by this section, refer to individual Specification Sections for exact requirements.

B. Provide all required components to completely interface items with the BMS, including

relays, actuators, thermostats, terminal control units and other devices to make a complete and operational system.

C. Install thermostats and control wiring for equipment where thermostats are factory

supplied.

3.5 WARNING NOTICES A. Place warning notices at the MCC Panel, local starter and on or close to all motors

under BMS control.

B. Make the notices conspicuous with bold lettering to advise that the motor is under BMS control and may start at any time without warning. Submit sample notice for review prior to installation.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Sequence of Operation SECTION 15940

MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC. S:\admin\mpi\MP1716_Baguio General Hospital and Medical Trauma Center\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2018-04-06_100% DD\01-MECHANICAL\15940-Sequence of Operation.docx

PART 1 - GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ................................................................................................................................ 1 1.2 SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................................... 1 1.3 DEFINITIONS ................................................................................................................................................. 1 1.4 CENTRAL CHILLER PLANT CONTROL SEQUENCES ..................................................................................... 1 1.5 SEQUENCING ................................................................................................................................................ 4 1.6 COOLING TOWER SEQUENCING AND CONTROL .......................................................................................... 7 1.7 CHILLER / COOLING TOWER OPTIMIZATION ................................................................................................ 7 1.8 AIR-HANDLING-UNIT CONTROL SEQUENCES .............................................................................................. 8 1.9 VENTILATION SEQUENCES ......................................................................................................................... 12

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) ................................................................................................... 12 PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) .................................................................................................. 12


MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC. Page 1 of 12 S:\admin\mpi\MP1716_Baguio General Hospital and Medical Trauma Center\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2018-04-06_100% DD\01-MECHANICAL\15940-Sequence of Operation.docx

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes control sequences for ACMV systems, subsystems, and equipment.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 15 Section 15900 "Building Management System” for control equipment and devices and for submittal requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. DDC: Direct digital control.

1.4 CENTRAL CHILLER PLANT CONTROL SEQUENCES

(Sequence of Operation shown can be superseded by multi-chiller specific operation: Refer to BMS and Mechanical Plan for required points in chiller plant manager).

A. Start and Stop Condenser-Water Pump(s):

1. Enable: Allow pump to start when water is in cooling tower:

a. Input Device: Water pressure transducer. b. Output Device: Hard wired through motor VFD; DDC system binary output. c. Action: Confirm water in cooling-tower sump.

2. Enable: When outdoor-air temperature conditions are met:

a. Input Device: Space thermostat. b. Output Device: Hard wired through motor VFD; DDC system binary output. c. Action: Confirm outdoor-air temperature is above 50 deg F (10 deg C).

3. Enable: When demand conditions are met:

a. Input Device: DDC system software demand. b. Action: Confirm cooling demand from ventilation system(s).

4. Initiate:

a. Input Device: DDC system time schedule. b. Output Device: Binary output. c. Action: Energize pump(s).



5. Display:

a. Low-level cooling-tower sump alarm. b. Outdoor-air temperature. c. Cooling (software) demand indication. d. Time and time schedule. e. Condenser-water pump(s) on-off status. f. Condenser-water pump(s) on-off indication.

B. Start and Stop Chilled-Water Pump(s):

1. Input Device: Flow switch in condenser-water circuit. 2. Output Device: Starter DDC system command to starter relay. 3. Action: Energize pump(s). 4. Display:

a. Chilled-water flow indication. b. Chilled-water pump(s) on-off status. c. Chilled-water pump(s) on-off indication.

C. Start and Stop Cooling-Tower Fans(s):

1. Input Device: Flow switch in condenser-water circuit. 2. Output Device: Starter [DDC system command to starter relay. 3. Action: Energize fan(s). 4. Display:

a. Condenser-water flow indication. b. Cooling-tower fan(s) on-off indication.

D. Start and Stop Refrigeration Machine(s):

1. Input Device: Flow switch in condenser-water circuit. Flow switch in chilled-water circuit.

2. Output Device: Refrigeration DDC system command to refrigeration machine terminal strip.

3. Action: Energize refrigeration machine(s) internal control circuit. 4. Display:

a. Condenser-water flow indication. b. Chilled-water flow indication. c. Refrigeration machine on-off indication. d. Chilled-water supply and return temperature. e. Chilled-water temperature control-point adjustment.

E. Start and Stop Chiller(s):

1. Input Device: Flow switches in condenser-water and chilled-water circuit. 2. Output Device: DDC system command to chiller terminal strip. 3. Action: Energize chiller internal control circuit. 4. Display:

a. Condenser-water flow indication. b. Chilled-water flow indication. c. Chiller(s) on-off status. d. Chiller(s) on-off indication. e. Chilled-water supply and return temperature. f. Chilled-water temperature control-point adjustment.



F. Alternate Chiller(s):

1. Input Device: DDC system software. 2. Output Device: DDC system command to chiller terminal strip. 3. Action: Operate chiller(s) on lead-lag, alternating each startup. 4. Action: Adding and dropping chiller(s) as follows: 5. Display: Chiller(s) on-off indication.

G. Alarm Chiller(s) Start Failure:

1. Input Device: Chiller software signal. 2. Output Device: DDC system alarm. 3. Action: Signal alarm. 4. Display: Chiller "failure-to-start" indication.

H. Chilled-Water Level:

1. Input Device: Expansion tank liquid sensor. 2. Output Device: DDC system alarm. 3. Action: Signal alarm. 4. Display: Expansion tank low-level alarm.

I. Chilled-Water Supply Temperature:

1. Input Device: Temperature sensor in common chilled-water supply piping. 2. Output Device: DDC system signal to chiller control panel. 3. Action: Maintain constant leaving chilled-water temperature reset according to

highest cooling demand.

a. Display: Chilled-water supply temperature.

J. Condenser-Water Temperature:

1. Input Device: Temperature sensor in cooling-tower sump. 2. Output Device: DDC system command to cooling-tower fan starter relay. 3. Action: Modulate control valve open to cooling tower and closed to bypass and cycle

tower fan(s) on and off to maintain 65 70 deg F (21 deg C) sump temperature. Close valve when unoccupied.]

4. Display:

a. Condenser-water sump (return) control-point temperature. b. Condenser-water sump (return) temperature. c. Control-valve position. d. Cooling-tower fan(s) on-off indication. e. Condenser-water supply temperature.

K. Operator Station Display: Indicate the following on operator workstation display terminal:

1. DDC system graphic. 2. DDC system status, on-off. 3. Low-level cooling-tower sump alarm. 4. Outdoor-air temperature. 5. Cooling (software) demand indication. 6. Time and time schedule. 7. Condenser-water pump(s) on-off status. 8. Condenser-water pump(s) on-off indication. 9. Condenser-water flow indication.



10. Chilled-water pump(s) on-off status. 11. Chilled-water pump(s) on-off indication. 12. Cooling-tower fan(s) on-off indication. 13. Chilled-water flow indication. 14. Refrigeration machine on-off indication. 15. Chilled-water supply temperature. 16. Chilled-water return temperature. 17. Chilled-water temperature control-point adjustment. 18. Chiller(s) on-off status. 19. Chiller(s) on-off indication. 20. Chiller "failure-to-start" indication. 21. Expansion tank low-level alarm. 22. Condenser-water sump (return) control-point temperature. 23. Condenser-water sump (return) temperature. 24. Condenser-water control-valve position. 25. Cooling-tower fan(s) on-off indication. 26. Condenser-water supply temperature. 27. Cooling-tower sump temperature. 28. Cooling-tower sump heater on-off indication. 29. Cooling-tower dump indication. 30. Chilled-water pressure drop through chiller. 31. Entering condenser-water temperature. 32. Leaving condenser-water temperature. 33. Condenser-water pressure drop through chiller. 34. Chiller condenser-water supply and return temperature. 35. Chiller chilled-water supply and return temperature. 36. System capacity in tons.

1.5 SEQUENCING

The chiller plant control system will start and stop the chilled water pumps and chillers based upon system load.

1. When the chilled water system is enabled the chiller plant control system shall:

a. Send an Enable signal to the lead chiller. b. Upon receiving the enable signal, the chiller shall enable the chilled water

evaporator isolation valve. c. The isolation valve shall be controlled to 100% open. d. When the isolation valve is confirmed to be 100% open, the chiller plant

control system shall start the lead chilled water pump in the sequence. e. The chilled water pump shall be controlled to maintain the design pres-

sure set point for the system. f. Upon confirmation of evaporator water flow the chiller shall enable the

condenser pump that is connected to that chiller. g. Upon confirmation of condenser water flow the chiller shall continue its

pre-start sequence and start its compressor(s). h. Upon the start of each chiller the Chiller Plant Control system shall auto-

matically start chiller specific Trend Log Reports to include: i. Hourly logging of chiller

Unit Chilled Water Set point

Compressor(s) RLA

Evaporator Entering Water Temp

Evaporator Leaving Water Temp

Evaporator Flow Rate

Evaporator Approach Temp

Condenser Entering Water Temp

Condenser Leaving Water Temp

Condenser Approach Temp



ii. Five-minute logging of chiller:

Unit Chilled Water Setpoint

Compressor(s) RLA

Evaporator Entering Water Temp

Evaporator Leaving Water Temp


Condenser Entering Water Temp

Condenser Leaving Water Temp

2. The chiller plant control system shall initiate the start of the back-up chilled water pump when the pressure set point is not met for 5 minutes.

a. The active pumps shall run at required speed based on the load require-

ment. Differential pressure transmitter (DPT) located at 2/3 of the distance from the chilled water pump to the farthest AHU/ FCU (largest pressure drop of the chw system) normally controls the speed of the chilled water pumps. VFD regulates speed of pumps to vary capacity. When DPT senses decreasing pressure differential indicating increasing cooling de-mand, the VFD will ramp up speed of operating chilled water pumps.

3. The chiller plant control system shall initiate the start of the next chiller in the se-

quence whenever the chilled water load, as determined by the system supply wa-ter temperature, is not met for 20 minutes.

a. The chiller plant control system will unload operating chillers to an oper-

ator editable current limit prior to starting a lag chiller. b. Lag chillers shall start in a similar manner to the lead chiller start

sequence. 4. The chiller plant control system shall initiate the shutdown of the next chiller in the

sequence whenever excess chilled water capacity exists, as determined by per-cent run load amps, for 15 minutes.

5. Upon sensing a chiller failure the chiller plant control system shall shut down the

failed chiller immediately and initiate the start of the next chiller in the rotation se-quence.

6. The chiller plant control system shall control individual chiller set points to maintain

the system supply water temperature at set point.

7. The design system chilled water set point shall be 44 degrees F and editable by the operator.

8. Condenser water pumps shall maintain the required condenser flow rate on the chiller condenser by modulating the speed of the pump.

A. Chiller Minimum Flow By-Pass Valve Control

1. The Chiller Minimum Flow By-Pass line and valves shall be sized to allow for the

manufacturer’s recommended minimum flow, with all load control valves closed, for the chiller with the largest minimum flow rate in the system.

2. The “Chiller Minimum Flow By-Pass Valves” shall be a normally open valve.

3. The “Chiller Minimum Flow By-Pass Valves” shall be modulated to the fully open

position when the system is shutdown. This shall be done to prevent water hammer when a pump is started and to allow for minimum flow in the event the chiller calls for pump operation.



4. Following the confirmed start of the lead chiller and whenever system is enabled, the chiller plant controls system shall modulate the “Chiller Minimum Flow By-Pass Valve” such that the chilled water flow through any operating chiller(s) shall not drop below the manufacturer’s recommended minimum flow.

5. The chiller minimum flow shall be determined based on the pressure drop across

the chiller evaporator barrel using a high accuracy pressure differential sensor. The differential pressure set point shall be determined based on the manufactur-er’s chiller pressure drop rating curves.

Note: If differential pressure sensor(s) are used, high accuracy differential pressure

sensor(s) (0.2% at calibrated flow, 0.5% at other flow rates) should be specified. Differential pressure sensor(s) should be installed according to the manufacturer’s specifications.

B. System Soft Start - The chiller plant control system will initiate a “soft start” mode whenever

the system chilled water temperature exceeds the specified chilled water system set point by 20 degrees F at system start-up. The chiller plant control application will add cooling capaci-ty during soft start mode only if return water temperature is not declining at a rate of at least 0.5 degrees F per minute. This prevents the unnecessary operation of chillers and limits sys-tem electrical demand during chilled water loop pull down.

C. Automatic rotation of chillers and pumps.

1. Chiller rotation shall be initiated based on an operator entered day interval or by

the cycling of a binary point. The method of sequence shall be operator se-lectable.

2. Chiller cycling caused by normal system load fluctuations shall cause the chillers

to change rotation sequence or at the operator’s option chillers may be forced into the new rotation sequence at the time of sequence change.

3. Pump rotation shall be initiated by a schedule or by the cycling of a binary point.

D. Diagnostics/Protection - the Building Automation System shall be able to alarm from all

sensed points and diagnostic alarms monitored by the chiller controller.

E. Chiller Status Report - Provide an operating status report for each chiller. The report(s) shall provide the present for the following information to provide the operator with critical chiller operating data.

Compressor On/Off Status

Compressor Starts/Run Hours

Compressor Phase 1/2/3 Percent RLA - separate for each compressor

Compressor Current Draw - RLA Percent

Active Chiller Diagnostics or Alarms

Leaving Chilled Water Temperature

Entering Chilled Water Temperature


Condenser Water Entering/Leaving Temperatures

Chilled Water Setpoint

Refrigerant Temperature Evaporator/Condenser - Separate for each circuit

Operating Mode

Chiller Model and Serial Number

Outside Air Dry Bulb

F. Demand Limiting - As part of the demand limiting scheme on the building, the chiller plant

control system shall be able to monitor and reduce peak power demand through the limiting



of chiller current draw. 1.6 COOLING TOWER SEQUENCING AND CONTROL

A. Chiller condenser pump VSD to maintain l the designed flow specified by the chiller manu-facturer.

B. Cooling Tower Fan Control

1. Cooling tower fan speed shall be controlled by BAS to achieve the lowest possi-ble/ optimum condenser water temperature supply to the chillers. Reset conden-ser supply temperature based on outside air wet bulb temperature per reset schedule below:).

Outside air wet bulb (⁰F) Condenser supply temperature (⁰F) Remarks

82 87

81 86

80 85

79 84

78 83

2. All cooling towers fans are equipped with VSD drives. When a cooling tower is operating with its corresponding chiller as programmed to the BAS, the BAS shall monitor the condenser water supply temperature and modulate the cooling tower fan to achieve the optimum cooling tower supply temperature and fan speed. Cooling tower temperature reset shall be enable based on the above tabulation. This is to save energy on cooling tower fan and on the chiller side.

3. Each cooling tower is equipped with motorized valve on both inlet and outlet con-denser water pipes. Both motorized valves shall automatically open whenever its corresponding cooling tower is stage on and automatically close whenever its corresponding cooling tower is stage off. 1 min time delay between inlet motor-ized valve and outlet motorized valve closing is recommended to avoid overflow-ing of water on the cooling tower basin. Cooling tower fan sequence shall be ro-tated on a 7 day basis to equalize fan run time.

1.7 CHILLER / COOLING TOWER OPTIMIZATION

A. Cooling Tower Leaving Water Set point Optimization

1. The chiller plant control system shall calculate the optimal cooling tower set point at any chiller(s) load and ambient wet bulb. The chiller plant control system shall pro-vide as an output on leaving tower water temperature set point.

2. Optimal performance is defined as the lowest total kW input consumed by both chiller(s) plus cooling tower(s) while maintaining chilled water set point.

3. Carrier and BAC should fill in the following table based on data for the chiller and tower. BAS contractor should verify optimal set point based on estimated chiller + tower power (kW) data.

Chiller Load (% Full Load)

Wet Bulb (deg. F)

Tower Setpoint (deg. F)

Chiller + Tower Power (kw)

100% 82 87

90% 81 86

80% 80 85

70% 79 84

60% 78 83

50% 77 82

40 % 76 81

30% 75 80

20% 74 79



10% 73 78

4. At all times the tower leaving set point shall be limited within the high and low values specific to the chiller(s) being supplied as specified by the chiller manufacturer.

5. The chiller plant control system shall include a chiller/cooling tower optimization rou-tine. As a minimum, the following chiller and tower characteristics shall be used in the optimization routine.

a. Chiller type (per chiller) b. Chiller full load efficiency (kW/ton) c. Chiller part load performance (kW/ton) (efficiencies from 100-10% in 10%

increments) d. Chiller condenser water flow rate e. Tower type (per tower) f. Tower approach temperature g. Tower range h. Actual instantaneous chiller tons

6. The chiller plant control system shall scan the chiller(s) load and ambient WB tem-perature every 15 minutes. Using these inputs and both the chiller and cooling tower characteristics noted above, the chiller/cooling tower optimization routine shall calcu-late the optimal chiller plus tower performance.

1.8 AIR-HANDLING-UNIT CONTROL SEQUENCES

A. Start and Stop Supply Fan(s):

1. Enable:

a. Input Device: Duct-mounted thermostat, located in return air. b. Output Device: Hard wired through motor starter; DDC system alarm. c. Action: Allow start if duct temperature is below 300 deg F (150 deg C).

2. Enable: Smoke Evacuation:

a. Input Device: Duct-mounted smoke detector, located in return supply air. b. Output Device: Hard wired through motor starter; DDC system alarm. c. Action: Allow start if duct is free of products of combustion.

3. Initiate: Occupied Time Schedule:

a. Input Device: DDC system time schedule. b. Output Device: Binary output to motor starter. c. Action: Energize fan(s).

4. Initiate: Unoccupied Time Schedule:

a. Input Device: DDC system demand. b. Output Device: Binary output to motor starter. c. Action: Energize fan(s).

5. Unoccupied Ventilation:

a. Input Device: DDC system time schedule and output. b. Output Device: DDC system binary output to motor starter. c. Action: Cycle fan(s) during unoccupied periods.

6. Display: Supply-fan on-off indication.



B. Supply Fan(s) Variable-Volume Control:

1. Occupied Time Schedule:

a. Input Device: DDC system time schedule. b. Output Device: Binary output c. Action: Enable control.

2. Volume Control:

a. Input Device: Static-pressure transmitter sensing supply-duct static pressure referenced to conditioned-space static pressure.

b. Output Device: DDC system analog output to motor speed controller. Set variable-speed drive to minimum speed when fan is stopped.

c. Action: Maintain constant supply-duct static pressure.

3. High Pressure:

a. Input Device: Static-pressure transmitter sensing supply-duct static pressure referenced to static pressure outside the duct.

b. Output Device: DDC system binary output to alarm panel motor starter. c. Action: Stop fan and signal alarm when static pressure rises above excessive-

static-pressure set point.

4. Display:

a. Supply-fan-discharge static-pressure indication. b. Supply-fan-discharge static-pressure set point. c. Supply-fan airflow rate. d. Supply-fan speed.

C. Mixed-Air Control:


a. Input Device: DDC system time schedule. b. Output Device: DDC system output. c. Action: Enable control.

2. Minimum Position:

a. Input Device DDC system time schedule. b. Output Device: DDC system analog output to modulating damper actuator(s). c. Action: Open minimum outdoor-air dampers

3. Cooling Reset:

a. Input Device: Outdoor- and return-air, duct-mounted electronic temperature sensors.

b. Output Device: DDC system analog output to damper actuator(s). c. Action: Set outdoor-air dampers to minimum position

4. Unoccupied Time Schedule:

a. Input Device: DDC system time schedule b. Output Device: DDC system analog output to modulating damper actuator(s).



c. Action: Position outdoor- and relief-air dampers closed and return-air dampers open.

5. Display:

a. Mixed-air-temperature indication. b. Mixed-air-temperature set point. c. Mixed-air damper position.

D. Filters: During occupied periods, when fan is running, differential air-pressure transmitters exist.


a. Input Device: DDC system time schedule. b. Output Device DDC system output. c. Action: Enable control.

2. Differential Pressure:

a. Input Device: Differential-pressure switches b. Output Device: DDC system alarm. c. Action: Signal alarm on low- and high-pressure conditions.

3. Display:

a. Filter air-pressure-drop indication. b. Filter low-air-pressure set point.

e. Filter high-air-pressure set point.

E. Hydronic Cooling Coil:


a. Input Device: DDC system time schedule. b. Output Device Binary output. c. Action: Enable control.

2. Supply Air Temperature:

a. Input Device: DDC (refer to Section 15900 – Building Management System) b. Output Device: Normally closed modulating control valve. c. Action: Maintain supply-air temperature set point of 55 deg F (13 deg C).

3. Temperature Reset:

a. Input Device: Duct-mounted thermostat in return air. b. Output Device: DDC system in straight-line relationship for the following

conditions:

1. 65 deg F (18 deg C)] when return-air temperature is 70 deg F (21 deg C) 2. 53 deg F (11.66 deg C) when return-air temperature is 75 deg F (24

deg C)

4. Temperature Reset:

a. Input Device: DDC system with input from room temperature sensors.

b. Output Device: DDC system.



5. Unoccupied Time Schedule:

a. Input Device: DDC system time schedule. b. Output Device: Binary output. c. Action: Disable control.

6. Display:

a. Fan-discharge air-temperature indication. b. Fan-discharge air-temperature set point. c. Cooling-coil air-temperature indication. d. Cooling-coil air-temperature set point. e. Cooling-coil control-valve position. f. Cold-deck air-temperature indication. g. Cold-deck air-temperature set point.

F. Coordination of Air-Handling Unit Sequences: Ensure that cooling-coil controls have common inputs and do not overlap in function.

G. Operator Station Display: Indicate the following on operator workstation display terminal:

1. DDC system graphic. 2. DDC system on-off indication. 3. DDC system occupied/unoccupied mode. 4. Outdoor-air-temperature indication. 5. Supply-fan on-off indication. 6. Supply-fan-discharge static-pressure indication. 7. Supply-fan-discharge static-pressure set point. 8. Supply-fan airflow rate. 9. Supply-fan

10. Building static-pressure indication. 11. Building static-pressure set point. 12. Filter air-pressure-drop indication. 13. Filter low-air-pressure set point. 14. Filter high-air-pressure set point. 15. Fan-discharge air-temperature indication. 16. Fan-discharge air-temperature set point. 17. Cooling-coil air-temperature indication. 18. Cooling-coil air-temperature set point. 19. Cooling-coil control-valve position. 20. Cold-deck air-temperature indication. 21. Cold-deck air-temperature set point. 22. Room temperature indication. 23. Room temperature set point. 24. Multi-zone damper position.

H. Two-Pipe, Single-Coil, Fan-Coil Unit:


a. Input Device: DDC system time schedule. b. Output Device: Binary output. c. Action: Start and stop fan and enable control.

2. Room Temperature:

a. Input Device: DDC (refer to Section 15900 – Building Management System) b. Output Device: Electronic control-valve operator. c. Action: Modulate valve to maintain temperature.



3. DDC System Changeover:

a. Input Device: Thermostat b. Output Device: Hard-wired relay c. Action: Reverse control-valve action to switch from heating to cooling.

4. Display:

a. DDC system graphic. b. DDC system on-off indication. c. DDC system occupied/unoccupied mode. d. Room temperature indication. e. Room temperature set point. f. Control-valve position. g. Supply-water temperature indication.

I. VAV, Terminal Air Units

1. Occupancy:

a. Input Device: Occupancy sensor. b. Output Device: DDC system binary output. c. Action: Report occupancy and enable occupied temperature set point.

1. Occupied Temperature: 75 deg F (24 deg C). 2. Unoccupied Temperature: 65 deg F (18 deg C).

2. Room Temperature:

a. Input Device Electronic temperature sensor. b. Action: Modulate damper and valve to maintain temperature.

1. Sequence damper from full open to minimum position, then valve from closed to fully open.

3. Display: a. Room/area served. b. Room occupied/unoccupied. c. Room temperature indication. d. Room temperature set point. e. Room temperature set point, occupied. f. Room temperature set point, unoccupied. g. Air-damper position as percent open. h. Control-valve position as percent open.

1.9 VENTILATION SEQUENCES

A. Exhaust Fan: wall mounted switch/room thermostat cycles fan.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Testing, Adjusting and Balancing SECTION 15950


Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.doc

PART 1 - GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................................... 1 1.2 RELATED WORK ....................................................................................................................................... 1 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................................................... 1 1.4 SUBMITTALS ............................................................................................................................................. 2 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS ..................................................................................................................... 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................................................ 3

2.1 PLUGS ...................................................................................................................................................... 3 2.2 INSULATION REPAIR MATERIAL ............................................................................................................... 3 2.3 AIR BALANCE SYSTEM KIT SIMILAR TO “FLOWHOOD” BY SHORTRIDGE INSTRUMENTS INC. OR

APPROVED EQUAL ................................................................................................................................... 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION ....................................................................................................................................... 4

3.1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................. 4 3.2 INSPECTING EQUIPMENT AND INSTALLATION FOR CONFORMANCE WITH DESIGN ............................... 4 3.3 TAB PROCEDURES ................................................................................................................................... 4 3.4 VIBRATION TESTING ................................................................................................................................ 5 3.5 SOUND TESTING ...................................................................................................................................... 5 3.6 DUCT AIR LEAKAGE TESTING ................................................................................................................. 6




SECTION 15950

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) of heating, ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC) systems. TAB includes the following:

1. Planning systematic TAB procedures.

2. Inspecting equipment and installations for conformance with design.

3. Balancing air systems; adjustment of total system to provide design performance; and testing performance of equipment and automatic controls.

4. Vibration and sound measurements.

5. Recording and reporting results.

B. Definitions:

6. Basic TAB used in this Section: Chapter 34, "Testing, Adjusting and Balancing" of ASHRAE Handbook, "HVAC Applications".

7. TAB: Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. The process of checking and adjusting HVAC systems to meet design objectives.

8. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

9. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

10. Air Systems: Includes all outside air, supply air, return air, exhaust air and relief air systems.

11. Flow rate tolerance: The allowable percentage variation, minus to plus, of actual flow rate from values (design) in the contract documents.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 15050, Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods

B. Section 15011, Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls

C. Section l5080, Mechanical Insulation.

D. Section 15815, Metal Ducts And Accessories


A. Refer to Articles, Quality Assurance and Submittals, in Section 15050, Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.

B. TAB Agency Qualification: Current membership in AABC or certification by NEBB.

C. Test Equipment Criteria: The basic instrumentation requirements and accuracy/calibration required by AABC, National Standards or by NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems.




D. TAB Criteria:

1. One or more of the applicable AABC, NEBB or SMACNA publications, supplemented by ASHRAE Handbook "HVAC Applications" Chapter 34, shall be the basis for planning, procedures, and reports.

2. Flow rate tolerance: Values are based on discussion in ASHRAE Handbook "HVAC Applications", Chapter 34. Air Filter resistance during tests, artificially imposed if necessary, shall be at least 80 percent of final values for pre-filters and after filters.

a. Air handling unit cubic meters/min (cubic feet per minute): Minus 0 percent to plus l0 percent.

b. All other fans: Minus 0 percent to plus l0 percent.

c. Air terminal units (Max): Minus 5 percent to plus l0 percent.

d. Exhaust hoods/cabinets: Minus 0 percent to plus l0 percent.

e. Minimum outside air: Minus 0 percent to plus 10 percent.

f. Individual room air outlets and inlets, and air flow rates not mentioned above: Minus l0 percent to plus l0 percent.

3. Systems shall be adjusted for energy efficient operation as described in PART 3.

4. Typical TAB procedures and results shall be demonstrated to the Consultant for one air distribution system (including all fans, three terminal units, three rooms) and one hydronic system (pumps and three coils) as follows:

a. When field TAB work begins.

b. During each partial final inspection and the final inspection for the project if requested by the Consultant.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, Submittals.

B. TAB Agency qualifications: Submit names and qualifications of company officers and job supervisor. Submit information on three recently completed projects. Submit list of proposed test equipment.

C. For use by the Consultant staff, submit one complete set of applicable AABC or NEBB publications that will be the basis of TAB work.

D. TAB Reports to be submitted for review:

1. Inspection reports covering equipment and systems installation. These reports are to be submitted during early stages of the project in order to allow timely correction of deficiencies.

2. TAB reports covering flow balance and adjustments, performance tests, vibration tests, and sound tests. These reports shall be submitted prior to or at the time of requesting final inspection, or partial final inspections of contract work.

a. Include in final reports uncorrected installation deficiencies noted during TAB and applicable explanatory comments on test results that differ from design requirements.




E. For equipment and material submittals, provide certificate of origin to be included in the submittal and bill of lading before delivery to site.


A. The following publications form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by the reference thereto. In text the publications are referenced to by the initials of the organization.

B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE):

- ASHRAE Handbook, 1995 HVAC Applications, Chapter 34, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing; Chapter 43, Sound and Vibration Control.

C. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC):

- AABC National Standards MN-l, 5th Edition, 1989.

D. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB):

- Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, Balancing of Environmental Systems, 5th Edition, September l991.

- Procedural Standards for the Measurement and Assessment of Sound and Vibration, 1994 Edition.

E. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA):

- HVAC SYSTEMS-Testing, Adjusting and Balancing, 2nd Edition, l993.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLUGS

Provide plastic plugs to seal holes drilled in ductwork for test purposes.

2.2 INSULATION REPAIR MATERIAL

Section, INSULATION. Provide for repair of insulation removed or damaged for TAB work.

2.3 AIR BALANCE SYSTEM KIT SIMILAR TO “FLOWHOOD” BY SHORTRIDGE INSTRUMENTS INC. OR

APPROVED EQUAL

A. Air Data Multimeter model ADM-850 complete with Airflow Measuring base assembly,

battery charger, carrying case.

B. Five top Kit (2” x 2, 2” x 4’, 1” x 5”, 3” x 3”)

C. Pilot tube 18” long

D. Temprobe (ADT 442)

E. Temperature netractile cord. 6’ long (TRC-16)

F. Temperature extension wand, 19” long (TRC-16)

G. Two A-303 static pressure tips.




H. Neoprene tubing set, two 5” long and one 10’ long.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Refer to TAB Criteria in Article, Quality Assurance.

B. Obtain applicable contract documents and copies of approved submittals for HVAC equipment and automatic control systems.

C. Coordinate TAB procedures with any phased construction completion requirements for the project. Systems serving completed phases of the project will require TAB for such phases prior to partial final inspections and for final phase inspection.

D. Allow sufficient time in construction schedule for TAB and submission of reports prior to partial final inspections and for final phase.

3.2 INSPECTING EQUIPMENT AND INSTALLATION FOR CONFORMANCE WITH DESIGN

A. GENERAL: The inspection and report is to be done after air distribution equipment is on site and duct installation has begun, but well in advance of performance testing and balancing work. The purpose of the inspection is to identify and report deviations from design and ensure that systems will be ready for TAB at the appropriate time.

B. Reports: Follow check list format developed by AABC, NEBB or SMACNA, supplemented by narrative comments, with emphasis on air handling units and fans. Check for conformance with submittals. Verify that diffuser and register sizes are correct. Check air terminal unit installation including flexible duct sizes and routing.

3.3 TAB PROCEDURES

A. General: During TAB all related system components shall be in full operation. Fan and pump rotation, motor loads and equipment vibration shall be checked and corrected as necessary before proceeding with TAB. Set controls and/or block off parts of distribution systems to simulate design operation of variable volume air or water systems for test and balance work.

B. Air Balance and Equipment Test: Include air handling units, fans, terminal units, room diffusers/outlets/inlets, and laboratory hoods and cabinets.

1. Artificially load air filters by partial blanking to produce air pressure drop of at least 80 percent of the design final pressure drop, or as prescribed under Pressurization Commissioning (Item 3.3 C).

2. Adjust fan speeds to provide design air flow. V-belt drives, including fixed pitch pulley requirements, are specified in Section 15050, BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS. Replace fan motors and associated electricals if necessary without additional cost to the owner. (Refer to Sections 15725 and 15836)

3. Test and balance systems in all specified modes of operation, including fire emergency modes. Verify that dampers and other controls function properly.

a. Coordinate TAB, including system volumetric controls, with Section 15950, TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING.

4. Record final measurements for air handling equipment performance data sheets.




C. Space Pressurization Commissioning.

3.4 VIBRATION TESTING

A. Furnish instruments and perform vibration measurements as specified in Section 15071, Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls. Field vibration balancing is specified in Section 15050, Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods. Provide measurements for all rotating HVAC equipment 373 watts (1/2 horsepower) and larger, including centrifugal/screw compressors, pumps, fans and motors.

B. Record initial and final measurements for each unit of equipment on test forms. Where vibration readings exceed the allowable tolerance and efforts to make corrections have proved unsuccessful, forward a separate report to the Consultant.

3.5 SOUND TESTING

A. Perform and record required sound measurements in accordance with Paragraph, QUALITY ASSURANCE in Section 15071 Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls.

1. Take readings in rooms, approximately /three/five/ten or percent of total rooms, designated by the Consultant.

B. Take measurements with a calibrated sound level meter and octave band analyzer of the accuracy required by AABC or NEBB.

C. Sound reference levels, formulae and coefficients shall be according to ASHRAE Handbook, "HVAC Applications", Chapter 43, SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL.

D. Determine compliance with specifications as follows:

1. Where sound pressure levels are specified, including the NC Criteria in Section 15071, Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls.

a. Reduce the background noise as much as possible by shutting off unrelated audible equipment.

b. Measure octave band sound pressure levels with specified equipment "off."

c. Measure octave band pressure levels with specified equipment "on."

d. Use the DIFFERENCE in corresponding readings to determine the sound pressure due to equipment.

DIFFERENCE: 0 1 2 3 4 5 - 9 10 or More

FACTOR: 10 7 4 3 2 1 0

Sound pressure level due to equipment equals sound pressure level with equipment "on" minus FACTOR.

e. Plot octave bands of sound pressure level due to equipment for typical rooms on a graph which also shows noise criteria (NC) curves.

2. When sound power levels are specified:

a. Perform steps 1.a. thru 1.d., as above.

b. For indoor equipment: Determine room attenuating effect, i.e., difference between sound power level and sound pressure level.




Determined sound power level will be the sum of sound pressure level due to equipment plus the room attenuating effect.

c. For outdoor equipment: Use directivity factor and distance from noise source to determine distance factor, i.e., difference between sound power level and sound pressure level. Measured sound power level will be the sum of sound pressure level due to equipment plus the distance factor.

E. Where measure sound levels exceed specified level, the installing contractor or equipment manufacturer shall take remedial action approved by the Consultant and the necessary sound tests shall be repeated.

3.6 DUCT AIR LEAKAGE TESTING

A. Refer Article, Quality Assurance, in Section 15815 - Metal Ducts and Accessories, for TAB agency’s role and responsibilities.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Carbon Monoxide Detection and Control SECTION 15985


Carbon Monoxide Detection and Control.doc

PART 1 - GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 WORK INCLUDED .................................................................................................................................... 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................................................ 1

2.1 PARKING GARAGE SYSTEM .................................................................................................................... 1

PART 3 - EXECUTION ....................................................................................................................................... 2

3.1 INSTALLATION.......................................................................................................................................... 2 3.2 START-UP ................................................................................................................................................ 2




SECTION 15985

CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTION AND CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL


B. Provide all labour, materials, products, equipment and services to provide the carbon

monoxide and hydrocarbon detection and control systems indicated on the Drawings and specified in this Section of the Specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PARKING GARAGE SYSTEM A. Packaged, self contained instrument for sensing carbon monoxide CO

B. Sensors shall be solid state, 3 wire to meet the following requirements;

1. Range 0 to 100 ppm CO in air.

2. Temperature - 5 deg C to 40 deg C.

3. Maximum response time to set point 1 minute.

4. 220V/60 Hz.

5. Control signal 4-20mA for each sensor loop, wired to BMS.

6. Replaceable sensors.

C. Set up the following operation modes:

1. Actuate exhaust and/or supply fans in the event of the carbon monoxide

concentration reaching 50 ppm at any sample point of this zone. Refer to plans for zoning requirements.

Exhaust and/or supply fans shall be two-speed. Activation of these two-speed fans in conjunction with multiple induction fans and zoned CO sensors shall be in accordance with car park CO monitoring and control matrix to be issued to the successful bidder.

2. Actuate an audible and visual alarm common to all sample points when the

carbon monoxide reaches 100 ppm CO. Provide a pushbutton switch to silence the horn. Provide dry contacts for BMS high alarm indication.

3. Automatically reset the system if the carbon monoxide falls below the preset

limits. Provide a selector switch to override the timer to select individual sample points, automatic mode as well as zero and span.

D. Provide free standing cabinet(s) to contain all above components, completely wired.

Provide louvered rear door which opens from left to right. Cabinet dimensions not to exceed 2035 mm high x 740 mm wide x 660 mm depth.




E. Power Requirements: 220V AC, 60 Hz, 10 amp, single phase.

F. Provide calibration equipment.

G. Provide sample lines using soft copper in exposed locations and 10 mm (3/8") dia. fire retardant polytubing for concrete embedded installations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION A. Meet manufacturer’s requirements.

B. Embed sample lines in concrete structure.

3.2 START-UP A. Provide complete commissioning service by manufacturer's authorized representative

and include:

1. Physical and electrical checkout

2. Start-up, test and calibrate equipment

3. Functional checkout

4. Operator training

B. Adjust times to the allowable fan motor starts per hour.

C. Provide calibration curves and maintenance manuals for inclusion in operation maintenance manual.

END OF SECTION